Manual Siguard - en V6.20

Open Source Software
Preface
Table of Contents
SIGUARD PDP SIGUARD PDP System Overview 1

Phasor Data Processing Power System Status Curve (PSS) 2
V06.20 Applications 3
SIGUARD PDP User Interface 4
Manual Communication 5
SIGUARD PDP Engineer 6
Multisite Manager 7
Literature
Glossary
Index
E50417-H1076-C419-B7
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Subject to changes and errors. The information given in Copyright © Siemens 2020. All rights reserved.
this document only contains general descriptions and/or The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
performance features which may not always specifically document, or utilization and communication of the content
reflect those described, or which may undergo modifica- are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
tion in the course of further development of the products. including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
The requested performance features are binding only when utility model or a design, are reserved.
they are expressly agreed upon in the concluded contract.
Document version: E50417-H1076-C419-B7.02 Trademarks
Edition: 09.2020
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGRA, SIGUARD, SIMEAS SAFIR, SICAM,
Version of the product described: V06.20 and MindSphere are trademarks of Siemens. Any unauthor-
ized use is prohibited.
Open Source Software
The product contains, among other things, Open Source Software developed by third parties. The Open
Source Software used in the product and the license agreements concerning this software can be found in the
Readme_OSS. These Open Source Software files are protected by copyright. Your compliance with those
license conditions will entitle you to use the Open Source Software as foreseen in the relevant license. In the
event of conflicts between Siemens license conditions and the Open Source Software license conditions, the
Open Source Software conditions shall prevail with respect to the Open Source Software portions of the soft-
ware. The Open Source Software is licensed royalty-free. Insofar as the applicable Open Source Software
License Conditions provide for it you can order the source code of the Open Source Software from your
Siemens sales contact – against payment of the shipping and handling charges – for a period of at least
3 years after purchase of the product. We are liable for the product including the Open Source Software
contained in it pursuant to the license conditions applicable to the product. Any liability for the Open Source
Software beyond the program flow intended for the product is explicitly excluded. Furthermore any liability
for defects resulting from modifications to the Open Source Software by you or third parties is excluded. We
do not provide any technical support for the product if it has been modified.
SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual 3

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4 SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual
E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Preface
Purpose of the Manual

This manual is a reference for the SIGUARD PDP software. It provides an overview of use and configuration
options.
Target Audience
This manual is addressed mainly to the operational crew, commisioning engineers, and quality managers who
are responsible for the configuration, parameterization, and monitoring of power systems and their compo-
nents.
Scope
This manual is valid for SIGUARD PDP.
Additional Support
For questions about the system, contact your Siemens sales partner.
Customer Support Center

Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Siemens AG
Customer Support Center
Humboldtstraße 59
90459 Nuremberg
Germany
Phone: +49 911 6505 6505
E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG Phone: +49 (911) 433-7415
Siemens Power Academy TD Fax: +49 (911) 433-7929
Humboldtstrasse 59 E-mail: poweracademy@siemens.com
90459 Nuremberg Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Germany
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as
to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Preface
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given attention.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Table of Contents
Open Source Software..................................................................................................................................3
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 5
1 SIGUARD PDP System Overview................................................................................................................. 11

1.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................... 12
1.2 Performance Features ...................................................................................................... 17
1.3 System Configurations...................................................................................................... 19
1.3.1 Redundancy Versions...................................................................................................19
1.3.2 System Configuration without Communication Redundancy.........................................19
1.3.3 System Configuration with Communication Redundancy..............................................20
1.3.4 System Configuration with Server Redundancy ............................................................21
1.3.5 System Configuration with Communication and Server Redundancy.............................23
1.4 New Functions in Version V6.20........................................................................................ 24
2 Power System Status Curve (PSS)...............................................................................................................25

2.1 Functional Description...................................................................................................... 26
2.1.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................26
2.1.2 Calculations.................................................................................................................26
2.2 Display in the User Interface.............................................................................................. 29
2.3 Parameters and Setting Notes........................................................................................... 33
3 Applications................................................................................................................................................ 35
3.1 Island-State Detection (ISD)...............................................................................................36
3.1.1 Function Description....................................................................................................36
3.1.2 Display in the User Interface........................................................................................ 38
3.1.3 Parameters and Setting Notes...................................................................................... 40
3.2 Power Swing Recognition (PSR)......................................................................................... 45
3.2.2 Display in the User Interface ........................................................................................59
3.2.3 Parameters and Setting Notes...................................................................................... 69
3.3 Automatic Disturbance Recording (ADR)............................................................................ 81
3.3.1 Function Description ...................................................................................................81
3.3.2 Short-Circuit Detection (SCD) ...................................................................................... 81
3.3.3 Recognition of Producer and Consumer Failures (GDL) ................................................ 86
3.3.4 Parameters and Setting Notes ..................................................................................... 89
3.4 Voltage-Stability Curve (VSC).............................................................................................93
3.4.2 Display in the User Interface........................................................................................ 94
3.4.3 Parameters and Setting Notes ..................................................................................... 95

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Table of Contents
3.5 Automatic Event-Controlled Creation of Permanent Archives (ATT).................................. 100

3.5.1 Function Description .................................................................................................100
3.5.2 Parameters and Setting Notes.................................................................................... 101
3.6 Custom Application.........................................................................................................105
3.6.1 Function Description..................................................................................................105
3.6.2 Parameters and Setting Notes ................................................................................... 105
3.7 Special Calculation Functions.......................................................................................... 108
3.7.1 Calculation of the Frequency Based on the Phase Angle Change................................. 108
3.7.2 Calculation of the Time Change of an Analog Value....................................................108
3.7.3 Calculation of a Continuously Increasing Absolute Rate of Change in an Analog Value 108
3.7.4 Flip-Flop.................................................................................................................... 109
3.7.5 Detecting the Violation of a Voltage-Angle Difference................................................ 109
3.7.6 Timer........................................................................................................................ 110
3.7.7 Formulas for Generating Closed Dependencies (Delayer)............................................110
4 SIGUARD PDP User Interface.....................................................................................................................111

4.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 112
4.2 Program Interface........................................................................................................... 114
4.2.1 Arranging Program Interface......................................................................................114
4.2.2 Favorite Properties.....................................................................................................117
4.3 Menu and Toolbar...........................................................................................................119
4.4 Schematic Display of the Energy Supply Power System (SLD)........................................... 122
4.5 Chart View...................................................................................................................... 129
4.6 Measured Values, Applications, and Formulas..................................................................134
4.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................134
4.6.2 Selected Measurements.............................................................................................135
4.6.3 All Measurements......................................................................................................136
4.6.4 Predefined Formulas..................................................................................................136
4.6.5 Voltage-Stability Curves............................................................................................. 138
4.6.6 Application Results.................................................................................................... 138
4.6.6.1 Statistics.............................................................................................................. 138
4.6.6.2 ADR..................................................................................................................... 139
4.6.6.3 PSR...................................................................................................................... 140
4.6.7 Filter Function........................................................................................................... 140
4.7 Limit Editor..................................................................................................................... 142
4.8 Alarm List and Event List................................................................................................. 145
4.8.1 Overview...................................................................................................................145
4.8.2 Alarm List.................................................................................................................. 145
4.8.3 Event List.................................................................................................................. 146
4.8.4 Editing of Messages...................................................................................................147
4.8.5 Graphical Representation of Messages....................................................................... 148
4.9 Reporting........................................................................................................................149
4.10 Applications in the UI...................................................................................................... 153
4.10.1 Overview...................................................................................................................153
4.11 Working with SIGUARD PDP UI......................................................................................... 154
4.11.1 Sample Event............................................................................................................ 154
4.11.2 Selecting the Time Range...........................................................................................154

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Table of Contents
4.11.3 Displaying Curves...................................................................................................... 156

4.11.4 Saving and Loading Time Ranges............................................................................... 167
4.11.4.1 Saving in the Permanent Archive.......................................................................... 167
4.11.4.2 Loading Time Ranges........................................................................................... 168
4.11.4.3 Exporting Data..................................................................................................... 170
4.11.5 Deleting Time Ranges................................................................................................ 174
4.12 Conclusion from the Analysis.......................................................................................... 176
5 Communication........................................................................................................................................ 177
5.1 PMU................................................................................................................................178
5.1.3 Using Configuration Frame 3..................................................................................... 188
5.2 PDC................................................................................................................................ 190
5.3 E-Mail Notification Service (ENS)..................................................................................... 199
5.4 ICCP................................................................................................................................203
5.5 IEC 60870-5-104.............................................................................................................209
5.6 OPC................................................................................................................................ 214
6 SIGUARD PDP Engineer............................................................................................................................. 217

6.1 Basic Functions............................................................................................................... 218
6.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................218
6.1.2 Menu........................................................................................................................ 220
6.1.3 Toolbar......................................................................................................................221
6.1.4 Shared Functions.......................................................................................................222
6.1.5 Copying Elements in SIGUARD PDP Engineer.............................................................. 224
6.1.6 PMU Editor................................................................................................................ 225
6.1.7 Calculated Measurements ......................................................................................... 225
6.1.8 Limit Editor................................................................................................................235
6.1.9 Graphical Representation of Electricity-Supply Systems (Graphics).............................. 239
6.1.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 239
6.1.9.2 Properties of the Elements....................................................................................244
6.1.9.3 Element Types..................................................................................................... 253
6.1.10 Triggers.....................................................................................................................254
6.2 Applications.................................................................................................................... 255
6.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................255

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Table of Contents
6.3 Communication.............................................................................................................. 257

6.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................257
6.4 Working with SIGUARD PDP Engineer...............................................................................259
6.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................259
6.4.2 Example: Project, PMU .............................................................................................. 259
6.4.3 Example: Calculated Values....................................................................................... 264
6.4.4 Example: Limit Editor.................................................................................................267
6.4.5 Example: Graphics Editor........................................................................................... 268
6.4.5.1 Changing the Background Image and Colors.........................................................268
6.4.5.2 Dragging Elements into a Graphic........................................................................ 269
6.4.5.3 Changing Text Color and Text Position for an Element Type.................................. 272
6.4.6 Example: Application Editor....................................................................................... 273
6.4.6.1 Setting ISD Parameters......................................................................................... 273
6.4.6.2 Setting PSR Parameters........................................................................................ 274
6.4.6.3 Setting ADR Parameters .......................................................................................275
6.4.6.4 Setting VSCs Parameters.......................................................................................277
6.4.7 Example: Communication Editor................................................................................ 278
6.4.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 278
6.4.7.2 Setting C37.118 Parameters ................................................................................ 278
6.4.7.3 Setting ENS parameters ....................................................................................... 280
6.4.7.4 Setting ICCP Parameters....................................................................................... 281
6.4.7.5 Setting IEC 60870-5-104 Parameters ................................................................... 283
6.4.7.6 Setting OPC Parameters........................................................................................285
6.4.8 Example: Triggers ..................................................................................................... 286
7 Multisite Manager.................................................................................................................................... 287

7.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 288
7.2 User Interface................................................................................................................. 291
7.3 Parameters and Setting Notes......................................................................................... 293
7.4 Working with SIGUARD PDP Multisite Manager................................................................ 297
7.4.1 First Configuration of a Multisite System.................................................................... 297
7.4.2 Adding a PDC Server.................................................................................................. 299
7.4.3 Adding an IEC 60870-5-104 Interface........................................................................ 300
7.4.4 Deleting a PDC Server................................................................................................ 301
7.4.5 Deleting the IEC 60870-5-104 Interface..................................................................... 301
7.4.6 Adding Another Production System............................................................................302
7.4.7 Deleting a Production System.................................................................................... 303
Literature.................................................................................................................................................. 305
Glossary.................................................................................................................................................... 307
Index.........................................................................................................................................................311

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
1 SIGUARD PDP System Overview
1.1 Overview 12
1.2 Performance Features 17
1.3 System Configurations 19
1.4 New Functions in Version V6.20 24

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
SIGUARD PDP System Overview
1.1 Overview
1.1 Overview
SIGUARD PDP (Phasor Data Processing) is software for monitoring the status of power transmission in exten-
sive power-supply systems. When critical states are approached (frequency stability, voltage stability, trans-
mission stability, and power swing), this is detected early and displayed. The threshold at which a critical state
is reached and requires intervention can be defined and subsequently changed at any time.
In addition, SIGUARD PDP supports you in the analysis of the power-supply system.
SIGUARD PDP works together with PMUs (Phasor Measurement Units). These measuring devices are installed
in the power distribution systems and connected to the current and voltage transformers. The time of the
PMUs must be synchronized via GPS with an accuracy of < 5 μs. This enables the PMUs to acquire the meas-
ured values with amplitude and phase as phasors (indicator values) with high precision and to transmit them
via the communication interface. These time-synchronized measured values from regionally widely distributed
measuring points can be collected and evaluated using SIGUARD PDP.
Software Components
SIGUARD PDP consists of several software components. They can run on one computer, but also be distributed
over several computers. If the components are distributed over several computers, they communicate using
SSI (SIGUARD Service Interface). SSI requires a functional TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) connection.
The SIGUARD PDP software components are:
• SIGUARD PDP Server with SIGUARD PDP Archive

The SIGUARD PDP Server stores the information of the PMU devices and makes it available to the other
components. The SIGUARD PDP Server stores the information (measured values, events, and warning
indications) in a ring archive and makes it available to further processing components, for example,
SIGUARD PDP UI. The IEEE C37.118 (IEEE C37.118-2005 and IEEE C37.118.2-2011) protocol is used for
communication with the devices.
The following archive types are available:
– Ring archive
This archive is automatically overwritten after the expiry of a specified period.
– Permanent archive
Data in the permanent archive are not automatically overwritten. You can delete these data,
however.
The permanent archive is intended to provide permanent storage of interesting time slices from the
ring archive.
You can store the data manually using Save Time range or automatically using Automatic Time
Range Trigger when configured limiting values are violated.
If the Automatic Time Range Trigger is not configured correctly, for example, if you have selected a
low limit, the hard disk will fill quickly.
The ring archive and the permanent archive contain several condensed archives that are stored in addi-
tion to the data with the original reporting rate to considerably reduce the response times for longer time
ranges (starting at about 1 hour).
At a reporting rate of 50 frames per second, 50 values per second are measured. This comes to 4.3
million values per measuring point per day. Using the condensed archive, it is possible in spite of this to
display one daily curve within a few seconds.
• SIGUARD PDP ISD (Island Detection)

This component evaluates frequency deviations and thereby detects the formation of an island within the
network.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
1.1 Overview
• SIGUARD PDP PSR (Power Swing Recognition)

This component detects active power swings in the power system. The parameters of the active power
and the voltage-angle difference that is proportional to the active power are observed and evaluated for
several swings (modes). The following values are used to evaluate a detected power swing:
– Frequency
– Amplitude
– Damping ratio
– Degree of danger
In the overview diagram, a power swing is marked with colored points and in the schematic display, they
are displayed with circular areas.
• SIGUARD PDP VSC (Voltage-Stability Curve)

With PMU measurements, the voltage-stability curve for one line is displayed in the SIGUARD PDP UI.
• SIGUARD PDP COM (Communication)

– C37.118
This component conveys the data and information via an IEEE C37.118 connection to another PDP
system (for example: a second SIGUARD PDP).
– Email notification (ENS)
With the ENS (email notification) function, you can set up e-mails to be sent if certain SIGUARD
events occur.
– ICCP
With the Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol, information from SIGUARD PDP can be
relayed to a SCADA/EMS/DMS system in order to be able to display the data to the network control
personnel there and to be able to process the data further in the more significant functions of the
control system (EMS).
– IEC 60870-5-104
With the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol, information from SIGUARD PDP can be relayed to a
SCADA/EMS/DMS system.
– OPC
An OPC DA Server (V3) is made available with this component. Selected information from SIGUARD
PDP can be read out and processed further by OPC clients.
• SIGUARD PDP ADR (Automatic Disturbance Recognition)

This component detects 2 different failures in the power system.
– Short circuit
To detect a short circuit, changing the current over time is considered.
– Power-plant failure or load failure
To detect a power plant failure or load failure, changing the power frequency over time is consid-
ered.
• SIGUARD PDP UI (User Interface)

This component is the SIGUARD PDP user interface. You can use it to display and analyze the information.
• SIGUARD PDP Engineer

This component is the SIGUARD PDP parameterizing tool.
Siemens recommends installing the SIGUARD PDP Server on a server computer (for a non redundant configu-
ration) or 2 server computers (for a redundant configuration), for instance in a server room with a secure
power supply. Install SIGUARD PDP UI on a different computer.
For additional information on the configuration options, refer to the SIGUARD PDP Administrator Manual.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
1.1 Overview
[dw_siguardpdp_swcomponents, 2, --_--]
Figure 1-1 Software Components of SIGUARD PDP
SIGUARD PDP UI (User Interface)

The SIGUARD PDP user interface consists of several window sections:
• Menu and Toolbar

You can call up general functions via the menu and the toolbar.
• PSS Curve (Power System Status)

This window section displays the combined status of the entire measured or monitored power-supply
system. An exceeded critical threshold is marked in color.
• SIGUARD PDP UI - Map (Single-line diagram)

This window section shows the network topology of the power-supply system in a schematic representa-
tion. The map material used comes from NASA. Objects in a critical state are marked in color:
– Island-state detection as areas between the stations
– Power swing recognition as circular areas around the stations
– Display of the phase-angle difference as a triangular area between the stations and marking of the
reference station with a white frame
• Chart View
This window section displays the detailed curves of individual measured values or calculated values over
a defined time range. With the aid of these diagrams, you can analyze the power-supply system.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
1.1 Overview
• Measurements, applications and formulas

This window section lists the measuring points, applications, formulas, and application data such as
statistics. You can create diagrams from these lists.
• Event list, Alarm list

In this window section, events and alarm indications are listed.
• Power Swing Analysis

In this window section, the PSR jobs for the stations in the power system are listed with the corre-
sponding phase angle and PSR modes.
[rgcsem99-190713-02.tif, 2, --_--]
Figure 1-2 SIGUARD PDP UI (User Interface), Main Window

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
1.1 Overview
• Limit Editor
In the Limit Editor, you define the limiting values/thresholds for the individual measuring points of the
power-supply system that are to play a role in the evaluation.
[rgcsem99-260712-55.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 1-3 SIGUARD PDP, Limit Editor
SIGUARD PDP Engineer

With SIGUARD PDP Engineer, you configure the complete SIGUARD PDP system. Here you can configure
PMUs, calculated values, the limiting values/thresholds of the individual measured values, the graphical
display, applications, and the data distribution in separate windows for each.
[sc_Engineer_graphics_view, 2, --_--]
Figure 1-4 SIGUARD PDP, SIGUARD PDP Engineer

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
1.2 Performance Features

SIGUARD PDP is standalone software and runs independently of other applications.
You can find the recommended hardware requirements in the SIGUARD PDP Administrator Manual, System
Installation.
Data Volume
NOTE
i The increments of the functionality of the SIGUARD PDP system were tested using 800 PMUs. The PMUs
provide data with 6 phasors each, 8 digital measured values and 2 analog measured values each at a
reporting rate of 50 samples per second. This results in an increment of the functionality of 700 PMUs x (6
+ 8 + 2) = 11 200 measuring channels. With this test configuration, 4200 calculated values and 100 PSR
jobs with 4 modes each could be handled. The number of measured values displayed as numerical values
was 200, the number of power-flow direction arrows was 100. A server with 4 Xeon processors E5-4617 0
with a clock frequency of 2.90 GHz and 64 GB of main storage was used as the test hardware.
For SIGUARD PDP to handle a data volume of more than 4000 measuring channels, the appropriate unlimited
license is necessary.
The measured values can originate in PMU devices or PMUs from third parties. The devices must be able to use
the communication protocol IEEE C37.118.
Free hard disk capacity for the ring archive of approx. 14 GB is required for the following configuration:
• 64 channels (for example: 8 PMUs with 8 channels each)
• A repetition rate of 10 values per second (reporting rate)
• A storage duration of 7 days

The capacity requirement is linearly dependent on the number of channels, the repetition frequency and the
storage duration.
For storage of calculations, events, alarms, and time ranges, additional free hard disk capacity is required.
The performance of SIGUARD PDP can be improved by setting up the archive on a hard disk drive separate
from the one on which the SIGUARD PDP Server is set up. The performance can be further improved by setting
up the ring archive and the permanent archive on different hard disks.
The archive is designed as a ring archive and can store data for a duration of 7 days, for instance. After 7 days
have passed, the oldest data are overwritten. Archived data can be saved permanently in the permanent
archive or exported to a CSV file and then processed further.
SIGUARD PDP UI
Several SIGUARD PDP UIs can be operated by one SIGUARD PDP Server. The appropriate licenses are required.
An unlimited license is necessary for more than 8 SIGUARD PDP UIs. Keep in mind that appropriate server
performance must also be provided.
Time Synchronization
For the assignment of measured values detected simultaneously from locations that lie far apart, the meas-
ured values must have a precise time stamp. For this reason, all connected devices must have an accurate time
base. Siemens recommends using the time synchronization, especially in redundant systems. However, you
can synchronize the SIGUARD PDP computer, for example, with the GPS/DCF 77 time-signal receiver manufac-
tured by Hopf or via NTP (Network Time Protocol). This would also ensure highly precise time stamps assigned
by the SIGUARD PDP computer via NTP, for example, for communication monitoring. Furthermore, measuring
devices erroneously synchronized with the wrong time, for example, measuring devices using local time
instead of UTC (Universal Time Coordinated), can be recognized.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Interfaces
The PMUs are connected to the SIGUARD PDP computer via Ethernet (optionally TCP or UDP (User Datagram
Protocol)) and the communication protocol IEEE C37.118. This connection can be set up as unidirectional if
necessary. SIGUARD PDP also supports UDP multicast.
Function Monitoring
SIGUARD PDP monitors:
• The communication between the SIGUARD PDP software components
• The communication with the devices
• The function of important software components

Events and alarms are saved and can be displayed in lists (see chapter 4.8.1 Overview).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
1.3 System Configurations
1.3.1 Redundancy Versions
SIGUARD PDP supports various redundancy versions:
• Server redundancy
For this redundancy, 2 identical SIGUARD PDP servers are installed. There is no data loss if one of the 2
servers fails. By using server redundancy, configuration changes can also be made without data loss. For
server-redundancy operation, a file server with high availability and sufficient hard-disk capacity is
needed.
• Communication redundancy
With communication redundancy, SIGUARD PDP has the ability to provide communication connections to
PMUs and other PDCs via 2 separate LAN/WAN connections. In the case of interrupted communication
resulting from failure of a communication device (LAN adaptor, switch, router, etc.), the data from the
PMU continue to be received and data continues to be sent to the other PDC; there is no data loss.
This results in the following system configurations:
• Complete system (server and UI on one computer) without communication redundancy
• Complete system (server and UI on one computer) with communication redundancy
• Distributed system (1 server on one computer, one or more UI computers) without communication
redundancy
You can find more information in chapter 1.3.2 System Configuration without Communication Redun-
dancy.
• Distributed system (1 server on one computer, one or more UI computers) with communication redun-
dancy
You can find more information in chapter 1.3.3 System Configuration with Communication Redundancy.
• Distributed redundant system (2 redundant servers, one or more UI computers) without communication
redundancy
You can find more information in chapter 1.3.4 System Configuration with Server Redundancy .
• Distributed redundant system (2 redundant servers, one or more UI computers) with communication
redundancy
You can find more information in chapter 1.3.5 System Configuration with Communication and Server
Redundancy.
1.3.2 System Configuration without Communication Redundancy
The following figure shows an example of a system configuration for the SIGUARD system without communi-
cation redundancy. Normally, the PMUs are distributed at station level statewide. The SIGUARD PDP Server,
SIGUARD PDP UI computer, and SIGUARD PDP Engineer computer can be separated. Alternatively, the configu-
ration can consist of a system at office level with a joint UI and Engineer environment.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[dw system configuration wo redundancy 240314, 2, en_US]
Figure 1-5 System Configuration without Communication Redundancy (Example)
1.3.3 System Configuration with Communication Redundancy
To increase transmission security, you can configure the SIGUARD network with 2 LANs (LAN A and LAN B).
Each PC is connected to both LANs. Each LAN is connected via separate router with the Wide Area Network
(WAN). The following figure shows an example of a system configuration for the SIGUARD system with LAN
redundancy.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[dw system configuration w communication redundancy 240314, 2, en_US]
Figure 1-6 System Configuration with Communication Redundancy (Example)
The figure shows the communication via PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol). You can find information on
communication via HSR (High-Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol) in the SIPROTEC 5 Communication
Protocols manual.
1.3.4 System Configuration with Server Redundancy
To increase the security when archiving measured data, you can configure the SIGUARD network with 2
SIGUARD PDP servers (server 1 and server 2) and a highly available and satisfactorily performing network
share. This network share can be established from a redundant File Server 1 and File Server 2 with an SAS
(Serial Attached Storage).
The SAS should be equipped as follows:
• Redundant power supplies
• Redundant SAS network interface cards
• Redundant hard disks (RAID 10)

The following figure shows an example of a system configuration for the SIGUARD system with server redun-
dancy.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[dw server wo communication redundancy, 3, en_US]
Figure 1-7 System Configuration with Server Redundancy (Example)

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
1.3.5 System Configuration with Communication and Server Redundancy
You can combine communication and server redundancy:
[dw server and communication redundancy, 3, en_US]
Figure 1-8 System Configuration with Communication and Server Redundancy
The figure shows the communication via PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol). You can find information on
communication via HSR (High-Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol) in the SIPROTEC 5 Communication
Protocols manual.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
1.4 New Functions in Version V6.20
1.4 New Functions in Version V6.20

The following new functions have been added in version V6.20:
• Dynamic length of the analysis buffer in the PSR (refer to Dynamic Length of the Analysis Buffer,
Page 55)
• Study mode of the PSR (refer to Study Mode of the PSR, Page 58)
• 2nd remote port (refer to 5.1.2 Parameters and Setting Notes )
• Transmission of the short text for configuration frame 3 (refer to 5.2.2 Parameters and Setting Notes )

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
2 Power System Status Curve (PSS)
2.1 Functional Description 26

2.2 Display in the User Interface 29
2.3 Parameters and Setting Notes 33

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Power System Status Curve (PSS)
2.1 Functional Description
2.1.1 Overview
All measured values of a system are evaluated by SIGUARD PDP with the aid of an algorithm and analyzed in
such a way as to allow the point in time of a failure to be detected. The Power System Status curve (PSS curve)
is always shown graphically at the upper edge in the SIGUARD PDP UI. You can select the time range for the
analysis as desired.
[sc_PSS offline, 3, --_--]
Figure 2-1 PSS Curve with Critical Measured Values (Red Curve)
The algorithm combines the measured values of the determined criteria and calculates the display height with
them.
For this, the algorithm evaluates the following questions:
• How large is the difference between individual measured values and the set limiting value?
• How many measured values have approached the limiting value up to a defined limit?
• How is the significance of the measured values defined in comparison to other measured values (PSS
factor)?
• How many measured values deviate from the set limiting value?
If the set limiting value of the curve is exceeded, it is displayed as critical (red curve, highlighted in red).
2.1.2 Calculations
The calculation of the PSS curve is performed according to a defined algorithm in 5 steps.
Step 1: Scaling of the Measured Values to Their Limiting Value

A measured value is scaled to its upper and lower limiting values (bands). This scaled value is shown as a
percentage. The percentage states how highly loaded the corresponding band is.
• For measured values larger than the rated value, the following applies:
0 % = topical measured value lies below the band
100 % = topical measured value is larger than or equal to the upper limit of the band
Scaled value X = (topical value – lower limit of band)/(band upper limit – band lower limit)
• For measured values smaller than the rated value, the following applies:
0 % = topical measured value lies above the band
100 % = topical measured value is smaller than or equal to the lower limit of the band
Scaled value X = (topical value – upper limit of band)/(band upper limit – band lower limit)
Example:
The PSS value should be composed of the 3 measured values M1, M2, and M3. Here the current values are M1
= 157, M2 = 120, and M3 = 135.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Table 2-1 Scaling of the Measured Values to Their Limiting Value
M1 XM1 M2 XM2 M3 XM3 GDB

H3 160 H3 - H2 70.00 % 160 < H2 0 % 160 < H2 0 % 23.33 %
H2 150 > H2 100 % 150 < H1 0 % 150 H2 - H1 25.00 % 41.67 %
H1 130 > H1 100 % 130 H1 - N 66.67 % 130 > H1 100 % 88.89 %
Rated value 100 100 100
Topical measured 157 120 135
value
In this example, only the rated value and 3 upper limiting values H1 to H3 are defined. With the measured
values M1 to M3, the scaled value XM1 to XM3 are shown as a percentage.
• The first measured value M1 (157) lies between the upper limiting values H2 (150) and H3 (160). Since
the normalized value XM1 is larger than the rated value, it is calculated from:
X = (topical value – band lower limit H2)/(band upper limit H3 – band lower limit H2) = (157 – 150) /
(160 – 150) = 7 / 10 = 0.7000
The band between H2 and H3 is loaded with 70.00 %.
• The second measured value M2 (120) lies between the rated value and the upper limiting value H1
(130). Since the scaled value XM2 is larger than the rated value, it is calculated from:
X = (topical value – band lower limit N)/(band upper limit H1 – band lower limit N) = (120 – 100) / (130 –
100) = 20 / 30 = 0.6667
The band between the rated value and H1 is loaded with 66.67 %.
• The third measured value M3 (135) lies between the upper limiting values H1 (130) and H2 (150). Since
the scaled value XM3 is larger than the rated value, it is calculated from:
X = (topical value – band lower limit H1)/(band upper limit H2 – band lower limit H1) = (135 – 130) /
(150 – 130) = 5 / 20 = 0.25
The band between H1 and H2 is loaded with 25.00 %.
These percentages enter into the further calculation of the PSS curve.
Step 2: Global Average Per Band (GDB)
GDB = Sum of all (valueB * weighting) / (sum of the weightings)

GDB = (XM1 + XM2 + XM3) / 3
In the example, the weightings of the measured values are (PSS factor) = 1.
In Table 1-1, the 3 values GDB are calculated for the 3 bands, for example, in band H3: GDB = (70 % + 0 % + 0
%) / 3 = 23.33 %.
Step 3: Definition of the Local Maximum (LM)

The largest value in the highest band defines the local maximum.
Example: XM1
Table 2-2 Definition of the Local Maximum
XM1 XM2 XM3

H3 70.00 % 0% 0%
H2 100 % 0% 25 %
H1 100 % 66.67 % 100 %

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
NOTE
i If all values are 0% in the highest band H3, the highest value (deviation from 0%) in the second-highest
band H2 defines the local maximum.
Step 4: Calculation of the Average Between GDB and LM
A single failure should also be evident in the global maximum.

TB = (LMB + GDB) / 2
Table 2-3 Definition of the Local Maximum
XM1 GDB TB
H3 70.00 % 23.33 % 46.67 %
H2 100 % 41.67 % 70.84 %
H1 100 % 88.89 % 94.45 %
Step 5: Calculation of the Global Indicator

The global indicator is the average value of the sum of TB of all bands and is calculated as follows:
(TB(H1) + TB(H2) + TB(H3)) / 3 = 70.65 %
If the limiting value of 60 % is exceeded, as in the example, the PSS curve is displayed in red and is highlighted
with a red area. The red coloring represents the critical range.
NOTE
i The algorithm for calculating the PSS curve has a patent pending.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
2.2 Display in the User Interface

In the Power System Status window section, you see a curve displaying the state of the entire power system.
The curve can be calculated from all available measured values for which the limiting values are defined, refer
to chapter 2.1.1 Overview. With the SIGUARD PDP Engineer tool, you can assign parameters for which meas-
ured values are to be included in the calculation, refer to chapter 5.1.2 Parameters and Setting Notes . The
curve is calculated from the weighted distances between the measured values and their limiting values.
You can define the displayed time range of the curve. It is divided into defined time steps, for example, hours.
The right end of the diagram shows the topical value.
Displaying Topical Values

Display the topical values as described in the following:
² Click the Go online button to the right of the diagram.
The curve is continuously updated with topical values.
[sc_PSS online, 3, --_--]
Figure 2-2 Power System Status, Current Values (Online Mode)
The set time range, for example, day, is represented as a curve and updated continuously. Values that have
already been displayed are moved to the left. The latest value is shown on the right side.
NOTE
i If you have changed the Reporting rate of a PMU and then look at a time range in UI, in which the switch-
over instant lies, then it is possible that in the PSS or in Chart View either the time range before or after
the switchover is displayed. The data with the newly configured reporting rate is not displayed together
with the data of the unchanged reporting rate in one chart.
Siemens therefore recommends navigating in such a way that only the old or the new time range is visible.
NOTE
i With short scanning intervals, the curve under Statistics remains empty.
If not enough values are available yet, for example, in the start phase, the left side of the curve is empty. It is
completed by newly arriving values.
Displaying Values from the Past

For subsequent analysis, you can display values from the past (archive values) as curves in the PSS Curve and
Chart View window sections.
Set the values from the past as follows:
² Click the Go offline button to the right of the diagram.
The curve is no longer updated with topical values.
Switching to Offline mode only affects SIGUARD PDP UI. SIGUARD PDP continues to archive the incoming
values, but they are not displayed in this SIGUARD PDP UI. On the same computer, you can launch a
2nd instance of SIGUARD PDP UI and thereby stay online.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Figure 2-3 Power System Status, Offline Values
The selected time interval is set by 2 sliders. A cursor is displayed within the time interval. You can move the
sliders and the cursor on the time line with the mouse.
An enlarged display of selected values, for example, voltage and power of this time interval is possible in the
Chart View window section.
The position of the cursor in the time interval has the following effects:
• Its time position is automatically transferred to the cursors in the line charts.
• Both phasors in vector diagrams and stability curves are displayed for the instant determined with the
cursor.
The PSR overview chart shows the detected oscillations for this instant.
• The state of the objects is shown in the window section SIGUARD PDP UI - Map depending on the cursor
position.
• In the Event list, a black horizontal line is shown, which separates the range of the events already
entered from those that will arrive in the future, as seen from the cursor.
• The Alarm list displays the events that have been queued at this instant.
Setting Options/Displays
² Change the display of the curve in the PSS Curve window section using buttons and list boxes.
The following table explains the setting options and displays for the PSS Curve window section.
Table 2-4 PSS Curve Window Section
Element Explanation
You can select the date from a calendar.
You can select the time range that will be displayed as a curve from a list, for
example:
• Month
• Week
• Day
• Quarter day (6 hours)
• Hour
• 10 minutes
• Minute
• 10 seconds
You can also change the time range shown by clicking the time bar, see below.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Element Explanation
This button is used to start simulating the PSS curve. This function is available only if:
• A connection to the SIGUARD PDP server is established

• The offline mode is set
• Limiting values were changed locally
This button is used to start study mode of the PSR. This function is available only if:
• A connection to the SIGUARD PDP server is established

• The offline mode is set
For more information on the study mode of the PSR, refer to Study Mode of the PSR,
Page 58.
• When offline display is activated, the top arrows enable you to scroll forward or
backward through the value archive page by page.
• With the aid of the bottom arrows, you can move forward or backward through
the archive in small steps.
Use this button to set online mode. The topical values are displayed as a curve.
Use this button to set offline mode. Values from the archive are displayed as a curve.
Using the arrows, you can scroll through the archive.
Use this button to move the cursor to the start of the selected time range. This func-
tion is available only in offline mode.
Use this button to start the sequence. The cursors in the charts move along automati-
cally. In addition, the status of the objects at the respective instant is displayed. This
function is available only in offline mode.
Use this button to stop the sequence. This function is available only in offline mode
with launched sequence.
Use this list box to set the speed of the playback, for example x 1.5.
Use this list box to set the cycle for the updates.
For example, if you set 0.1 s, there is an update every 0.1 seconds.
Click the upper line of the time bar to increase time range shown, for example, from 1 min to 10 min.
Click the lower line of the time bar to shorten the time range displayed, for example, from 1 hour to 10 min.
[le_pss_offline, 3, --_--]
Figure 2-4 Power System Status, Changing the Time Range
(1) Time bar
Simulation of the PSS Curve

If you would like to test what effect the changed limiting values of the measured values have on the PSS
curve, you can perform a simulation of the PSS curve. In this way, you can optimize the settings of the limiting

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
values, such that the PSS curve shows the appropriate sensitivity for your power system. How a change in the
limiting values has an effect on the PSS curve, is displayed in the simulation. The simulated PSS curve is placed
as a red line on the topical PSS curve (black line).
Requirements for the simulation of the PSS curve (button Start simulation is active):
• Connection to the SIGUARD PDP server is established (PSS time is colored gray)
• Offline mode is set
• Limiting values were changed locally

You simulate a PSS curve in this way:
² Select any measured value, for example a frequency, from the list All measurements, and display these
as a diagram.
[ovcvsimu-090812-10.tif, 1, --_--]
² Display the limiting values for the displayed diagram.

² Change one or several limiting values.
NOTE
i Do not save the changes with Save limits, since otherwise the previous parameter for determining the PSS
curve would be changed in the system.
² For the simulation of the PSS curve, close the dialog for changing the limiting values with Close.
The color of the PSS bar changes from gray to orange.
² Start the simulation by clicking the button Start Simulation.
The simulated PSS curve is calculated. The original PSS curve is a black line; the simulated PSS curve with the
changed limiting values is displayed as a red curve.
Figure 2-5 PSS Curve (Original and Simulated Curve)

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
2.3 Parameters and Setting Notes

The parameters of the measuring points are required to calculate the PSS curve. These can be configured with
SIGUARD PDP Engineer:
• Amount of a phasor or an analog value
• Rated value
• 1 to 3 upper limiting values (H1 to H3)
• 1 to 3 lower limiting values (L1 to L3)
• Weighting (PSS factor)

If you wish to hide a measured value from the PSS calculation, select the factor = 0.
NOTE
i In order to be able to perform the calculation of the PSS curve, at least the rated value and one limiting
value must be specified. Here the following must apply: L3<L2<L1<Rated value<H1<H2<H3.
The rated value does not need to correspond to the thermal limiting value of the line but it must be smaller
than H1 in any case.
The specification of the limiting values relates to the rated value. The topical measured values are compared
with the limiting values.
The various limiting values have different significance regarding the rated value:
[pssgrenz-corrected, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-6 Limiting Values and Critical Ranges
(1) Limiting value H3

(4) Rated value
(5) Limiting value L1
• Measured values between H1 and L1 lie in the normal operating range
• Measured values between H1 and H2 or L1 and L2 lie in the questionable operating range
• Measured values between H2 and H3 or L2 and L3 lie in the critical operating range

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
NOTE
i Only 1 alarm is always pending. If the value exceeds the limit from H1 to H2, there are 2 events: H1
outgoing and H2 incoming.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
3 Applications
3.1 Island-State Detection (ISD) 36

3.2 Power Swing Recognition (PSR) 45
3.3 Automatic Disturbance Recording (ADR) 81
3.4 Voltage-Stability Curve (VSC) 93
3.5 Automatic Event-Controlled Creation of Permanent Archives (ATT) 100
3.6 Custom Application 105
3.7 Special Calculation Functions 108

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
3.1 Island-State Detection (ISD)
3.1.1 Function Description
The objective of island-state detection is to derive from the measured values of frequency (f), the rate of
change of frequency (df/dt) and the angle differences of the voltage phasors present in each PMU whether
partial networks, known as islands, have formed.
There are 3 component applications:
• Static Island Detection

Here, all frequency values are compared against a lower limiting value and an upper limiting value that
were previously defined. 3 different states are distinguished:
– If the difference between 2 frequency values lies below one of the lower limiting values, no
islanding is detected.
– If the difference between at least 2 neighboring frequency values lies between the lower and upper
limiting values, potential islanding is reported. This message can be understood as a warning indica-
tion. This applies only if you have activated the lower limit in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer before-
hand.
– If the difference of at least 2 neighboring frequency values lies above an upper limiting value, then,
with sufficient certainty, islanding is detected and a corresponding message is generated. This
message can be understood as an alarm indication.
If the lower limit of the frequency difference is activated, the possibility of each detected island
being broken down into further islands (subzones) is checked based on the extent to which this limit
is exceeded. In this case, a corresponding warning indication is issued for each of the affected
islands.
• Dynamic Island State Detection

Here, all rates of change of frequency are compared to one another using a previously defined limiting
value. 2 states are distinguished here:
– If the difference between at least 2 neighboring values of the rate of change of frequency lies under
the limiting value, then there is no islanding.
– If the difference between at least 2 neighboring values of the rate of change of frequency lies above
a limiting value, then islanding is possibly present or is in the process of arising. This message can be
understood as a warning indication.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
• Island-state detection based on large voltage-angle differences

The maximum angle difference of all voltage phasors with parameters set for island-state detection is
calculated.
– If this maximum angle difference is less than the limiting value set by parameterization, islanding is
not present.
– If this maximum angle difference is greater than the limiting value set by parameterization,
islanding is assumed. The voltage phasors are grouped starting with the smallest angle.
[le_character_curve_island, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-1 Different Cases for Detecting Islands Based on Angle Differences of the Voltage
Phasors
(1) 1 island, that is, no split into partial networks

(2) 2 islands
(3) 3 islands
If all the measured voltage phasors within one segment coincide with the angle of 60° set for this
example, there is no split into islands. As soon as the maximum angle is greater than 60°, islanding
is assumed and a second segment is created with 60°. This segment starts with the smallest angle
no longer contained in the first segment. All phasors in this second segment are allocated to the
second island. This procedure can also be used for 3 and more islands.
As in the case of static island-state detection based on the frequency values, here there is also a lower limiting
value whose exceedance has an appropriate warning indication Potential network split assigned to it, as well
as an upper limiting value to whose exceedance an appropriate alarm indication Network split is assigned.
For issuing warning indications, you also need to have activated the lower warning threshold in the SIGUARD
PDP Engineer beforehand.
If islands have already been detected due to frequency differences (see static island-state detection), island-
state detection based on large voltage-angle differences is performed in each of these already detected islands
separately and results in additional splits of the islands if necessary. If the warning limit is activated for the
static island-state detection, each of the detected islands is checked for possible subzones. If a subzone was
detected, appropriate warning indications are issued. However, the phase angle-specific warning limit is not
used regardless of whether it is activated.
For the parameter assignment of the application Island State Detection, see 3.1.3 Parameters and Setting
Notes.
NOTE
i If islanding was detected and subsequently an alarm was issued, the frequency and voltage-angle differ-
ence values of the individual islands can approach one another over the course of dynamic status changes
of the partial networks and even sometimes match. To prevent possible cancellation of an existing alarm
multiple times and then reissuance when the frequency and voltage-angle difference values drift apart
again in this case despite unchanged separation of the partial networks, the values of the rate of change of
frequency are also taken into account for alarm generation as these generally differ in the phases of
random agreement of the frequency and voltage-angle difference values of the partial networks.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
NOTE
i If islanding is found only based on a large angle difference of the voltage phasors, it cannot be ensured
that the allocation of phasors to islands corresponds to reality at every point in time.
3.1.2 Display in the User Interface
Display of Island State Detection in the Event or Alarm List

All indications generated by SIGUARD PDP ISD (Island State Detection) can be found in the event list. When
potential or reliable island formations are detected, corresponding entries are written into the alarm list.
[isdevent-100713-09.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-2 Alarm List, Filtered According to the Event Element Island Detection
In the filtered alarm list, the detected islands are displayed with the event ISD network split or ISD potential
network split. A reliable event for island-state detection is an ISD network split where the Message column
specifies the individual zones, identified with a consecutive index, of the corresponding PMUs and the average
frequency (ISD network split or ISD potential network split) and/or the average rate of frequency change
(ISD potential network split transition).
NOTE
i The displayed values in the respective ISD event for frequency und frequency increase are averages of the
PMU values over a time lapse (buffer size) given in the SIGUARD configuration file. Consequently, they
deviate from the respective PMU values on the measuring time point given in the ISD event. Moreover, if
several PMUs or frequency measuring points lie in a zone, then a further averaging of its mean values
occurs.
Display of Island State Detection in the Schematic Display

Various colored areas corresponding to the number of recognized islands are displayed in the schematic
display. If only one substation is in the island, the area around the substation is displayed as a square. For
several substations, the area is displayed as a polygon, with the substations as corners.
The colored display correlates with the colors of the Chart view section (1st island = orange, 2nd island =
blue, 3rd island = green, etc.).
You can find further information on parameterization in chapter 3.1.3 Parameters and Setting Notes.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[isdmap01-100713-10.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-3 Schematic Display with Recognized Islands
4 islands have been detected:
• 1. Island (orange): Copenhagen
• 2. Island (blue): Paris - Nuremberg - Rome - Munich
• 3. Island (green): Muelheim
• 4. Island (violet): Vienna

In this example, the PMUs Kassel and Leipzig were not configured for the ISD.
NOTE
i Islanding is displayed in the map in color only in the event of a Network Split. A Potential Network Split
or a Potential Network Split in Transition is not displayed in the map.
If partial networks are reconfigured in a network, unaffected islands can receive a different color as a result
of this change. Their color can change from the original status especially after a temporary change of the
island configuration and after a following recovery.
NOTE
i If the actual island configuration of a split network changes, islands that are not concerned by these
changes can get another color. After a temporary change of the island configuration and the re-establish-
ment of the original configuration, the color of the islands can be different from the original state.
Open the event list and filter the list in the column Event Element according to Island Detection.
Select an event in order to display the corresponding islanding.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[uimapisd-100713-17.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-4 Islanding with a Certain Event
NOTE
i If an island is detected, an event is generated using the application Island state detection. The event
contains information on frequencies in all islands. Since the calculated value is performed from a mean-
value generation, it can deviate from the value shown in the chart.
3.1.3 Parameters and Setting Notes
Open SIGUARD PDP Engineer and open a project. Select the Application tab.
To configure the Island State Detection, the folder ISDs is selected, and a name for the folder ISDs is defined:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[sc_ISD_name, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-5 Name for ISDs Folder Assigned
Next, the folder ISDs is opened and Island State Detection is selected.
NOTE
i You need a corresponding SIGUARD PDP license for the ISD to function. The existence of this license is not
queried in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
Functions
For a selected folder ISDs or selected Island State Detection, the following functions can be performed via
buttons.
Table 3-1 Toolbar of the ISDs Application
Element Explanation
Click the New island detection button in order to create a configuration
scheme for a new application Island State Detection in the ISDs folder.
Click the Duplicate island detection button to duplicate a configuration
of an existing application Island State Detection for further processing.
Click the Delete Island State Detection button to delete the configura-
tion for an Island State Detection application.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Parameters of an ISD Application

If the folder ISDs is opened and an Island State Detection is selected, the following middle window section
Application - Island detection is displayed:
[sc_ISD_parameters, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-6 Parameters of the Application ISDs
The setting options of the properties/parameters of the application ISDs are explained in the following table.
Table 3-2 Parameters of the Application ISDs
Element Explanation
Name (for all) In this field, the name of the application Island State Detection, for
example, ISD application, is entered.
Name In this field, the name of the subapplication Island State Detection, for
example, ISD, is entered, changed, or displayed for an existing applica-
tion.
Active If the check box is selected, the application is switched to active.
Phase angle If the check box is marked, the Island State Detection based on the
voltage-angle difference is performed additionally.
Buffer size Buffer size for averaging the values of frequency (standard = 1 s),
frequency change rate (standard = 0.2 s), and voltage-phasor angle
difference (standard = 1 s). Only these average values are used for all
calculations.
Limit for Network Split – Static Upper limiting value in Hz
If the frequency difference between at least 2 neighboring frequencies
is larger than the upper limiting value (Standard = 0.05 Hz), a network
split into 2 islands is detected.
Limit for Network Split – Dynamic Limiting value in Hz/s
If an electrical power system split into at least 2 islands was detected,
these islands will again be considered as one island only if the value falls
below the 2 limiting values Limit for Network Split – Static and Limit
for Network Split – Dynamic.
Limit for Network Split – Phase Upper limiting value in degrees
angle If within one island, the maximum angle difference of the voltage
phasors becomes greater than this limiting value, a split of this island
into 2 or more islands is assumed. See also Figure 3-1.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Element Explanation
Limit for Potential Network Split – Lower limiting value in Hz
Static If the frequency difference between at least 2 neighboring frequencies
is smaller than the lower limiting value (Standard = 0.01 Hz), no island is
detected.
If the frequency difference between at least 2 neighboring frequencies
lies between the lower and upper limiting values, there is a possible
network split.
If the check box is marked, a message Potential Network Split (if an
island split has not yet been detected) or Potential Network Subsplit (if
an island split has already been detected) is triggered if the lower
limiting value is exceeded.
Limit for Potential Network Split – Lower limiting value in degrees
Phase angle If the maximum angle difference of the voltage phasors within an
already detected island is less than the lower limiting value (for
example, 50°), no island is detected.
If the maximum angle difference of the voltage phasors within an
already detected island lies between the lower and upper limiting
values, there is a possible network split.
If the check box is marked, a message Potential Network Split is trig-
gered if the lower limiting value is exceeded.
Event Potential Network Split Tran- If the check box is marked, a message Potential Network Split Transi-
sition Enabled tion is issued if only the Limit for Network Split – Dynamic is
exceeded.
Configuration of Sites
A site is the aggregation of measuring points of a PMU.
The site consists of the measuring points for a frequency (f), a frequency change rate (df/dt) and, if necessary,
a voltage phasor (V). In order to be able to compare frequencies or frequency changing rates, at least 2 sites
per Island State Detection application must be created and switched to active.
[sc_ISD_sites_configuration, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-7 Configuration of Sites for Island State Detection
NOTE
i Empty entry fields are highlighted in red. The measuring points must be inserted here via drag and drop.
The setting options of the properties/parameters of the measuring points used for the application Island State
Detection are explained in the following table.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Table 3-3 Parameters of the Sites
Element Explanation
f Insert a measuring point for the frequency (f) from Available measure-
ments.
It is checked whether a measuring point for the frequency change rate
df/dt is also added.
If the check box Phase angle is marked, it is checked whether a meas-
uring point for the voltage phasor V is also added.
The measuring points f, df/dt, and V, if applicable, should be measured
by the same PMU.
df/dt Insert a measuring point for the rate of change of frequency (df/dt) from
Available measurements.
It is checked whether a measuring point for the frequency f is also
added.
by the same PMU.
V Add a measuring point for the voltage phasor (V) from Available meas-
urements.
It is checked whether a measuring point for the frequency change rate
df/dt is also added.
Use uniform voltage phasors of the same type, for example, phase-to-
ground voltage of the phase A, for all sites.
by the same PMU.
Active If the PMU containing the measuring points in this row of the table
delivers implausible measured values, deactivate this check box.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
3.2 Power Swing Recognition (PSR)
The SIGUARD PDP PSR (Power Swing Recognition) can recognize, evaluate, and display active-power swings in
the energy supply network. This ensures that power swings that can be dangerous for network operation are
recognized and reported automatically.
The processing procedures for recognizing and evaluating active-power swings are referred to as PSR jobs. You
can configure these PSR jobs specifically for each task. The PSR jobs contain phasor measurements, time-
stamped by the PDP server, of the PMUs associated with the respective PSR job. The phasor measurements are
then linked in a suitable manner to input variables of the PSR and accumulated over a predetermined period of
time. If such input variables are available for a minimum time period, calculations for verification and subse-
quent characterization of such an active-power swing are carried out with a repetition rate of 1 s. Power-swing
characteristic key values which describe the power-swing behavior and will be explained later on are referred
to as characteristic key values for simplicity. They are then – likewise quality-evaluated – written back to the
PDP server for further data storage and possible visualization. If predetermined characteristic key value limits
are exceeded, corresponding alarm messages are generated.
In order to take various power swings occurring simultaneously into consideration, each PSR job can detect
and process a number of power-swing modes. These power-swing modes are referred to below as modes for
simplicity. These modes are characterized by the frequency of the respective power swing, the value of which
you can specify during the configuration if it is known.
The information of interest for the PSR application is filtered out of the quality information transmitted with
the phasor data and the phasor data of the PSR jobs is additionally evaluated application-specifically as
follows:
• valid
• suspect
Phasor data is considered suspect if it was transmitted as invalid with an indication of PMU errors or with
faulty synchronization.
• invalid
If the phasor data is reported as follows, the input data is further stamped invalid:
– With an error in the PMU communication
– With missing PMU data
– With a collector time-out of the PDP server or an error in the calculation (PCL)
If phasor data is stamped out-of-service (OOS), this leads to an evaluation as invalid for voltage phasors;
this quality characteristic has no effect for current phasors.
The input data formed from the phasor data to be explained below for the respective PSR job will subsequently
be evaluated before further processing with the poorest application-specific quality of the associated phasor
data, to be referred to below merely as quality for simplicity.
NOTE
i Valid and suspect data is further processed and characteristic key values are determined if a power swing
is detected. If input data has been evaluated as suspect, possible key characteristic key values resulting
from the data processing are likewise characterized as suspect. Invalid data is not processed further; the
data necessary for processing accumulated to that point is deleted.
If the input data which was previously of invalid quality is determined to be valid or at least suspect at a
later time, the calculation and output of possible characteristic key values is only possible again after a
minimum waiting time. This waiting time is necessary for the accumulation of a minimum amount of input
data which is required for calculating the characteristic key values. In the representation of the history of
the characteristic key values, this leads to noticeable gaps even in cases in which phasor data is evaluated
as invalid only for a brief time.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Accompanying the determination and output of characteristic key values, there are messages which docu-
ment the appearance of, a significant change of, or the disappearance of the power swing in question.
You can select between 4 fundamental types of PSR jobs:
• Phase-angle difference:
For lower phase angle, the phase-angle difference of 2 voltage phasors can be taken as proportional to
the active power, as an initial approximation. This phase-angle difference can be measured using 2 PMUs
installed at different positions (see also UI: Phase-Angle Difference). This configuration is intended for
the monitoring of large-scale power swings which appear within an extensive area of the network (wide-
area power swings). The expected frequency of these power swings is less than 1 Hz.
NOTE
i If the ISD application detects an unambiguous subdivision of the previously synchronous network into
multiple subnetworks, and the PMUs belonging to a PSR job are in different subnetworks, then the input
values used for calculating the characteristic key values for the job are evaluated as invalid. Consequently
no characteristic key values that would characterize a possible power swing can be calculated for this job.
As soon as the two PMUs are again in a synchronous section of the network, the data processing for
detecting possible power swings restarts after expiration of the waiting period.
If the two PMUs are in 2 subnetworks that have been evaluated by the ISD application as only suspect of
being electrically separated, then the input values of the affected PSR job are likewise evaluated as suspect
for the period of time, but the data is processed further. The characteristic key values resulting in the case
of a possible power-swing detection themselves are then also evaluated qualitatively as suspect.
• Active power:
The Active power can be measured directly at a defined point in the network as a product of voltage
phasors and current phasors (see also UI: Active Power). This requires a PMU which provides the voltage
and current phasors. This configuration is intended for monitoring local power swings with an expected
frequency that is larger than the frequency ranges typical of wide-area power swings.
• Active power for generators

The Active power for generators type is an extension of the Active power type and is provided espe-
cially for measurements in the direct vicinity of a generator. For a given mode of a detected active-power
swing, the amplitude values determined from the various jobs of this type for the same mode are
compared to one another. The mutual amplitude ratio is determined in the form of a participation factor,
which is output as an additional characteristic key value.
• Power frequency
Based on the known relationship between power frequency and transmitted active power, active-power
swings are also verified and evaluated via a swing of the power frequency. To achieve a signal with as
little noise as possible, the power frequency value directly available from the PMU is not used in the asso-
ciated PSR job of the Power frequency type. The power frequency is instead calculated from the associ-
ated voltage phasors of one or all 3 phases.
If there is a wide-ranging spread of power swings on the network, the results of the individual jobs are
summarized and used to identify global power-swing quantities. These power-swing quantities can lead to an
issue of additional alarms. It is assumed that power-swing events that are detected by several PSR jobs in the
same frequency range belong to the same global power-swing process.
Configuration of Global Modes

There are 2 types of modes:
• Modes with specified frequency limits

If the frequency ranges in which power-swing processes are expected are known, you can take these
frequency ranges into account in the definition of power-swing modes. To do this, in the SIGUARD PDP
Engineer, specify global modes with corresponding frequency ranges within which the characteristic
frequency of the corresponding mode is expected.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
NOTE
i There are no restrictions in terms of a possible overlapping when specifying the frequency ranges for the
corresponding modes. Siemens recommends avoiding an overlapping as it can make it more difficult to
evaluate the acquired PSR results.
• Free Modes
You can specify free modes for power swings for which the frequency is not known in advance. If the
frequency of a detected power swing does not overlap the frequency range of a mode with specified
frequency limits, a corresponding frequency range is dynamically assigned to a free mode for the dura-
tion of a detected power swing. If defined frequencies can be identified during operation, in which active
power swings recur, free modes can later be replaced by corresponding modes with permanent fixed
frequency ranges.
NOTE
i If temporary frequency ranges are assigned to multiple free modes in the same period in the current PSR
application, partial overlap of the respective frequency ranges cannot be excluded in case of neighboring
power-swing frequencies. If the corresponding power-swing frequencies recur during system operation,
Siemens recommends specifying modes with fixed, non-overlapping frequency ranges for these power-
swing processes.
If several power-swing processes with sufficiently different frequencies are active simultaneously, the corre-
sponding modes can be recognized and calculated by the PSR at the preset time. To do this, the relevant
modes must be defined in full in SIGUARD PDP Engineer, complete with details of the corresponding frequency
ranges, or a sufficient number of free modes must be reserved.
The detected power-swing events are assigned in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer to the different available modes
in the sequence defined. If different power-swing events are detected at a given time, but the frequencies lie
within the same frequency ranges of a mode, the event with the higher amplitude is initially assigned to this
mode.
The power-swing event with the lower amplitude at the 1. occurrence is assigned to a free mode. This is the
case if the following options apply:
• A mode with an overlapping frequency range has been defined.
• A frequency range of this kind is currently assigned to a mode that was originally free.
If a free mode is used, a frequency range that is adjusted to the power-swing frequency is automatically
defined for this power swing for the duration of the event. This frequency range overlaps more or less with
the frequency range of the initial user-defined mode.
NOTE
i If the frequencies of different active-power swings occurring simultaneously are located in the frequency
range of the same mode, these events are assigned to different modes depending on their amplitude. If the
range of amplitudes of the observed power swings changes, the assignment of the power swings to the
relevant modes changes also or other free modes are filled. The number of these free modes is limited.
These effects can lead to assignment problems in the Chart view.
In order to avoid assignment problems, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
• When these effects occur, adjust the frequency limits of the available modes to the frequencies of the
occurring power swings.
• Add additional modes with suitable defined frequency ranges.
Configuration of Data-Processing Jobs

After configuration of the global modes, define the different PSR jobs in SIGUARD PDP Engineer. To do so,
specify the job type and the associated PMU channels, among other things.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Once you have defined global modes and PSR jobs, all global modes are adopted as job-oriented modes by the
individual PSR jobs. If you have defined the frequency ranges, the corresponding frequency ranges will be
retained. If you define additional global modes, the list of the corresponding job-oriented modes within all PSR
jobs is updated automatically.
Determining Characteristic Power-Swing Quantities for Job-Oriented Processing

The following characteristic quantities are determined:
• Frequency
The frequency of every detected power swing is determined first. The frequency is a variable that charac-
terizes the associated power-swing mode. If there are no significant changes to the network topology,
the frequency can be expected to remain constant over time.
• Amplitude
As with the other quantities, the amplitude of the power swing is also determined by evaluating the data
within a set time interval. For a useful evaluation, this time interval has to include several power-swing
periods. The signal amplitude of the observed power swing can change more or less within the evaluated
time interval. As a result, depending on the temporal waveform, the value of the determined quantity
provides only a comparatively rough indication of the actual current amplitude of the power swing.
You can set different limiting values for the power-swing amplitude in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer:
– Detection limit: This lower limit is used to suppress power-swing events that have been detected as
such in the signal evaluation, but that should not be used for further calculation because of their
low amplitude.
– Warning limit and alarm limit: Both of these limits are above the detection limit. They are used to
determine the degree of danger. You can find more information on the degree of danger in the
following sections.
For more information, refer to 3.2.3 Parameters and Setting Notes.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
• Mode shape
The Mode shape is determined only for PSR jobs that are not of the Phase-angle difference type.
Every detected power-swing mode has a well-defined frequency. This means that the signal of the associ-
ated active power has a sinusoidal curve over time. With the frequency, you can determine the phase
situation φPS of the signal at the respective time in addition to the amplitude ÂPS; see the following
diagram.
[dw_PSR_Mode_Shape_diagram, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-8 Representation of an Active Power as a Function of Time and Phase Angle
In the selected example, a power swing with a frequency of 1.2 Hz is present. This frequency has an
amplitude of 7 MW and a phase angle of +60° at the considered time of 39.1 s.
According to the convention used here, the positive maximum of the swing amplitude is at an angle of
0°. The negative maximum then correspondingly is at an angle of ±180°.
Therefore, you can represent the active-power swing in a phasor plot – similarly to the PMU measurands
current and voltage; see the following diagram.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[dw_PSR_Mode_Shape_Single_phasor, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-9 Representation of an Active-Power Swing as a Phasor Plot
In this Mode shape representation, the length of the phasor corresponds to the amplitude ÂPS of the
active-power swing. The signed angle φPS corresponds to the phase shift relative to the position of the
positive maximum power-swing amplitude.
In the offline representation of the phasor plot, the phasor of the active-power swing indicates, in the
familiar representation, the amplitude and phase angle of the power-swing amplitude for the respective
selected time. In the online representation, this phasor rotates clockwise at a speed corresponding to the
power-swing frequency; that is to say, there is one complete revolution of the phasor within one power-
swing period 1/ fPS (fPS = frequency of the active-power swing).
In this representation, the comparison of the phase angle of a selected power-swing mode for different
points in the electrical power system is of particular interest. Therefore, the calculation of the mode
shape only makes sense if all variables entering into the calculation of the power swing are measured in
the same electrical point, namely inside the same substation. PSR jobs of the Phase angle type (voltage
angles measured at 2 different positions) are therefore not considered.
If you consider the phase situation of the power swing close to or directly at the rotating electrical energy
generating units, you obtain information as to whether and to what extent individual generators – or
groups of such – are swinging together (same phase angle) or against one another (opposing phase
angle). If certain electrical sections have a pronounced reversed phase behavior, then this can be evalu-
ated as an indication that the associated positions are the respective end points of the power swing
under consideration.
The following diagram shows an illustrative example of the mode shape obtained on multiple PMUs
installed close to generators for PSR jobs of the Active power for generators type within a shared phasor
plot.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[dw_PSR_Mode_Shape_Multiple_phasor, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-10 Mode Shape – Results of multiple PSR jobs, which each determine the Local Active Power,
in a shared Phasor Plot
While generators 1, 2, and 3 are in-phase relative to one another, generators 4 and 5, which are likewise
in-phase with one another, swing in opposite phase to the first 3 generators. The power-swing behavior
of generators 6 and 7 is influenced in different ways by the 2 first mentioned generator groups.
In relation to the calculation of the global power-swing modes, the phase angles of local power-swing
modes are not further considered because the indication of the phase angle only makes sense for a
defined electrical point.
• Participation Factor
The participation factor is determined only for PSR jobs of the Active power for generators type.
The participation factor is a relative value and reflects, for a predetermined power-swing mode, the ratio
of the determined power-swing amplitude to the maximum power-swing amplitude – determined over
all PSR jobs of the Active power for generators type.
If the quality of the characteristic key values of the job with the maximum power-swing amplitude (refer-
ence jobs) is evaluated as valid for the power-swing mode under consideration, then the quality of the
participation factor for the respective job is evaluated with the same quality as the other characteristic
key values for the mode considered.
If the quality of the reference job is classified as suspect, then the participation factors for this mode are
also evaluated as suspect for all PSR jobs of this type.
Only the amplitudes of the power swing are used for calculating the participation factor. The current
absolute active power of the respective generator is not used as a possible reference value.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
• Coherence
Like the participation factor, the coherence is also determined only for PSR jobs of the Active power for
generators type.
The coherence is an attribute which indicates whether individual generators or groups of generators
swing in-phase with each other or in phase opposition against one another. For this, the φPS angles deter-
mined in the Mode shape calculation for all generators involved in a mode are placed in relation to each
other. As a reference angle, the angle of generator with the highest magnitude in this mode is defined
first.
All generators whose power-swing phase angle is within a ±10° range are defined like the reference
generator as the power-swing source for this mode. All generators whose power-swing phase angle is
within a ±10° range around the phase opposition (+ 180°) of the reference generator are defined as the
power-swing drain for this mode. All remaining phase situations of the power swing are defined as
ambiguous.
Example: The following image shows a mode with 8 generators. Generator 1 with the highest magnitude
is the reference generator. Generator 2 swings in parallel with Generator 1 and is defined along with it as
the power swing source. Generators 3 to 5 swing in phase opposition to the reference generator and
are defined as the power-swing drain. The phase situation of generators 6 to 8 is defined as non-unam-
biguous.
[dw_PSR_coherence-diagram, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-11 Coherence – Mode with 8 Generators
• Damping ratio
The damping ratio shows the behavior of the amplitude over time. This quantity is essential for assessing
the possible consequences and describes the level of amplitude attenuation related to the power-swing
frequency as a function of time. Assuming that the signals are ideal, that is there is an exponential
increase or decrease in amplitude over time, this dimensionless quantity is a relative measure of the
change in level of successive power-swing periods.
A negative damping ratio corresponds to a decreasing power swing (refer to Figure 3-12). A positive
damping ratio corresponds to an increasing power swing (refer to Figure 3-13). In the borderline case of
a signal amplitude that remains constant over time, the damping ratio takes the value 0.
In the following figure, the damping ratio is -0.1 p.u. or -10 %.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[scpuacpw-041111-01.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-12 Pickup of a Subsequent Decreasing Power Swing at a Frequency of 1.2 Hz for a PSR Job of the
Type Active Power
In the following figure, the damping ratio is +0.1 p.u. or +10 %.
[scpupadf-041111-01.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-13 Increasing Power Swing at a Frequency of 0.2 Hz for a PSR Job of the Type Phase-Angle Differ-
ence
A decreasing power swing tends to be benign, while an increasing power swing has the potential to be
dangerous for secure network operation. Similar to the amplitude process, a lower warning limit (-0.05 p.u. or
-5 %) and an upper alarm limit (-0.03 p.u. or -3 %) for the damping ratio are defined for a more quantitative
evaluation.
NOTE
i Take special note of power-swing events with a attenuation above -3 %, since further pickups in the power
system can lead to a quick rise in the amplitude.
Degree of Danger
The damping ratio and amplitude quantities are required for a meaningful estimate of the actual degree of
danger. These quantities, coupled with the associated limiting values, give a degree of danger which forms
the basis for assessing the potential consequences of the detected power-swing event.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
The following figure shows the calculation scheme used for determining the degree of danger. Depending on
the amplitude and damping-ratio limits, the degree of danger is initially indicated by an integral value that
increases gradually in line with the exposure. Within the danger classes (one cell in the following figure) calcu-
lated in this way, the degree of danger increases with amplitude and (positively) increasing attenuation by a
value between 0 and 1 (that is, a maximum of the value of the next highest danger class).
[dw_calculate_DOE_colors, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-14 Determining the Alarm Type from the Amplitude and Damping Ratio
To achieve a sufficient level of information for an initial evaluation of a power swing, neighboring danger
classes are summarized into basic groups in order to issue characteristic alarms. These groups are assigned to
a specific alarm type that reflects the danger class. The previous figure shows this assignment based on the
color scheme. You can also find this color scheme in the Power Swing Analysis module and in the map module
of the SIGUARD PDP User Interface (see 3.2.2 Display in the User Interface ). Depending on the settings
selected in SIGUARD PDP Engineer, you can prevent the output of less critical alarms for lower danger classes
in individual PSR jobs by increasing the lower danger limit in SIGUARD PDP Engineer (see Table 3-10, Notifica-
tion degree).
For the degree of danger 0 (cell at the bottom on the left in Figure 3-14), no alarm is issued as the amplitude
and the damping ration have not reached the corresponding alarm threshold.
Table 3-4 Color Scheme for Determining the Alarm Type from the Amplitude and Damping Ratio
Color Alarm Type Meaning

Yellow Notified power The degree of danger of a power swing has been classified as low (low
swing amplitude and good damping ratio).
Bright Distinct power swing Increased degree of danger
orange Possible reasons:
• High amplitude with a good damping ratio

• Poor damping ratio with low amplitude

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Color Alarm Type Meaning

Dark Critical power swing High degree of danger due to high amplitude and poor damping ratio
orange
Red Undamped critical Very high degree of danger due to high, increasing amplitude
power swing
If this alarm type varies from one evaluation cycle to the next, the previous alarm type is reset (for example,
critical power swing disappearing) and the new alarm type is set (for example, distinct power swing
appearing).
Determining Power-Swing Quantities for Mode-Oriented Processing

After processing the phasor data in the individual PSR jobs, the resulting quantities are summarized in mode-
oriented processing in order to determine the characteristic quantities for global modes. The relevant global
mode takes account the results of all PSR jobs in which a power-swing event has been detected for the associ-
ated job-oriented mode, and for which valid or at least suspect quantities have then been calculated.
• Frequency
The frequency of the global modes, which is expected to be identical for all associated modes for all PSR
jobs, is calculated as a weighted mean value of the power-swing frequencies detected in the individual
PSR jobs. In the process, suspect values are less heavily weighted than valid values.
• Damping ratio
As with frequency, the damping ratio is expected to be uniform across all associated modes for the indi-
vidual PSR jobs and is calculated as a weighted mean value. Here too, suspect values are less heavily
weighted than valid values.
• Degree of danger
The amplitude of the individual PSR jobs is not reflected directly as a quantity in the global modes due to
the different physical units (degree of angle, power and frequency) and to different rated values. In order
to compare the amplitudes of the various PSR jobs with each other to determine a degree of danger, one
relative quantity pertaining to the specific amplitude limits of the corresponding PSR job is determined in
each case. This process does not take account of the classification of the quality of the data provided by
the relevant PSR job as valid or suspect.
In order to calculate a global degree of danger, the PSR job with the highest (relative) amplitude calcu-
lated in this way is initially determined. As with job-oriented processing, the degree of danger is calcu-
lated subsequently. This process uses the current power-swing amplitude and the associated limiting
values of this PSR job. Unlike job-oriented processing, the job-oriented damping ratio is not used as a 2nd
input quantity, but rather the average value of the damping ratio calculated for the associated modes of
all relevant jobs.
The output of alarm indications for lower danger classes is prevented for the global modes, if you have
configured it for the relevant PSR jobs in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer by setting the applicable danger
limit. The global danger limit is then determined dynamically by the limit of the PSR job with the lowest
danger limit which contributes to the global power swing that is currently being evaluated.
• Participation rate
The participation rate is calculated as a measure of the pickup and spread of a global mode. The participa-
tion rate is an additional specific quantity for the global modes. The participation rate is the relative
proportion of jobs that currently contribute to the global modes, in relation to all PSR jobs.
Dynamic Length of the Analysis Buffer

For detecting oscillations, a Fast Fourier Transformation (FFT) of the input signals from the time range to the
frequency range is performed in the PSR. To improve detection, buffers of different lengths are used. This
provides the best balance between early detection and accuracy of the characteristic values.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
The following considers an oscillation resulting from a sudden change in the electrical power system, for
example, a switch off of a system of a double line.
[sc_PSR_power_swing_daminping_attenuation, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-15 Power Oscillation at 0.4 Hz and a Damping Ratio of -2 % after an Abrupt Change in Power Flow
Without dynamic adaptation of the analysis buffer, you can see the following effects: One buffer is analyzed at
each complete second. The right edge of the buffer is at real time and its left edge is at real time minus about
40 s1. In this way, the buffer contains a large proportion of the signal of the previous state and the jump itself
only a few seconds after the abrupt change. The proportion of oscillation signals grows from time step to time
step because the time frame, having a fixed width, shifts to the right. Computationally, this results in an
increasing amplitude. However, the amplitude of the oscillation actually decreases. As a result, the damping
ratio is evaluated as being too poor and the degree of danger is evaluated as being too high.
To eliminate such effects in the event of abrupt changes, you can configure the job so that the input signal of
the job is monitored for sudden changes in the signal (Jump detection). If the absolute difference between 2
consecutive input values is greater than the set limiting value, a jump is detected. At this point, the left edge
of the analysis range is set to the time of the jump so that only the time range of the power swing is analyzed
in the buffer.
For analyzing the buffer with an FFT, the number of samples must be truncated to a value of 2N with N = {3, 4,
5, ...}. For this purpose, the left edge of the analysis range is shifted more to the right if necessary (2N crite-
rion).
Moving the left edge of the analysis buffer can make the remaining buffer so small that analysis in the current
time step is not possible without adequate accuracy. The FFT results are then not used further.
In the following time steps, the analysis range of the buffer is increased again if necessary. This happens as
soon as the number of samples following the abrupt change is greater than 2(N+1). This improves the accuracy
of the results. This continues until the maximum buffer size (and thus the maximum accuracy) is achieved.
With a decreasing power swing, increasing the buffer analysis range increases the amplitude from one time
step to the next because there is now more data from the starting time range of the power swing in contrast
to the previous time step. However, as this is determined by the algorithm, the result of the amplitude for the
time when the analysis range was increased is marked with the quality information not reliable. The power
swing is not evaluated regarding the damping and the degree of danger, alarms or events are not issued.
In the following time step, the damping and degree of danger are marked with the quality information not
reliable because they are each calculated with at least 1 value of the amplitude with this quality.
After the analysis of the frequency spectrum from the FFT for existing peaks, a check is made whether the
buffer contains an analysis range corresponding to at least 2 periods of this oscillation for each detected peak.
If not, the results are discarded because they are not of sufficient quality in terms of amplitude and frequency
and thus the degree of danger (2-period criterion).
For illustration purposes, Table 3-5 shows the dynamic buffer size for a PMU with 50 measured values per
second during analysis of the oscillation event as in Figure 3-15. The Samples from the PMU column indi-
cates the number of samples with data of the oscillation event, the Samples to the FFT column indicates the
number of samples sent for analysis by the FFT. The period is 2.5 s.
1 The precise duration of the buffer depends on the oscillation frequency and the reporting rate of the PMU involved.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Table 3-5 Dynamic Analysis-Range Changes during the Oscillation Event
Time Samples from Samples to the Buffer Length Comment

the PMU FFT [s]
15:21:05 0 0 0 Event occurs
15:21:06 50 32 0.64 No result as per the 2-period crite-
15:21:07 100 64 1.28 rion
15:21:08 150 128 2.56
15:21:09 200 128 2.56
15:21:10 250 128 2.56
15:21:11 300 256 5.12 The amplitude can be calculated
but the damping ratio or criticality
cannot. As a result, only the ampli-
tude is issued.
15:21:12 350 256 5.12 As 2 consecutive amplitude results
are now available, the damping
ratio and criticality can also be
determined. First generation of
alarm and event indications.
15:21:16 550 512 10.24 Extension of the buffer and there-
fore a greater proportion of oscilla-
tion data with a higher amplitude.
This means that the amplitude is
increasing and is marked as not
reliable. Evaluation of the damping
and of the degree of danger is
skipped.
15:21:26 1050 1024 20.48 Extension of the buffer, see also
15:21:16
15:21:46 2048 2048 40.96 Extension of the buffer, see also
15:21:16, maximum buffer size
reached
15:22:21 2048 2048 40.96 Amplitude drops below the detec-
tion limit, no results issued, oscilla-
tion event ended.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
The following figure shows the comparison of the analysis results for amplitude, damping ratio, and degree of
danger based on the oscillation event shown in Figure 3-15. These results are shown with and without jump
detection and consequently the dynamic length of the analysis buffer. Consider that, starting at 15:21:46, the
results for both variants are identical because the buffer lengths are identical and, consequently, only the
curves for the variant without jump detection are visible.
[sc_PSR_behavior_amplitude_damping_risk, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-16 Curves Showing Amplitude, Damping Ratio, and Degree of Danger
The previous figure shows the advantages of the dynamic buffer length based on jump detection:
• The oscillation event is detected earlier.
• The amplitude is calculated correctly at the beginning.
• As a result, the damping is also correct from the beginning (negative instead of positive).
• The degree of danger shows the expected downward curve.
Study Mode of the PSR

The configuration of the PSR is an iterative process as knowledge about the dynamic processes increases more
and more by using the PSR and this knowledge provides the requirements for configuration changes. Before
now, it was only possible to check the effectiveness of these configuration changes if a similar event occurred
again within a short time.
To check the effectiveness of a configuration change, SIGUARD PDP offers the possibility to check the configu-
ration changes done with the SIGUARD PDP Engineer in the so-called PSR study mode before activating them.
For this purpose, another instance of the PSR process is started on the workstation computer. This computer

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
repeats the calculation of the PSR results using the changed configuration and the PSR input data from the
past. The results are not entered into the archive. Instead, they are saved in local files on the UI computer and
can be displayed and compared to the original data using the SIGUARD PDP User Interface.
For the study mode of the PSR, perform the following steps:
• Open the SIGUARD PDP User Interface.

In the Offline mode, search for an oscillation event in the past where the PSR results can be improved by
optimizing the configuration.
• Open the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.

Make the appropriate configuration changes.
Save and validate the configuration, but do not activate it.
• Open the SIGUARD PDP User Interface.

Start the PSR study by clicking the Start PSR study button in the PSS Curve window section.
The PSR process starts in the background, reads the changed configuration and the input data of the jobs
from the SIGUARD PDP archive and then recalculates the results that are saved in local files. Depending
on the selected time range, this can take several minutes. During this time, the text Stop PSR study is
shown on the button. With this button, you can interrupt the process.
After the study run is finished, an additional element PSR Study is displayed in all Chart Views in the
Measurements, applications and formulas window section of the SIGUARD PDP User Interface. To
compare the original and modified configurations, you can display the result data from the PSR study in
the same charts to check the configuration changes.
• If the configuration changes have the desired effect, activate these changes using the SIGUARD PDP Engi-
neer. Otherwise, you can continue to change the configuration and then restart the PSR study.
NOTE
i At the left edge of the time range, the results of the study mode differ from the original results even with
identical configuration, because in the study, the internal buffers of the PSR must first be filled.
NOTE
i In the study mode, ISD messages in the event list and thus any detected island formations are not
processed. The study results differ from the original results even with identical configuration.
A detected active-power swing is displayed in various window sections at the user interface (UI):
Display of Power-Swing Recognition in the Schematic Display

A power swing can be observed between 2 locations by evaluating the phase-angle difference of the PMUs
involved, or at a single location by evaluating the active power determined there.
If a power swing measured in terms of phase-angle difference is present, the locations of both PMUs involved
are circled and the associated connection line of the same color is inserted between them (see connection
Paris – Rome in the following figure). If a power swing measured in terms of active power at an individual
PMU is present, then the PMU where the measurement was made is marked with a circle (see Copenhagen in
the following figure).
The color of the icon corresponds to the markers 1 to 4 in Table 3-6.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[scpswmap-100713-01.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-17 Schematic Display of Power Swings Related to Phase-Angle Difference (Paris – Rome) and
Active Power (Copenhagen)
[uimappsr-100713-18.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-18 Power-Swing Recognition with a Certain Event
For PSR jobs of the type Active power for generators, you can select whether the coherence of oscillations of
the generators to one another is to be displayed instead of the degree of danger (colors of the marking
according to Table 3-6.
To do this, the following circles are displayed at the location of the detected power swing:
• Red circle:
Power-swing source

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
• Green circle:
Power-swing drain
• Gray circle:
Source or drain cannot be allocated in an unambiguous manner
You can select between the following options:
• Only the coherence is displayed:

The degree of danger is not displayed; selected element:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
• The coherence for PSR jobs of the type Active power for generators and of the degree of danger for all
the other PSR jobs are displayed.
Selected element:
• If no element is selected, the criticality is displayed for all job types:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
NOTE
i The coherence is calculated and displayed independently from the setting of the Notification degree and
of the determination of the degree of danger. The coherence is calculated and displayed as soon as the
magnitude exceeds the threshold value of the detection limit (Threshold - Magnitude/Detection).
Display of Power-Swing Recognition in the Alarm List

All messages generated by SIGUARD PDP PSR can be found in the event list. For recognized power swings,
depending on the selected settings, the corresponding entries can be found in the alarm list. A pickup of a
global mode or an associated job-oriented swing is reported.
[sc_PSR_filtered_alarm_list, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-19 Alarm List Filtered According to the Event Element Power Swing Recognition
In the filtered alarm list, the recognized power swings are displayed with the corresponding event. The time at
which the event was detected is specified first. This time corresponds to the last time stamp of the associated
phasor data received from the PDP server. In case of a pickup of a global mode and a job-oriented mode, their
name, danger class, and pickup frequency are given. The pickup frequency is within the interval of a frequency
range that you have specified for this mode. For free modes, the frequency is within a frequency range
defined only for the duration of the pickup. This frequency range depends on the associated pickup.
NOTE
i In order to make a clear distinction between pickups for global and job-oriented modes in the event or
alarm list, ensure that you give them a suitable name when defining the respective modes in the SIGUARD
PDP Engineer.
You can find more information related to naming in chapter 3.2.3 Parameters and Setting Notes.
The alarm indications are issued only based on the values of the calculated power-swing quantities. Classifica-
tion of the quality of the results as valid or suspect is not taken into account.
Display of Power-Swing Recognition in the Power Swing Analysis

In the window section Power Swing Analysis, all global modes configured with the SIGUARD PDP Engineer
(mode-oriented view) and the different PSR jobs with associated job-oriented modes (job-oriented view) are
displayed.
In the mode-oriented view, the global power-swing quantities (frequency, attenuation ratio, degree of danger,
and participation rate) resulting from the evaluation of the associated job-oriented modes are displayed for
each global mode. Under the global mode, all the PSR jobs are listed that have the characteristic key values of
the respective local mode (frequency, amplitude, attenuation, degree of danger, and shape and participation
factor depending on the job type). Thus, a direct comparison between different parameters from the global
and associated job-oriented modes is possible.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[sc_PSR_modes, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-20 Power Swing Analysis Window Section – Mode-Oriented View (Online Mode)
In the job-oriented view, all PSR jobs are displayed with the associated real-time interim data (phase-angle
difference or active power) calculated from the phasor data, along with the associated job-oriented modes.
The number of job-oriented modes corresponds to the number of global modes. For every job-oriented mode,
the associated analog characteristic key values (frequency, amplitude, attenuation and degree of danger) are
available and can be reproduced in the Chart view as a function of time; for jobs that are not of the Phase
angle difference type, the key characteristic figure Mode shape can also be displayed in a phasor plot.
Picked-up modes are displayed using colored symbols that correspond to the relevant danger class. For jobs of
the Active power for generators type, the characteristic key value participation factor is also available. You
can find more information on this in Table 3-6.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[sc_PSR_job-oriented, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-21 Power Swing Analysis Window Section – Job-Oriented View
Click the icon to open the PSR job in the PSR-Tree-View for all global modes, for which the largest rela-
tive amplitude has been calculated in the associated mode. This function is only available in offline mode.
NOTE
i For a global mode, the danger class indicated by the color of the PSR Event may differ from the value of the
corresponding mode of the maximum (relative) amplitude of associated PSR Jobs. In such cases, this is
caused by the attenuation ratio used in the calculation of the degree of danger. The attenuation ratio for
the job-oriented mode is taken from its data. The attenuation ratio for the global mode is derived from the
notification of the corresponding values for the associated modes in all jobs.
Table 3-6 Power Swing Analysis Window Section
Element Explanation
Power Swing Recognition Click the element and drag it into a Chart view in order to generate a PSR
overview Overview.
Click this element to close the entire PSR tree structure.
Click this element to open the first 2 hierarchies of the PSR tree structure.
Click this element to open the entire PSR tree structure.
Click this element to display the name of the measuring points in the PSR tree
structure or switch to display of the parameter names again.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Element Explanation
Click this element to open the most critical jobs for each global mode in the
mode-oriented view. This function also remains active when the black slider for
the PSS curve is moved to another time, that is, other jobs are then opened in
the tree if the degree of danger has changed.
You can only click this element in offline mode.
This function remains active until you click the element again, switch to online
mode, or click elsewhere in the tree to open a node.
Element for displaying the most critical jobs for each global mode in mode-
oriented view - active
Element for displaying the most critical jobs for each global mode in mode-
oriented view - not clickable/online mode
Gray marking
No power swing was recognized.
Yellow marking (1)
PSR notified power swing
A recognized power swing was reported.
Bright orange marking (2)
PSR distinct power swing
A distinct power swing was recognized and reported.
Dark orange marking (3)
PSR critical power swing
A critical power swing was recognized and reported.
Red marking (4)
PSR undamped critical power swing
An undamped power swing with a large amplitude was recognized and
reported.
Display of Power-Swing Recognition in the Power Swing Recognition Overview

All power swings detected are displayed in an overview diagram as points having a given attenuation and
frequency. The color of the points reflects the danger class of the power swing in agreement with the corre-
sponding entries in the event list. Points located on a common straight line through the zero point have the
same attenuation ratio.
NOTE
i If you have created several PSR instances in SIGUARD PDP Engineer, note that the events relating to all PSR
instances are displayed in the PSR Overview Diagram. It is not possible to see which displayed event comes
from which PSR instance.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[sc_PSR_overview, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-22 Recognized Power Swing Diagram Overview (Frequency Over Attenuation)
This diagram can be displayed by drag and drop from the Power Swing Analysis in the surface component
Chart View (by selecting the diagram Overview of the Power Swing Recognition and dragging into the lowest
section of a Chart View). The diagram shows all recognized power swings for the current point in time as dots
in the frequency damping diagram. The dotted lines represent a damping ratio of -0.03 p.u. or -3 % and -0.05
p.u. or -5 %.
Despite considerably poorer attenuation, the power swing at 4.3 Hz has a significantly lower danger class than
the power swing at 1.5 Hz. The cause of this lower danger class can be attributed to a correspondingly lower
amplitude of the power swing (not shown in the figure).
NOTE
i The events from the job-oriented processing and the events from the mode-oriented processing are
displayed in the PSR Overview Diagram. As a result, direct differentiation between both types, particularly
in online mode, is not available automatically.
Display of the Coherence in the Chart View (Coherence Chart)

A bar chart shows all detected generator swings for the current time (see Chapter 3.2.1 Function Description,
section Coherence.) For a detailed description, see the information displayed. Only the values for Active
power for generator (PG jobs) can be displayed.
You can display this diagram by drag and drop from the Power Swing Analysis in the surface component Chart
View (by selecting the diagram Coherence of the Power Swing Recognition and dragging into the lowest
section of a Chart View). The diagram shows the opposite swings for a specific time.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[sc_PSR_coherence, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-23 Power Swing Recognition Coherence Diagram
The coherence and magnitude of the swings are displayed as different color bars:
• Red: Power-swing source
• Green: Power-swing drain
• Gray: Oscillation cannot be allocated in an unambiguous manner

The bar length corresponds to the magnitude of the active power in a mode. Bear in mind that this diagram
(similar to the Overview diagram) displays multiple modes. This is why you can see 3 bars in the image at PSR
Job CphS-BlnW PG.
You can copy Coherence view into the clipboard via the context menu.
NOTE
i The coherence is calculated and displayed independently from the setting of the Notification degree and
of the determination of the degree of danger. The coherence is calculated and displayed as soon as the
magnitude exceeds the threshold value of the detection limit (Threshold - Magnitude/Detection).
NOTE
i The channels required for the illustration of the Overview and Coherence chart are not taken into account
when exporting chart data.
Display of the Input Curves and Quantities in the Chart View

From the Power Swing Analysis interface component, the real-time interim values (phase-angle difference or
active power) and the resultant characteristics of a recognized mode and job-oriented processing, along with
the mode-oriented processing used to summarize these results, can be displayed as curves in the Chart View
interface component.
The characteristic values of a job-oriented processing mode are as follows:
• Frequency
• Amplitude
• Mode shape (only for jobs that are not of the Phase angle difference type)
• Participation factor (only for jobs of the Active power for generators type)

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
• Damping ratio
• Degree of Danger
The characteristic values of a mode-oriented processing mode are as follows:
• Frequency
• Damping ratio
• Degree of Danger
• Participation rate
Together with the phasor data, the PSR receives a defect status which corresponds to the data from the PDP
Server. Depending on the evaluation of this status, the results of the PSR are evaluated as follows.
• Valid data:
The data is evaluated as valid if it has been calculated on the basis of error-free input data from the PDP
server and without restrictions in the application-specific calculation.
• Invalid data:
The data is evaluated as invalid if, for example, the associated PMU reports an error or does not supply
any data. In this context, if at least a single phasor value is marked as invalid, the real-time interim data
and the power-swing quantities are not calculated. These are each marked as invalid. As a result, there is
no available data in the UI.
• Suspect data
The data is evaluated as suspect when the application results are based on error-free input data from the
PDP server, but uncertainties have occurred during the calculation. They are displayed in the UI as
broader lines or points of the same color. These uncertainties can occur when one PSR job is used to
process data from different PMUs which ISD detects as being in 2 potentially separate electrical islands.
This requires the ISD to be running as a parallel application. If these islands are recognized definitively as
different islands, the results of this PSR job are then also marked as invalid.
If a power swing is detected on the basis of the data, the status and display of the real time interim
values are adopted for the resultant power-swing quantities. An additional example of suspect values is
when they result from the start of a power swing in the corresponding mode. This also applies when the
quantities were calculated from a data interval of a different length compared to the quantities obtained
from the previous evaluation cycle.
Valid and suspect data can be used when merging power-swing quantities obtained through the job-oriented
process with global quantities within the associated global mode. If at least one PSR job with suspect values is
used in a global mode, the resulting global quantities are also marked as suspect and displayed accordingly
with a broader line in the UI Chart View. Compared to valid values, job-oriented characteristic key values
marked as suspect contribute to the resultant global quantities with a lower weighting.
NOTE
i • A separate license is required for the application PSR. If you have not obtained a PSR license, then this
application cannot be run.
• In order to avoid overload of the server, check the computing time needs of PSRx64.exe before you
define other PSR jobs. You can observe the computing time needs in percent on the Processes tab of
the Windows Task Manager. The application should not consume more than 50 % of the calculation
module (approx. 12.5 % in case of a four-core processor).
• A patent is pending for the algorithms of the PSR.
For more information about parameterization of the PSR, please refer to the following chapter.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
To configure power swing recognition, the folder PSRs is selected, and a name for the folder PSRs is assigned:
[sc_PSRs_name, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-24 Name for PSRs Folder Assigned
Next, the folder PSRs is opened and a power swing recognition is selected.
NOTE
i You need a corresponding SIGUARD PDP license for the PSR to function. The existence of this license is not
Functions
For a selected folder PSRs or selected power swing recognition, the following functions can be performed via
buttons.
Table 3-7 Toolbar of the PSRs Application
Element Explanation
Click the New Power Swing Recognition button to create a configuration
scheme for a new application Power swing Recognition in the PSRs folder and a
subordinate PSR job.
Click the Duplicate power swing recognition button to duplicate a configura-
tion of an existing application Power swing Recognition for further processing.
Click the Delete Power Swing Recognition button to delete a configuration for
an application Power swing Recognition.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
NOTE
i Create multiple PSR instances only if it is necessary to do so. This generally applies to the monitoring of
electrical power systems which can be considered as separate in physical terms (for example, 50/60 Hz).
Parameters of the PSR Application

If the folder PSRs is opened and you have opened a new power swing recognition, the following middle
window section Application - Power Swing Recognition is displayed:
[sc_PSRs_parameters, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-25 Parameters of the PSRs Application
The setting options for the properties/parameters of the application PSRs are explained in the following table.
Table 3-8 Parameters of the PSRs Application
Element Explanation
PSR Name In this field, the name of the application Power swing recognition is entered,
changed, or displayed for an existing application.
Active If the check box is selected, the application is switched to active.
ISD If the check box is selected, the results of the application ISD (Island State Detec-
tion) are used by suppressing the calculations of jobs whose input variables lie in
2 different islands.
Nominal frequency With this list box, you define the rated frequency, that is, 50 Hz or 60 Hz.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Parameters of the Global Modes

If you have selected Modes under PSRs > PSR common, the following middle window section Application
Power Swing Recognition is displayed:
[sc_PSRs_Modes, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-26 Parameters of the Global Modes
Here, you can create, change, and delete global modes. If you create a new mode, the name space is initially
empty.
The entered name is also used for the automatic generation of names for the following output quantities
(outputs):
• Frequency
• Magnitude (value cannot be selected in the SIGUARD UI)
• Damping Ratio
• Degree of Exposure (DoE)
• Job ID of Maximum Magnitude (value cannot be selected in SIGUARD UI)
• Detection Percentage
You can change this name at a later stage. If you change the name of the mode at a later stage, the names of
the output quantities will not be changed automatically.
You can define frequency ranges for the relevant mode. Recognized power swings which lie within a
frequency range defined in this way will be assigned to the corresponding mode. If you do not define
frequency ranges, detected power swings that do not correspond to one of the frequency ranges defined in
the other modes can be allocated automatically to these free modes for the duration of the power swing. The
modes are used in the sequence shown here.
The modes you create in this Editor are adopted for all previously created jobs along with the specified
frequency limits. In the individual jobs, you only need to do set the specific name for the new modes created
in this way.
The setting options for the properties/parameters of the global modes are explained in the following table.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Table 3-9 Parameters of the Global Modes
Element Explanation
Name In this field, the name of the global mode is entered, changed, or displayed for an
existing PSR job. If you have entered the name, the corresponding outputs are
created for the associated quantities.
Frequency band If you want to reserve the mode for power swings at certain frequencies, activate
the check box.
If the check box is selected, the fields for Maximum frequency and Minimum
frequency are released for the maximum and minimum frequencies permitted
for this mode.
Minimum frequency Minimum frequency
Power swings with a natural frequency higher than this minimum frequency and
lower than the maximum frequency are preferentially assigned to this mode.
Maximum frequency Maximum frequency
Power swings with a natural frequency higher than the minimum frequency and
lower than the maximum frequency are preferentially assigned to this mode.
Parameters of a PSR Job

If you have selected the PSR Job under PSRs > PSR common > Jobs, the following middle window section
Application Power Swing Recognition is displayed:
[sc_PSRs_parameters_PSRjob, 4, --_--]
Figure 3-27 Parameters of the PSR Job
The setting options for the properties/parameters of a PSR job are explained in the following table.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Table 3-10 Parameters of a PSR Job
Element Explanation
Job Name In this field, the name of the PSR job is entered, changed, or displayed for an
existing PSR job.
By entering the name, the associated output is created for the job:
• For the active power for jobs of the Active power and Active power for
generator types
• For the phase-angle difference for jobs of the Phase angle type
• For the frequency for jobs of the Power frequency type
Active If the check box is selected, the PSR job is switched to active.
ISD If the check box is selected, the processing of this job is set, if the ISD has recog-
nized that the input values lie in different islands.
This only applies if the ISD parameter of the superordinate PSR application is also
selected.
Only effective with jobs in the Phase angle job type.
Job type PSR recognizes 4 different job types:
• Active power:
Voltage and current are linked to one another at a PMU location. The active
power calculated from that is analyzed for power swings.
• Phase angle (Phase-angle difference):
The voltage phasors obtained at 2 different locations are taken for calcu-
lating the voltage phase angle difference. The voltage phase angle differ-
ence is used for power-swing analysis.
• Active power for generator:
Extension of the Active power type especially for measurements in the
direct vicinity of a generator.
• Power frequency:
Based on the known relationship between power frequency and transmitted
active power, active-power swings are also determined and evaluated via a
swing of the power frequency.
Reference This value is used as the reference value for the relative threshold values stated
below for Threshold alarm, Warning, Detection, and Detection level of the
jump detection. Refer to chapter 3.2.1 Function Description.
Threshold – magnitude/ If this relative value for the amplitude is exceeded, then this power swing is
alarm placed in the 1st row of the degree of danger table (DOE table, refer to
3.2.1 Function Description). Reference value is the rated value, see above. Refer
to chapter 3.2.1 Function Description.
Threshold – magnitude/ If this relative value for the amplitude is exceeded but not the corresponding
warning alarm threshold, then this power swing is placed in the 2nd row of the degree of
danger table. Reference value is the rated value, see above. Refer to chapter
3.2.1 Function Description.
Always set the Warning threshold lower than the Alarm threshold.
Threshold – magnitude/ The power swing is not noted if the amplitude of this relative value is not
detection exceeded.
Always set the Detection threshold lower than the Warning threshold.
Threshold – damping If this limiting value for the damping ratio is exceeded, this power swing is placed
ratio/alarm in the 3rd or 4th column of the degree of danger table. If the damping is positive,
the value is placed in the 4th column. Note that this limiting value must be nega-
tive. Refer to chapter 3.2.1 Function Description.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Element Explanation
Threshold – damping If this limiting value for the damping ratio is exceeded but not the corresponding
ratio/warning alarm threshold, then this power swing is placed in the 2nd column of the degree
of danger table. Note that this limiting value must be negative. Refer to chapter
3.2.1 Function Description.
Jump detection – Active Activate this check box, if you need the function Dynamic length of the analysis
buffer. Refer to chapter 3.2.1 Function Description.
Jump detection – Detec- If the difference between 2 consecutive amplitudes is greater than this Detection
tion level level multiplied by the reference value (see above), a jump is detected and the
left edge of the analysis buffer is moved to the right.
Jump detection – Max In the event of a short circuit with subsequent actuation of the protection system,
clearing time 2 jumps occur quickly one after another. If the interval between 2 detected jumps
is less than the Max clearing time, the right edge is set to the 2nd jump. Other-
wise, the right edge remains on the 1st jump to be able to detect already existing
oscillations.
Notification degree The list box Notification degree specifies the PSR alarms generated by the appli-
cation:
• No events:
No PSR alarms are displayed.
• Undamped critical:
Only PSR alarms with the degree of danger Undamped critical are
displayed.
• Critical:
Only PSR alarms with the degrees of danger Critical and Undamped critical
are displayed.
• Distinct:
Only PSR alarms with the degrees of danger Distinct, Critical, and
Undamped critical are displayed.
• Notified:
PSR alarms with all degrees of danger are displayed.
NOTE
i Observe the following when setting the amplitude limiting values:

If you set the detection limit too low, modes that are not interesting because of their low amplitude are
recognized. These modes can have the following effects:
• Increased computer utilization
• Cluttered presentation of overall power swing activity in the UI

If you set the detection limit too high, significant power swing processes are not detected at an early stage,
if at all.
If you set the warning or alarm limit too high, power swings which arise suddenly or are distinct will either
not be reported in an appropriate way as an alarm, or will be reported late.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Input Parameters
After the general parameters have been set for the PSR job, the Inputs (phasor measuring channels for
voltage and current) must be defined in the middle window section Application Power Swing Recognition
for an individual phase or for all 3 phases.
[sc_PSRs_input_parameters_phases, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-28 Input Parameters for the Phases
The setting options for the properties/parameters of the Inputs are explained in the following table.
Table 3-11 Parameters of the Input Variables
Element Explanation
Inputs L1 - L3 The following measuring points Available measurements must be defined for
each phase:
• One measuring point Voltage 1 and one measuring point Current for the
Active power and Active power for generator job types
• One measuring point Voltage 1 and One measuring point Voltage 2 for the
Phase angle job type
• One measuring point Voltage 1 for the Power frequency job type
These values are dragged into the table via drag and drop from the Available
measurements. Fields that must contain values are marked red.
Only one phase If the check box is selected, only 1 phase is available for this measuring point. In
this case, the rows of the other 2 phases are hidden.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Determine Job-Oriented Modes

Following definition of the input variables, the Modes must be defined in the middle window section Applica-
tion Power Swing Recognition2.
For this, a mode name is defined. The associated outputs are created automatically for the following quanti-
ties:
• Frequency
• Magnitude
• Participation factor (only for jobs of the Active power for generator type)
• Mode shape (not for jobs of the Active power type)
• Damping Ratio
• Degree of Exposure (DoE)
[sc_PSRs_definition_mode_names_outputs, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-29 Definition of the Mode Name/Outputs
The setting options for the properties/parameters of the application Modes are explained in the following
table.
2 . A mode is characterized by the frequency of an associated power swing. If different modes occur simultaneously with similar
frequencies, the PSR may not be able to differentiate the individual modes in the system.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Table 3-12 Parameters of the Input Variables
Element Explanation
Name In this column, you can assign a job-specific name to the mode.
When a name is entered for the mode, for example, Mode4, the details in the
Mode column are adapted to the corresponding output quantities under
Outputs.
Frequency band This check box indicates whether this is a free mode or a mode with a specified
frequency range. This status is automatically adopted from the associated global
mode and cannot be changed here. To change the value of this status, switch to
the section PSRs > PSR common > Modes > Global modes.
Minimum frequency Minimum frequency
Power swings with a natural frequency higher than this minimum frequency and
lower than the maximum frequency are preferentially assigned to this mode. The
section is automatically adopted from the associated global mode and cannot be
changed here. To change the value of this status, switch to the section PSRs >
PSR common > Modes > Global modes.
Maximum frequency Maximum frequency
Power swings with a natural frequency higher than the minimum frequency and
lower than the maximum frequency are preferentially assigned to this mode. The
section is automatically adopted from the associated global mode and cannot be
changed here. To change the value of this status, switch to the section PSRs >
PSR common > Modes > Global modes
NOTE
i You can change the settings for Frequency band, Minimum frequency, and Maximum frequency only in
the section PSRs > PSR common > Modes > Global modes.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Selecting Modes
In order to maintain the overview with several modes, the entire row can be selected for one mode, for
example, Mode1. In this case, only the outputs for Mode1 are displayed.
[sc_PSRs_parameters_selected mode, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-30 Selected Mode/Outputs
Table 3-13 Parameters of the Output Quantities
Element Explanation
Mode If a name is selected for the mode, for example, Mode4, the corresponding
Outputs are displayed with the name of the mode.
Type Type of the output quantity
Name Name of the output quantity

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
You can find further information on saving, activating and validating the project in chapter 6.1.4 Shared Func-
tions.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
3.3 Automatic Disturbance Recording (ADR)
The ADR application (Automatic Disturbance Recognition) can detect failures in the electric transmission and
distribution system. The data streams recorded by the PMUs are analyzed for changes that characterize detect-
able faults in the current, voltage, and frequency. Corresponding messages are generated for visualization in
the UI.
The following subordinate applications are available:
• Short-circuit detection (SCD):

Detection of short circuits in the electrical power system
• Detection of producer and consumer failures (GDL - Generation/Demand Loss):

Detection of the failure of production or load
For the SCD and GDL subordinate applications, the phasor values of the voltages detected by PMUs at different
measuring points in the power system are evaluated. In case of the SCD, the currents are also evaluated.
Logical PMUs are specified for the selection of measuring points. These logical PMUs are assigned to defined
substations. For the subordinate applications SCD and GDL, you can specify independently for each substation
which logical PMUs should be considered. For a logical PMU selected in this way, all voltage and current meas-
uring channels assigned to that PMU are used.
The channels belonging to a logical PMU provide the following values:
• Physical values of voltage and current related to ground potential:

When considering physical variables, 3 voltage or current phasors always form a complete phasor system
containing all 3 electrical phases. Thus, it is inevitable that the number of measuring channels is always a
multiple of 3. Since the information on the electrical phase of the respective measuring channel is not
available, according to the convention selected here, the measuring channels with increasing channel
index are assigned the phases A, B, and C for every 3 consecutive channels.
• Representation of the voltages and currents as positive-sequence components

When using symmetrical components, each channel of the logical PMU contains the positive-sequence
component of either a voltage or a current. The corresponding negative-sequence and zero-sequence
components are, however, not available. In this case, the number of channels is equal to the number of
available positive-sequence components.
You can enter the corresponding information in the SIGUARD Engineer (see chapter 3.3.4 Parameters and
Setting Notes ).
You can find more information on these subordinate applications in the following chapters.
3.3.2 Short-Circuit Detection (SCD)
Different faults in the electrical transmission and distribution system can lead to short circuits.
The following short-circuit types can be detected by the SCD application:
• 1-phase short circuit

In order to detect and classify short circuits, the values of the current and voltage phasors of the selected
logical PMUs of all substations defined for the ADR are recorded and processed in a cyclic way. If only the posi-
tive-sequence component is detected, a specific short-circuit type cannot be determined. Further evaluation
with regard to the determination of the short-circuit type is not possible. Finally, the determined value of the
current change is compared for each PMU for all 3 phases with the given limiting values. If several limiting
values (alarm and warning) are used, an increased sensitivity for detecting a short circuit and a gradation
regarding the reliability of the actual occurrence of the reported short circuit are possible.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Short-Circuit Clearing Time

If the warning or alarm threshold is exceeded for the first time, the short-circuit clearing time is started and
the corresponding current channel is set to the internal pickup state. All further PMUs, which have experi-
enced a limit violation within the topical short-circuit clearing time, are also flagged in the same way. If the
short-circuit clearing time is started by exceeding a warning threshold, but the higher alarm threshold is
exceeded during the clearing time thereby redefining the start point of the short-circuit clearing time, the
short-circuit clearing itself is increased dynamically against the set value.
[dw_SCD_short_circuit_detected, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-31 Short Circuit Detected
To recognize a short circuit, the subordinate SCD application uses the following criteria:
• Point in time t1:

If the following condition is fulfilled, the current channel changes to the internal pickup state and is
noted in an internal list:
[fo_dI_dt_short_circuit_detected_1, 1, --_--]
• Point in time t2:

If the following conditions are fulfilled, the short circuit is recognized:
–
[fo_dI_dt_short_circuit_detected_2, 1, --_--]
– t2 - t1 < tClearing
The 3 substations that measured the highest voltage dip are determined.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[dw_SCD_short_circuit_Not_detected_increase_no_decrease, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-32 No Short Circuit – No Current Reduction during the Clearing Time
In this case, the current is not reduced and there is no short circuit. All current channels that got the internal
pickup state due to the current increase at t1, are set to the internal state no pickup again after the expiry of
the clearing time.
[dw_SCD_short_circuit_Not_detected_decrease_increase, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-33 No Short Circuit – Current Changes Have the Wrong Sign
The value dI/dt calculated at the point in time t1 is negative. The current channel is not set to the internal
pickup state. There is no short circuit. The value dt is not the Reporting rate, but a value fixed to 200 ms.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[dw_SCD_short_circuit_Not_detected_decrease_increase_too_late, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-34 No Short Circuit – Clearing Time is too Long
The condition t2 - t1 < tClearing is not fulfilled because the current channel is no longer in the internal no pickup
state at the point in time t2 (the time tClearing has elapsed). There is no short circuit.
Determination of the Substations near the Short-Circuit Location

In order to determine the position of the short circuit, the earliest time of exceeding the limiting value and the
latest time of clarification is first determined via all current phasors for which a clarified short circuit has been
detected. Within the time range defined in this way, the voltage dip related to the rated voltage configured in
the SIGUARD PDP Engineer in the Limit editor is subsequently determined for all voltage phasors, and the
associated substations are sorted according to the size of this voltage dip.
For the 3 substations which have the greatest voltage dip, the type of the short circuit is first determined
according to the number and designation of the phases involved. For this purpose, the violations of the
limiting values are considered for each substation as follows: If the warning threshold is activated, violations
of the alarm and warning limits can take place within a substation. If the alarm threshold for at least one
current channel assigned to the substation is exceeded, only clarified violations of the alarm threshold are
considered; otherwise all clarified violations of the warning limit are considered. If the warning limit is deacti-
vated, only violations of the alarm threshold are considered.
If, in the course of the evaluation, there are differences between the individual current-phasor triples for the
considered substation, then the short-circuit type of the substation is marked as ambiguous.
The short-circuit type of a substation is identified as ambiguous even if the substation contains logical PMUs
with measuring channels for the positive-sequence component of the current. In this case, the short-circuit
type is declared ambiguous even if logical PMUs with physical channels also show such a limit violation, even
if this is unique among the logical PMUs of the latter type.
Events Generated when the Alarm Threshold Is Exceeded

If the change in the current intensity of the substation under consideration has exceeded the alarm threshold
in at least one phase, one of the following SIGUARD events is generated:
• 1st case: 1-phase short circuit:

1-phase short circuit with specification for the affected phase
• 2nd case: 2-phase short circuit:

2-phase short circuit with specification for the affected phases

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
• 3rd case: 3-phase short circuit:

3-phase short circuit
• 4th case: short circuit:

Short circuit (without phase information) that cannot be classified definitely
For the first 3 cases the event depends on the number of phases that have exceeded the alarm limit.
NOTE
i If, for the reported substations, a different number of affected phases or, in case of the same number,
different affected phases were detected, the text for the SIGUARD event (column Message in the event
and alarm list) contains an appropriate warning.
NOTE
i If short circuits are detected regularly, for which the phase allocation systematically deviates, check the
measuring-channel settings of these logical PMUs for the correct phase sequence (A, B, C) in the SIGUARD
PDP Engineer.
Note that short circuits occur in different voltage levels due to transformer vector groups in different
phases. Then there are no parameterization errors.
Events Generated when the Warning Threshold Is Exceeded

If the active warning threshold is exceeded within a substation, but not the alarm threshold, comparable rules
apply as before for when the alarm threshold is exceeded.
In this instance, one of the following SIGUARD events is generated:
• 3-phase potential short circuit:

Potential 3-phase short circuit

Potential 2-phase short circuit with specification for the affected phases

Potential 1-phase short circuit with specification for the affected phase
NOTE
i If, for the reported substations, a different number of affected phases or, in case of the same number,
different affected phases were detected, the text for the SIGUARD event (column Message in the event
and alarm list) contains an appropriate warning.
You can also completely stop the output of these events by deactivating the warning threshold. In this case,
for the named events which were created after the alarm threshold was exceeded, no uncertainties relating to
the number of affected phases can appear, meaning the corresponding event also always contains the
number of affected phases.
NOTE
i Depending on the configured limiting values, it is possible that the substation that has measured the
largest voltage dip and that is reported via a SIGUARD event, does not indicate that the limiting value was
exceeded. It is also possible that the substation has only exceeded the warning threshold, while other
substations that have exceeded the higher alarm threshold are not reported as the measured values of the
voltage dip are too small.
You can forward these events to a network control center via the communication interfaces IEC104 and ICCP.
You can automatically create a time range in the permanent archive or send a corresponding e-mail.
You can find more information on the required parameterization of the subordinate SCD function in chapter
3.3.4 Parameters and Setting Notes .

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Displaying the Short Circuit in the User Interface

The events generated by the application can be displayed in the UI in the alarm list and event list.
If the ADR configuration contains at least 3 substations, including voltage channels, the region affected by the
short circuit is highlighted by a triangle in the schematic diagram. The following figure shows an example of a
short-circuit event that exceeds the alarm limit in each of the 3 substations with the highest voltage dip.
[sc_SCD_UI, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-35 Schematic Display of an SCD in the UI
3.3.3 Recognition of Producer and Consumer Failures (GDL)
If the relationship between the generation and load in the electrical transmission and distribution network
changes, this affects the value of the power frequency:
• If production decreases or the performance requirement from the user increases, the frequency
decreases.
• If production increases or the performance requirement from the user decreases, the frequency
increases.
In general, this is about constantly occurring processes with comparatively small changes which are compared
via the corresponding controlling systems in the power plants and the network control centers.
If there are sudden, large changes of power, caused for example by a power plant failure or the disconnection
of heavy loads, this is indicated directly by a significant decrease or increase in the power frequency.
In the application GDL (recognition of energy producer or consumer errors), this frequency change is trans-
ferred to different locations with a PMU cyclically. For the best possible data quality, the measured values for
the frequency and frequency change rate from the PMUs are not available directly in the application. Instead,
the values are determined using the phase angle change of the voltage phasor. In the SIGUARD PDP User Inter-
face, the time process of the frequency and frequency changes are displayed.
If the voltage phasors are not already supplied as a positive sequence component of the respective PMU, the
positive sequence component is calculated from the 3 phase-specific voltage phasors. The frequency—and in
addition, its change rate—will be determined from the phase angle difference and its successive values for
this voltage phasor. By using these values obtained from the positive sequence component of the voltage, a
network frequency and a network frequency change rate is determined. However, it must be ensured that the
values obtained were measured accurately or are the result of precisely measured voltage phasors. Both
values are transferred via the SIGUARD PDP Server to the UI to display as a timing diagram.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[dw_GDL_max_time_stabilization, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-36 Frequency Drift over Time with Characteristic Time Stamps (t1: Detection; t2: Minimum
Frequency; t3: Stabilization Time)
The resulting frequency response is checked in cycles for significant changes, as described in the following
sections.
If a rate of change of frequency |df/dt| is determined at date and time t1 that is higher than an approved limit
value (df/dt)Alarm, a significant production shutdown or load shedding is expected. The GDL application
displays a corresponding event that contains text (column Message in the alarm or event list in the UI) that
gives the frequency for entering the events and the frequency change rate at time t1.
NOTE
i The value given in the column Message for df/dt is the value for the time when df/dt exceeded the limiting
value defined in the Engineer. The time stated in the message, however, is the start of the frequency
change calculated for this event. This is why for the time of the event, the value in the chart Rate of
change of power frequency differs from the value in the column Message.
As the maximum stabilization time proceeds to time point t3, it is assumed that all primary control processes in
the power plants have led to the frequency being stabilized. In the interval [t1, t3] the minimum frequency is
now searched. The time stamp for the minimum value of the frequency creates an event that contains the
minimum frequency from time point t2 and the frequency difference f2- f1 in text (column Message in the UI
event list 3)
The sign of the rate of change of frequency df/dt determines whether it is a disconnection or the outage of a
generating unit or the shutdown of a load. The corresponding events are called Generation loss detected or
Demand loss detected.
A second, smaller limiting value (df/dt)Warning can be set and activated. If this limiting value is exceeded but the
alarm limit is not, this is shown in the message as a potential generation loss detected or potential demand
loss detected. If the alarm threshold is exceeded again, after the warning limit within the stabilization time
has been exceeded, the relevant time and an outgoing event (related to the warning limit) as well as a new
event (related to the alarm threshold for the updated values) is reported.
3 Events are not displayed in the alarm list.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
The following events are created and output to the UI for the example shown in Figure 3-36:
• With time stamp t1:

ADR Generation loss detected appearing f = 49.965 Hz, df/dt = -20 mHz/s
• With time stamp t2:

ADR Generation loss detected disappearing f = 49.869 Hz, delta f = -0.096 Hz
These events can be forwarded via the communication interface IEC104 and ICCP to a network control center.
You can automatically create a time range in the permanent archive or send a corresponding e-mail via the
ENS application with an appropriate configuration in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
NOTE
i In terms of the polarity, the sudden switch to a larger load has the same effects on the history of the power
frequency as the outage of a generator. As the data available means that the GDL cannot differentiate
between these two instances, a sudden production shortage is always reported for the sake of simplicity.
NOTE
i If an alarm limit is exceeded and a warning limit is also configured, the following 3 events are generated:
• Potential loss appearing
• Potential loss disappearing
• Loss appearing
These 3 events may have the same time stamp but appear in a different order, e.g., Potential loss disap-
pearing before Potential loss appearing and Loss appearing.
If the alarm threshold is exceeded later than the warning limit, the messages Potential loss disappearing
and Loss appearing may also be displayed in reverse order.
To verify this application and to provide a general assessment of the dynamic state of the energy supply
network, the following quantities calculated by this application are displayed as a time course in the SIGUARD
UI.
• Network frequency (Power frequency as average value)
• Maximum and minimum network frequency (Maximum and minimum power frequency)
• Difference between maximum and minimum network frequency (Difference between the maximum
and minimum power frequency as a measure of the dynamic state of the electrical power system)
• Rate of change of network frequency (Derivation of the power frequency)

You will find the corresponding selection options in the Chart View under Application results > ADR.
More information can be found relating to the required parameterization of the subordinate GDL function in
Chapter 3.3.4 Parameters and Setting Notes .
Behavior in Islanding
The frequency determined by the GDL application and its rate of change result by averaging over frequency
values. The calculation of these frequency values is based on the voltage values recorded at various points in
the network. If the power system breaks down into 2 or more independent subnets, these voltage probes may
be in different subnets. In this case, the frequency value averaged this way would no longer be meaningful.
In order to determine the quality of the mean frequency value, the events reported by the ISD application are
evaluated, if available. If the ISD application reports a network split and the voltage values used for the
frequency calculation are obtained from electrically different subnets, the values of frequency and their rate of
change obtained from the GDL are evaluated as invalid. As a result, the associated values are not displayed in
the UI for the duration of the ISD event. If the change rate of the frequency during the network splits exceeds
the limiting value for an alarm or warning, no related rising edge (and therefore no falling edge) event is
displayed. If, however, the network split happens only after exceeding the limit of the rate of change of the

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
frequency – and thus after the output of the associated rising edge event – but before the end of the subse-
quent stabilization time, then only frequency values calculated other than during the network splits are used
for the information contained in the falling edge event. In addition, the outgoing event indicates that not all
frequency values within the stabilization interval have been used to calculate the displayed parameters.
If, on the other hand, the ISD application reports a potential network split and the voltage values used for
the frequency calculation are also obtained from electrically different subnetworks in this case, the values of
frequency calculated in the GDL and their rate of change for the duration of the ISD event—assuming the
input data is valid—are rated as not reliable. In this case, the associated values are shown in bold in the UI.
The determination of producer or consumer failures—and the associated issuing of corresponding events—is
still possible. The outgoing event, on the other hand, indicates that at least some of the frequency values used
for the calculation of the displayed values are not reliable.
In all other cases, for example, if all voltage measuring points lie within an electrically synchronous network or
subnet, the values for the frequency calculated by the GDL and their rate of change are evaluated as valid,
assuming the input values are valid.
When forwarding the values determined by ADR, for example, via IEC 60870-5-104, these values are selected
accordingly (status invalid).
General Information
For the ADR, you must first define substations. You assign one or more logical PMUs to these substations. This
substations can be used independently of each other for each of the 2 subapplications SCD and GDL. For each
logical PMU selected, you must specify in the associated settings whether the PMU provides physical values
(voltage to ground potential or phase current for all 3 phases) or the positive-sequence component of the
respective measured variable. For physical quantities, make sure that the index of the phasors permits the
correct phase assignment of the measured values (see also chapter 3.3.1 Function Description ).
Working with SIGUARD PDP Engineer

To configure the ADR application, the folder ADR is opened.
[sc_ADR_all, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-37 Selected Tab Application – ADR folder

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Parameters of the Subordinate SCD Application

If the folder ADR is opened and the application SCD is selected, the following middle window section Short
circuit detection is displayed:
[sc_ADR_SCD, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-38 Parameters of the Subordinate SCD Application
The setting options for the properties/parameters of the application SCD are explained in the following table.
Table 3-14 Parameters of the Application SCD
Element Explanation
Active Click the Active check box to activate the SCD short-circuit detection of
the ADR application.
Max. clearing time In this field, enter the maximum expected clearing time, for example,
0.5 seconds.
The short-circuit clearing time (in seconds) determines the time interval
in which the short circuit that occurred in the electrical power system is
assumed cleared.
Alarm In this field, enter a minimum expected change rate for the current in
A/s to detect a short circuit.
Clearing In this field, enter a minimum expected change rate for the current in
A/s for the clearing time (switching off the fault by the protection).
Warning (check box) If you want to use the warning threshold, activate the Warning check
box.
Warning (parameter) In this field, enter a minimum expected change rate for the current in
A/s which must be shorter than the value for the alarm.
If you activate the warning threshold, events indicating a possible short circuit and the significance of which is
limited more or less depending on the value of the selected warning threshold are reported in addition to the
short circuits recognized with security.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Parameters of the Subordinate GDL Application

If the folder ADR is opened and the subordinate application GDL is selected, the following middle window
section Short circuit detection is displayed:
[sc_ADR_GDL, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-39 Parameters of the Subordinate GDL Application
The setting options for the properties/parameters of the application GDL are explained in the following table.
Table 3-15 Parameters of the Application GDL
Element Explanation
Active To activate the GDL detection of the power-plant failure or load failure
of the ADR application, click the Active check box.
Max. stabilization time With the frequency stabilization interval Max. stabilization time in
seconds, you determine the time interval within which a frequency
change that occurred due to a sudden, important generation unbalance
has been cleared via the generation control in such a way, that the time
of the occurrence of the largest frequency difference can be assumed
with security as exceeded.
Alarm In this field, enter a minimum expected rate of change of frequency in
Hz/s to detect a power-plant failure or a load failure.
Warning (check box) If you want to use the warning threshold, activate the Warning check
box.
Warning (parameter) In this field, enter a minimum expected rate of change of frequency in
Hz/s, which must be shorter than the value for the alarm.
If you activate the warning threshold, events indicating power-plant or load failures and the significance of
which is limited more or less depending on the value of the selected warning threshold are reported in addi-
tion to the power-plant or load failures recognized with security.
The power frequency and the power-frequency change rate calculated by the application are displayed as
measured values in the section Application results. The channels required for this are created when the
subordinate GDL application is activated for the first time and are not deleted in case of deactivation.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Parameters of the Substation

If the folder ADR is opened and the subordinate application Substation is selected, the following middle
window section Substation is displayed:
[sc_ADR_Substation, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-40 Parameters of the Substation
Drag and drop the desired substations from the area Existing substations in graphic editor into the middle
window section Substation.
The setting options for the properties/parameters of the substation are explained in the following table.
Table 3-16 Parameters of the Substation
Element Explanation
GDL With these check boxes, you determine for the applications SCD and
SCD GDL whether the associated substation should be used for the calcula-
tion.
This function is linked to the Graphics Editor.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
3.4 Voltage-Stability Curve (VSC)
SIGUARD PDP offers the option to calculate and output a voltage-stability curve (P-V curve) in the
SIGUARD PDP UI.
2 different modes are supported:
• Measurement of the voltage-stability curve of a line with a PMU at the beginning and end, respectively
(voltage and current measurement)
• Measurement of the voltage-stability curve of a line with a PMU at the beginning of the line (voltage and
current measurement) and the associated two-port parameters.
If the line is equipped with only one PMU, the two-port parameters of the line (Resistance R [Ω], Reactance X
[Ω], Conductance G [µS], and Susceptance B [µS]), are used for the calculation of voltage and current at the
end of the line.
[scvscses-corrected, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-41 Two-Port Equivalent Circuit of a Transmission Line
(1) R = Resistance
(2) X = Reactance
(3) G = Conductance
(4) B = Susceptance
The topical load admittance is calculated with the measured or calculated voltages and currents in the
endpoint node of the line. The corresponding line load is represented as an operating point on the curve (red
cross). The voltage-stability curve itself arises through variation of the complex load admittance in the
endpoint node of the line from zero to infinity. The recalculation of the curve is performed with each update
of the SIGUARD PDP UI.
NOTE
i If controllable reactive power sources are present in the endpoint node of the line or in its vicinity, the
curve shape of the voltage-stability curve is not constant, rather it varies with the degree of the reactive
power fed in. Therefore, no quantitative statement can be gained from the diagram as to how much addi-
tional transferable power can be transported via the line. Nonetheless, a qualitative evaluation of the
voltage-stability curve is helpful, as it allows the user the option of evaluating the distance to maximum
power.
The power margin can additionally be calculated and displayed for a voltage-stability curve. The power margin
is calculated as the difference between the operating point and the maximum transmittable electric power
(peak value of the voltage-stability curve).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
All parameterized voltage-stability curves (VSCs) are listed in the lower right window section in SIGUARD PDP
UI under Applications - Voltage-stability curves. Dragging a voltage-stability curve, for example, MlhM ->
NbgH, with the mouse into the window section Chart view beneath the timing diagram displays the voltage-
stability curve (see chapter 4.11.3 Displaying Curves).
[scvsckur-091110-06.tif, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-42 Example of a Voltage-Stability Curve
A cross marks the topical operating point. In the figure above, the critical point on the outer left edge is nearly
reached. With minimally higher power, the stability criteria are violated and a network split can result.
You can select multiple voltage-stability curves in one diagram.
If you have defined the power margin in SIGUARD PDP Engineer, this power margin is displayed in the
SIGUARD PDP UI under All measurements and also in the Voltage-Stability Curves table.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[sc_VSC_power_margin_UI, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-43 Display of the Power Margin
You can select a voltage-stability curve and a power margin and drag them into the Chart View. Then, a
diagram group appears in the Chart View: The top diagram shows the voltage-stability curve, the bottom
diagram shows the power margin. You can only add voltage-stability curves in the top diagram and only
power margins in the bottom diagram. Additional diagrams then appear below this diagram group.
If you close the diagram for the voltage-stability curves, you may then drag other measured values into the
other diagram, for example, phasors.
For more information about parameterization of the voltage-stability curves, refer to the following chapter.
To configure the display of a voltage-stability curve, the folder VSCs is opened. VSCs that already exist are
displayed.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[sc_VSC_name, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-44 Display all Existing VSCs
Next, the folder VSCs is opened and a curve is selected.
Functions
The following functions can be performed in the marked voltage-stability curve using the buttons.
Table 3-17 Toolbar of the VSCs Application
Element Explanation
Click the New voltage-stability curve button in order to create a
configuration scheme for a new voltage-stability curve in the VSCs
folder.
This is also possible if the folder VSCs is selected.
Click the Duplicate voltage-stability curve button to duplicate a config-
uration of the selected voltage-stability curve for further processing.
Click the Delete voltage-stability curve button to delete a configura-
tion of the selected voltage-stability curve.
Parameters of an Application VSCs

The following configurations for the display of a voltage-stability curve are possible:
• Configuration with input measurands and line parameter (1 PMU)
• Configuration with input measurands and output measurands (2 PMU)

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
If you open the folder VSCs in the window section Existing applications, a voltage-stability curve is selected
and the check box 1 PMU has been selected, the following middle window section Voltage-stability curves is
displayed:
[sc_VSC_settings_1PMU, 4, --_--]
Figure 3-45 Parameters of the Application VSCs with Input Measurands (1 PMU) and Line Parameter
NOTE
i Empty entry fields are highlighted in red. Enter a value.
The setting options of the properties/parameters of the application VSCs are explained with input measurands
in the following table.
Table 3-18 Parameters of the Application VSCs
Element Explanation
1 PMU This check box is selected when the voltage-stability curve is supposed
to be calculated with an input measurand and the line parameters.
Name In this field, the name of the voltage-stability curve is entered, changed,
or displayed for an existing voltage-stability curve.
Pmax Entry of the maximum active power for the observed line in megawatts
(MW).
Vmax Entry of the maximum voltage for the observed line in kilovolts (kV).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Element Explanation
Vin Measurand of the voltage at the input of the line from Available meas-
urements
Iin Measurand of the current at the input of the line from Available meas-
urements
R Resistance of the line in ohms
X Reactance of the line in ohms
B Susceptance of the line in microsiemens
G Conductance of the line in microsiemens
Calculate power margin Activate this check box if you want to calculate the power margin for
the voltage-stability curve.
Name In this field, the name of the calculation result of the power margin is
entered.
Factor In this field, the factor for calculating the power margin is entered.
Default setting: 1
When you have selected the application VSCs in the window section Existing Applications and marked the
check box 2 PMU, the following middle window section is displayed.
[sc_VSC_settings_2PMUs, 3, --_--]
Figure 3-46 Parameters of the Application VSCs with Input and Output Measurands (2 PMU)

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
NOTE
The setting options of the properties/parameters of the application VSCs are explained with input and output
measurands in the following table.
Table 3-19 Parameters of the Application VSCs
Element Explanation
2 PMU This check box is selected when the voltage-stability curve is supposed
to be calculated with an input and output measurand.
Name In this field, the name of the voltage-stability curve is entered, changed,
or displayed for an existing voltage-stability curve.
Pmax Enter the maximum active power for the power line under consideration
in megawatts (MW) in this field.
Vmax Enter the maximum voltage for the power line under consideration in
kilovolts (kV) in this field.
Vin Measurand of the voltage at the input of the line from Available meas-
urements
Iin Measurand of the current at the input of the line from Available meas-
urements
Vout Measurand of the voltage at the output of the line from Available
measurements
Iout Measurand of the current at the output of the line from Available
measurements
Calculate power margin Activate this check box if you want to calculate the power margin for
the voltage-stability curve.
Name In this field, the name of the calculation result of the power margin is
entered.
Factor In this field, the factor for calculating the power margin is entered.
Default setting: 1
If you have selected the Calculate power margin option and given a name, this power margin is automati-
cally added into the Calculation tab.
NOTE
i To ensure data consistency, you can enter and change the name and the factor for calculating the power
margin only in the Application tab.
You cannot edit the calculations for determining the power margin in the Calculation tab.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
3.5 Automatic Event-Controlled Creation of Permanent Archives (ATT)
SIGUARD PDP has 2 types of archives:
• Ring archive
The following data are saved in a ring archive:
– All PMU data
– All application events
– All events
As the capacity of the archive hard disk is not infinite, this archive is organized as a ring archive. This
means it is automatically overwritten after the expiry of a specified period.
• Permanent archive
To ensure that the data of special events in the energy supply network are still available even after the
ring-archive storage time has elapsed, excerpts defined using time can be copied from the ring archive
(time slices) into the permanent archive.
Data in a permanent archive are not automatically overwritten. You can delete these data, however.
You can find more detailed information on archives in chapter 4.11.4.1 Saving in the Permanent Archive.
Automatic event-driven creation of permanent archives (ATT = Automatic Time Range Trigger) is available as a
functionality in the SIGUARD PDP. In this function, data from special events are saved automatically and
permanently under the name AutomaticTriggered_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS in the permanent archive. You
can also change the file name. You can set parameters as to which events are considered a special event in
SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
A special event is always saved with a time stamp. This particular event always has the time stamp of the 1st
occurrence in YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated), when the time stamp rounds down
to the last full second. At the end, the time is rounded up to the next full second.
The data are saved with the lead and follow-up times. The lead time is an adjustable time range before the
special event, the follow up time is an adjustable time range after the special event. Both times are specified in
SIGUARD PDP Engineer for all Automatic Time Range Triggers.
When saving, the retrigger time is also important. During this time, the system is monitored for another
special event. As long as special events continue to occur, the time range to be saved is expanded as long as
the time of the new failure is not later than the first special event + the maximum retrigger time. If additional
special events occur after the retrigger time, a new time slice is saved in the archive.
The 2 examples below explain the function.
The following settings are used in these examples:
• Lead time: 5 minutes
• Follow up time: 10 minutes
• Retrigger time: 30 minutes
NOTE
i The settings for the pre-trigger time, the post-trigger time and the retrigger time mentioned in the
preceding can differ in the product. You can change the settings to suit your needs in SIGUARD PDP Engi-
neer.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
EXAMPLE 1
A trigger event occurs at 13:00:00. No other triggers occur later. The entry is recorded in the permanent
archive from 12:55:00 to 13:10:00.
[dw att example without retrigger.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-47 Trigger Event without Retrigger
EXAMPLE 2
The first trigger event occurs at 14:00:00 and each minute in one cycle. The first entry in the permanent
archive is recorded from 13:55:00 to 14:40:00 (14:00:00 + 30 min retrigger time + 10 min follow up time).
The event is saved under the name …_140000. The next entry in the permanent archive is generated from
14:25:00 to 15:10:00 using the name …_143000.
[dw att example with retrigger.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-48 Trigger Event with Retrigger
NOTE
i If the Automatic Time Range Trigger is not configured correctly, for example, if you have selected a low
limit, many time slices are created in the permanent archive. This can quickly exhaust the capacity of your
hard disk.
If only the Max1 (and Min1) limiting value is configured, a value greater than Max1 cannot create a Time
Range Trigger. For this reason, the Max2 and Max3 or Min2 and Min3 limiting values must also be config-
ured. If only Max2 (and Min2) is configured, the Max3 (and Min3) limiting value must also be configured.
Using Multiple ATT Conditions

You can define multiple ATT conditions. These are independant of each other and lead to 2 overlapping
permanent archives if 2 different events occurr in the retrigger time and follow-up time.
You can change the name of the condition. This name is also used for the permanent archive.
For each of these conditions, you can define the lead and follow-up time as well as the retrigger time (in
seconds) individually.
You must select an ATT condition for the events that lead to a creation of a permanent archive.
Open SIGUARD PDP Engineer and open a project.

You configure the events for ATT in the Trigger Condition Editor.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Tab Triggers Is Selected

If you have selected the Triggers tab, the layout for configuring the ATT function is displayed.
[sc_triggers, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-49 Selected Tab Triggers
Functions
The following functions can be performed in the selected ATT folder using the buttons.
Table 3-20 Toolbar of the ATTs application
Element Explanation
Click the New button to create an ATT condition in the ATT folder.
Click the Duplicate button to duplicate the configuration of an existing

ATT condition for further processing.
Click the Delete button to delete a configuration of an existing ATT
condition.
By clicking on a ATT condition, the following window sections are displayed:
• Automated timerange trigger – Save time range

In the middle window section, the parameters for the ATT function are displayed.
• Available elements
– Measurements
Under this tab in the right window section, Available measurements displays all measuring points
by name, type and unit. These points are available and can be used for configuring the conditions
for the automatic creation of a time slice.
– Applications
All application events for ISD and PSR are displayed under this tab in the right window section. The
events are available and can be used for configuring the conditions for the automatic creation of a
time slice.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
NOTE
i You can filter by name in the Available measurements list.

If you have filtered by an entry and switch to a different tab, the filter remains in effect.
You can cancel the filter by deleting the text entered.
NOTE
i You can also use placeholders to filter:
• *
Use a * to represent no character or any number of characters.
• ?
Use ? to represent exactly one character.
If you want to filter for * or ?, you must enter "*" or "?" instead.
Parameters of a Trigger Condition
[sc_new_ATT_instance, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-50 New ATT Condition
The global parameters of the events for Trigger conditions are explained in the following table.
Table 3-21 Parameters for Trigger conditions
Element Explanation
Name In this field, enter the name for the ATT condition.
The name given must be unique. If there is already an ATT requirement with the
same name, both instances are marked with an exclamation mark.
Note: As the name of the ATT condition is expanded on one time stamp, Siemens
recommends putting a delimiter (underscore, blank character etc.) at the end of
this name.
Lead time Enter the lead time in this field.
Unit: seconds
Follow up time Enter the follow-up time in this field.
Unit: seconds
Max retrigger time Enter the maximum retrigger time in this field.
Unit: seconds
Active Click the Active check box to activate the ATT condition.
Using drag and drop from the Available measurements list, select those whose raising or cleared indication
automatically creates a time slice.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
NOTE
i Note the entry <All measurements> at the beginning of the Available measurements list. If you drag this
entry into the Automated timerange trigger – Save time range section, you create an automatic event-
driven permanent archive for all preset limiting values for all measuring points. This also applies to the
measuring points that will be recorded in the future.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
3.6 Custom Application
SIGUARD PDP provides the option to develop own applications. For this purpose, an API is provided, with
which an application developed in Visual C ++ can query data from SIGUARD PDP and send data to SIGUARD
PDP.
The data that a customer application can send back must be parameterized in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer first.
Then, this data is available for further processing (display in the SIGUARD PDP UI, forwarding via the communi-
cation interfaces) and for archiving.
The configuration of a customer application contains the name of the application and its output channels.
You must configure the following data for each output channel:
• A unique name
• A reporting rate
• The type and the physical unit

Siemens offers a training for the development of customer applications, in which the procedure for the crea-
tion of customer applications is shown. For a training, contact the Siemens Training Center (see Training
Courses, Page 5).
In order to configure the return channels of the custom application the Custom folder is opened.
Tab Application Is Selected
NOTE
i The remaining configuration of the custom application is not part of SIGUARD PDP. Only the return chan-
nels are configured in order to process them in accordance with the system.
If you select the Application tab and click the Custom folder, the layout for configuring the Custom applica-
tion is displayed.
[sc_custom, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-51 Selected Tab Application – Custom
Functions
The following functions can be performed using buttons when the folder Custom is selected.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
Table 3-22 Toolbar of the Custom Application
Element Explanation
Click the New button to create a new custom application in the Custom
folder.
Click the Duplicate button to duplicate a configuration of an existing
custom application for further processing.
Click the Delete button to delete a configuration of an existing custom
application.
Parameters of the Custom Application

If the Custom folder is opened and the application Custom is selected, the following middle window section
Custom appears:
[sc_custom_settings, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-52 Parameters of the Subordinate Custom Application
The setting options for the properties/parameters of the Custom application are explained in the following
table.
Table 3-23 Parameters of the Custom Application
Element Explanation
Active To activate the custom application, activate the check box Active.
Name The name of the channel is entered in this column.
Custom This column displays the name you assigned to the application. You
cannot change the name in this column.
Reporting rate Number of telegrams written to the server per second by the Custom
application for this channel.
Type Enter the data type in this field:
• Analog
• Digital
• Phasor
Unit In this field, you specify the physical unit of the channel. The units
offered in the list box depend on the data type.
You can copy any channel you created and paste it into the table. Each new channel must be given a different
name.
If you select the Custom folder, an overview of all custom applications and their output channels is provided.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[sc_custom_all, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-53 Application – Custom Tab, Display of All Custom Applications
Display in Other Editors

The channels you created in the custom application are also visible in other Editors, for example in the Limit
Editor. If you select the Applications folder in the Limit Editor, the custom applications are displayed. Now,
you can set the limits for the applications.
[sc_custom_Limit_editor, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-54 Display of Custom Applications in the Limit Editor
The created channels also appear in the Available measurements list and can be used in the corresponding
Editors.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
3.7 Special Calculation Functions
3.7.1 Calculation of the Frequency Based on the Phase Angle Change
Direct use of the PMU frequency measurement is only conditionally suitable for precisely determining the
power frequency, because only one frequency value is formed per logical PMU and the measuring input of the
PMU used to measure this frequency is not defined according to IEEE C37.118-2011. To obtain a more precise
frequency signal, SIGUARD PDP provides a calculation that can determine the power frequency from the
change in the phase position of a phasor (preferably of a positive-sequence system voltage phasor). This calcu-
lation permits averaging of the frequency value over a specified period of time (in seconds).
This calculation additionally offers the following benefits:
• Unambiguous definition of the location of the measurement by using a dedicated voltage phasor or posi-
tive-sequence system voltage phasor.
• Noise reduction in the frequency signal through averaging

This calculation method allows the frequency to be determined with a precision better than 1 mHz.
3.7.2 Calculation of the Time Change of an Analog Value
For the automatic event-controlled creation of a permanent archive (ATT – automatic time trigger), it may be
necessary to evaluate the decrease of the frequency signal or a different analog value. The calculation func-
tion determines the maximum and minimum in a specified time interval dt (in seconds) and returns the differ-
ence (maximum - minimum) as the result if the time point of the maximum occurs before the time point of
the minimum within the time interval. This measuring result can be subjected to limiting-value monitoring. If
the limiting value is higher than a default setting, an event is generated that can be used as the trigger crite-
rion for the automatic event-controlled creation of a permanent archive.
[dw_calc decrease of analog value, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-55 Calculation of the Drop of an Analog Value
If tMIN < tMAX, then 0 is issued. If tMIN > tMAX, then the maximum-minimum difference is issued.
You can find further information on the automatic event-controlled creation of a permanent archive in chapter
3.5.1 Function Description .
3.7.3 Calculation of a Continuously Increasing Absolute Rate of Change in an

Analog Value
For automatic event-controlled creation of a permanent archive (ATT – automatic time trigger), it may be
necessary to detect a steady rise in the absolute rate of change over a period of time. The absolute rate of
change |da/dt| is determined for a given analog value a. If the rate of change lies continuously above an
approved limiting value c within a time range dt, then the absolute rate of change is issued as the measuring
result. Otherwise, 0 is issued. The measuring result may be subjected to limiting-value monitoring. If the
limiting value is greater than the defined limiting value c, an event is created that can be used as a trigger
criterion for the automatic event-controlled creation of a permanent archive.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
[dw_calc constant high abs change rate, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-56 Calculation of a Steady Rise in the Absolute Rate of Change in an Analog Value
If abs (df/dt) > c, then abs (df/dt)tact is issued. Otherwise, 0 is issued.

You can find further information on the automatic event-controlled creation of a permanent archive in chapter
NOTE
i Enter the identical limiting value c both in the calculation as well as in the limiting-value monitoring. There
will be no check if the limiting value in the calculation and the limiting-value monitoring are identical.
3.7.4 Flip-Flop
The flip-flop is a set-reset flip-flop with dominant reset input signal.

The flip-flop has 2 digital inputs:
• The set signal (set)
• The reset signal (reset)

This module changes the output signal only if a rising edge has been detected in one of the input signals.
• If the reset signal (reset) switches from 0 to 1, the output signal switches to 0.
• If the set signal (set) switches from 0 to 1, the output signal switches to 1.
Otherwise, the output signal remains unchanged.
3.7.5 Detecting the Violation of a Voltage-Angle Difference
The formula Angle difference between two voltage phasors with limit (x = PADLimit(V1,V2,c,t)) is used to
calculate the absolute value of an angle difference between 2 voltage phasors.
The output signal is 1 if the following conditions are met:
• The absolute value of the phase-angle difference between V1 and V2 is greater than the threshold value
c.
• This condition exists for at least as long as the time set in t (tripping time in seconds).
• The quality information of the input voltage phasors 1 and 2 is good during the entire tripping time.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Applications
If these conditions are not met, the output signal is 0.

The quality information of a measured value or a calculation result is identified as good if the following condi-
tions are met:
• There is a connection to the PMU.
• Data have been received.
• The PMU does not report a status of PMU Data Error (PMU Error or PMU Data Invalid) in the data tele-
gram.
• The PMU reports a status of PMU Sync in the data telegram.
• The measured values are large enough that the equipment is not considered as Out of service (see
chapter 6.1.8 Limit Editor).
• If applicable, previous calculations, for example, positive sequence, have not reported an error.
3.7.6 Timer
The timer is used to ensure that a digital input signal is 1 for a set time (pickupTime in seconds) until the
output signal is issued. In addition, the output signal is set to 0 only after the dropout time (dropoutTime in
seconds) has elapsed, starting with the falling edge of the input signal.
• If the input signal switches from 0 to 1, the pickup timer is started.
• If the input signal drops out to 0 before the pickup timer has elapsed, the output signal remains at 0.
• If the input signal switches from 0 to 1 again, the pickup timer is started again with the same duration as
for the first start.
• The output signal is set to 1 after expiry of the pickup timer.
• When the input signal drops out to 0, the dropout timer is started.
• If the input signal switches to 1 again, the dropout timer is stopped.
• The output signal is set to 0 after expiry of the dropout timer.
3.7.7 Formulas for Generating Closed Dependencies (Delayer)
In SIGUARD PDP, calculations can be combined so that the output signals from one calculation can be used as
input values in another calculation. This results in dependencies that are automatically resolved by the
SIGUARD PDP and executed in one time step. However, you must not use the calculation results from calcula-
tion B as the input value for calculation A that, in turn, generates an output signal that is used as an input
signal for calculation B (closed loop; closed dependency) because this connection results in blocking. Calcula-
tion A cannot be executed because a calculation result from calculation B is missing and calculation B cannot
be executed because a calculation result from calculation A is missing.
To avoid this blocking, in SIGUARD PDP, you can use the special calculations with delays (Shift register)
Delayer phasor , Delayer analog , or Delayer digital . With these delays, the result is delayed for one calcula-
tion cycle (corresponding to the Reporting rate): Calculation A uses the result from calculation B that was
calculated at time (t-1). During startup, the value 0 is used for time t = 0. Consequently, if a delayer formula is
used in a feedback branch of a calculation, a closed dependency can also be parameterized.
To avoid bad quality information about these calculations being forwarded in time, the result of a delayer
formula never has bad quality information.
NOTE
i Use only one delayer formulas in a feedback branch. Several delayer formulas connected in series do not
make sense and may lead to undesired results.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4 SIGUARD PDP User Interface
4.1 Overview 112

4.2 Program Interface 114
4.3 Menu and Toolbar 119
4.4 Schematic Display of the Energy Supply Power System (SLD) 122
4.5 Chart View 129
4.6 Measured Values, Applications, and Formulas 134
4.7 Limit Editor 142
4.8 Alarm List and Event List 145
4.9 Reporting 149
4.10 Applications in the UI 153
4.11 Working with SIGUARD PDP UI 154
4.12 Conclusion from the Analysis 176

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
SIGUARD PDP User Interface
4.1 Overview
4.1 Overview
The program interface of SIGUARD PDP consists of the following window sections:
• Menu and Toolbar

You can call up general functions via the menu and the toolbar (see 4.3 Menu and Toolbar).
• PSS Curve
This window section displays the combined status of the entire measured or observed power-supply
system as Power System Status.
• SIGUARD PDP UI - Map (Single-line diagram)

This window section shows the network topology of the power-supply system in a schematic representa-
tion.
• Chart View
This window section displays the detailed curves of individual measured values or calculated values over
a defined time range.
• Measurements, applications and formulas

This window section contains lists that can be shown and hidden:
– Measuring points used
– All available measuring points
– Predefined formulas
– Voltage-stability curves
– Application results
Here you can find lists of communication statistics and the power frequency and power frequency
change rate calculated by the ADR application.
You can find more information in chapter 4.6 Measured Values, Applications, and Formulas.
• Event list, Alarm list

In this window section, events and alarm indications are listed.
• PSR Analysis
In this window section, the PSR jobs for the stations in the power system are listed with the corre-
sponding phase angles and PSR modes.
You can change the size and arrangement of the window sections to meet your requirements, see chapter
4.2.1 Arranging Program Interface.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.1 Overview
[dw_ui_schema, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-1 Schematic Representation of the User Interface

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.2 Program Interface
4.2.1 Arranging Program Interface
You can arrange the Program Interface of SIGUARD PDP according to your needs. You can display all window
sections in one window or distribute it across several windows.
The window sections Menu, Toolbar, and PSS Curve make up the main window, and they can be opened only
once.
The window sections Chart View, Event list, Alarm list, and PSRs can be opened several times. The window
section SIGUARD PDP UI - Map can be opened only once.
All Window Sections in One Window

During the initial start of SIGUARD PDP UI, the PSS curve is displayed in the main window. Further components
can be opened by clicking the icons on the top left. The components, for example, the schematic display and
lists, are also inserted into the main window.
[sc_UI_all_components, 2, --_--]
Figure 4-2 All Window Sections in One Window
Window Sections on Several Monitors

When using 2 Monitors, you can distribute the window sections between these, for example, in 2 windows.
But you can also display window sections on additional monitors.
You can distribute window sections between 2 windows as follows:
² Select a window section, for example, the schematic display, with the mouse and drag it out from the
main window to the second monitor.
² Drag additional window sections into the window on the second monitor.
² Arrange the window sections in both windows according to your needs.
The desired display is shown in the 2 windows. You can place the 2 windows in 2 monitors.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_UI_main_window_with_Chart_View, 2, --_--]
Figure 4-3 Main Window with Chart View
[rgcsem99-100713-05.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-4 Second Window with Schematic Display and Event List
Changing the Title of a Window Section

You can change the title of the window section. To do this, proceed as follows:
² Click the title bar of the window section for which you want to change the title and press <F2>.
A dialog to change the title of the window section appears.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_change_UI_title, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-5 Changing the Title of a Window Section
² Enter the new title of the window section in this dialog.

² Click OK.
Saving the User Interface

When closing, SIGUARD PDP UI saves the topical display of the program interface as a favorite with the desig-
nation StartUpFavorite. When reopening, the program interface of SIGUARD PDP is shown in the saved
display.
You can also save additional displays as Favorites.
You can save a display as a favorite as follows:
² Click in the toolbar on the icon Save Favorite.
- or -
² Select the menu item File > Save Favorite.
The Save Favorite dialog is opened.
[regsui04-260712-01.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-6 Enter Name for Favorites
² Give the favorite a name and close the dialog with Save.
- or -
² Select an existing favorite to overwrite and close the dialog using Save.
In this case, a confirmation box appears asking whether you want to overwrite the favorite.
The favorite is saved under the name entered.
Call up a Saved User Interface

You call up a saved user interface as follows:
² Select the desired user interface under Favorite name.
The saved user interface is displayed.
Open the Directory with the Stored User Interface

To open the directory for the stored user interfaces, proceed as follows:
² Select the menu item File > Show favorite directory.
Deleting a Saved User Interfaces

To delete a saved user interface, proceed as follows:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Select the desired user interface under Favorite name.

The saved user interface is displayed.
NOTE
i A deleted user interface cannot be restored after deletion.
² In the toolbar, click the icon Delete Favorite.

- or -
² Select the menu item File > Delete Favorite.
4.2.2 Favorite Properties
Only certain data are recovered when loading user interfaces.

In the Chart View section, certain settings, for example, Show second cursor, are not recovered.
The sorting of the lists is recovered but not the position of the scroll bars.
PSS Curve
In the PSS Curve section, the following data are saved and recovered:
• State
The topical state, online or offline, is saved.
• Time Range
The time range selected in the Select time segment section, for example, 10 Minutes is saved.
• Slide Position
The positions of the 3 slides are saved.
When you open a saved user interface, the time range and the position of the slides are always loaded.
NOTE
i The absolute time is not recovered. The current time is always shown in the time bar.
Example: Time Bar

You saved a user interface on Thursday at 1 PM. At this time, the time bar displays the time range from 12:51
to 13:00 on Thursday.
If you load this saved user interface on Friday at 7:50 AM, the time bar shows the time range from 7:41 AM to
7:50 AM for Friday.
Selected Measurements
The Selected measurements list contains measured values for the selections made in the SLD.
NOTE
i This list is not saved in the favorites and is not recovered.
Predefined Formulas
Formulas with incomplete parameters are not saved and not recovered.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Limits
If you have changed limits locally in the UI, these changes are not saved under Favorites.
The state of the Limit Editor is not saved.
Alarm List and Event List

The following information is saved and recovered for the Alarm List and the Event List:
• Column width
• Column position
• Sorting the first column
• Showing or hiding columns
• Filter
Schematic Display (SLD)

The following information is saved for the schematic display (SLD):
• Position
• Zoom level

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.3 Menu and Toolbar

Menu Items
You can call up the following functions via the menu:
• File > Export all

With this menu item, you can save the measured values of the topical time range as a CSV or COMTRADE
file, see chapter 4.9 Reporting.
• File > Export chart data

With this menu item, you can save the measured values from selected channels as a CSV or COMTRADE
file.
• File > Show export directory

With this menu item, you can open the directory in which SIGUARD PDP saves the CSV or COMTRADE
export files.
• File > Save time range...

With this menu item, you can save the measured values of the topical time range in the permanent
archive, see chapter 4.11.4.1 Saving in the Permanent Archive.
• File > Load and manage time ranges...

With this menu item, you can load and edit the measured values of a time range saved previously in a
manual or automatic way from the permanent archive, see 4.11.4.2 Loading Time Ranges.
You can sort the list and delete or rename entries.
You can find more information in chapter 4.11.5 Deleting Time Ranges.
• File > Save favorite...

With this menu item, you can save the arrangement of the UI modules (favorites) in order to be able to
reconstruct the same arrangement later easily.
• File > Delete favorite...

If you have loaded a favorite, you can delete this favorite with this menu item.
• File > Show favorite directory

With this menu item, you can open the directory in which the SIGUARD PDP UI stores the favorites in
order to make your favorites available to other users of SIGUARD PDP. If you copy a favorite file into this
directory, you must restart the SIGUARD PDP UI in order to be able to use this copied favorite.
• File > Exit

With this menu item, you close SIGUARD PDP UI.
• View > Open new chart area

With this menu item, you open a Chart view where the following diagrams can be opened:
– Timing diagram
– Vector diagram
– Diagram with voltage-stability curve
– Diagram with power swing recognition
The time scale applies to the timing diagrams. You can set the value scale for each diagram.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
• View > Open map

With this menu item, you open a Map providing a semi-geographical display of the electrical power
system containing the following elements:
– Substations
– Lines
– Measured values
– Application indications such as power-swing detection or islanding
– Heatmap for phase-angle difference
• View > Open new event list

With this menu item, you open a tabular display of appearing or disappearing events.
• View > Open new alarm list

With this menu item, you open a tabular display of all objects in the system in the alarm condition (an
appearing event, but no disappearing event).
• View > Open new power swing analysis

With this menu item, you open a tree view for the analysis of detected power swings based on jobs or
global modes.
• View > Refresh all data

With this menu item, you load all data again from the archive. This makes sense after successful data
synchronization by the subordinate PDC.
• Help > Contents...

With the menu item, you select the Online Help in the form of a manual.
• Help > Index

With the menu item, you call up Online Help. The functionality of SIGUARD PDP is described there. It also
contains instructions for working with the various components of SIGUARD PDP.
• Help > About SIGUARD PDP UI...

With this menu item, you query the current SIGUARD PDP UI program version.
NOTE
i If you belong to a user group with restricted rights, certain functions may not be accessible to you.
In this case, the administrator has decided that performing one or more of the following actions is not
permitted:
• Starting a CSV or COMTRADE export
• Saving time ranges in the permanent archive
• Renaming time ranges
• Deleting time ranges
• Saving locally created formulas
• Saving locally changed limits

If you belong to one of these user groups, the title bar shows the addition Restricted Mode and the corre-
sponding menu items are dimmed.
Contact your administrator who is responsible for defining user groups with restricted access rights.
Toolbar
Via the toolbar in the main window, you can call up the following functions:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Table 4-1 Main Window Toolbar
Symbol Explanation
Click this icon in order to open a new chart view.
Click this icon to display the schematic display mode SIGUARD PDP
UI - Map.
Click this icon in order to open a new event list.
Click this icon in order to open a new alarm list.
Click this icon to open the window section Power Swing Analysis.
Click this icon to refresh all data. As an alternative, you can press the
<F5> function key.
Click this icon in order to save the current UI as a favorite.
The selected favorite will be displayed in the text box. The list box
displays all saved favorites.
Click this icon in order to delete a favorite.
You can find more information on favorites in chapter 4.2.1 Arranging Program Interface in section Saving
the User Interface.
SIGUARD PDP User Interface Status

Beneath the menu bar, there is a bar with the designation PSS Curve. The coloring of this bar shows the status
of the SIGUARD PDP User Interface.
• Gray
All entered limiting values are in effect and are accounted for the calculation of the limiting values viola-
tion. The connection between the SIGUARD PDP User Interface and the SIGUARD PDP Server is created.
• Orange
At least one limiting value was changed. The change affects the local computer, but not the entire
system. You can find more information on how to enter limiting values in chapter 4.7 Limit Editor.
• Pink
SIGUARD PDP UI has lost the connection to the SIGUARD PDP Server. Wait until the connection is re-estab-
lished or contact the administrator of the server.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.4 Schematic Display of the Energy Supply Power System (SLD)

In the SIGUARD PDP UI - Map window section, the topology of the power-supply system is shown as a sche-
matic display on a background bitmap or monochrome background . The individual objects/measuring points
of the power-supply system, such as generators and lines, are shown as icons.
The parameters of the power-supply system shown in the schematic display can be assigned in the SIGUARD
PDP Engineer tool, see chapter 6.1.9.1 Overview .
There are navigation, zoom, and selection functions available for the schematic display of the power-supply
system in the . You can find more information in the next table.
[sc_UI_map, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-7 SLD, Schematic Display with Topology of the Power-Supply System
²
If no schematic display is open yet, click the button to display the schematic display.
Single-line diagram is started and appears in the window section SIGUARD PDP UI - Map.
The topical status of the objects is displayed in color. The general meaning of the color is:
• Blue
The object is in normal operation, the measured values for this object lie within the defined range, the
status is OK.
• Yellow
The measured values for this object lie above the limiting value Max1 or below the limiting value Min1,
the status is not critical yet.
• Red
The measured values for this object lie above the limiting value Max2 or below the limiting value Min2,
the status is critical.
• Gray
No topical measured values are available for this graphical object.
• Edge only
No measuring device is present.
The Display name is also displayed in color.
You can find a more detailed description of the meaning in the following table.
You can move the schematic diagram section while keeping the middle mouse button pressed.
You can zoom in or out the schematic diagram section using the scroll wheel. The position of the mouse
pointer in the map defines the center of zooming in or out.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Change the schematic display in the window section SIGUARD PDP UI - Map with the help of the icons.
The following table explains the setting options and displays available in the SIGUARD PDP UI - Map window
section.
Table 4-2 Window Section SIGUARD PDP UI - Map
Element Setting Options

Click this icon on the toolbar of SIGUARD PDP UI to start the single-line
diagram.
Left mouse button: moving
Click this icon to move the map while keeping the left mouse button
pressed.
As an alternative, you can move the map while keeping the middle
mouse button pressed.
Left mouse button: select
Click this icon to be able to select an area in the map.
The measuring points that lie within the selected area are listed under
Selected measurements.
Left mouse button: center or Show tooltip
Click this icon to bring an object into the middle of the schematic
diagram section.
By clicking a point in the map, this point is moved to the center of the
schematic diagram section.
If you point to a graphical object with the mouse pointer in this mode,
the associated measured values are shown in a tooltip.
Left mouse button: zoom in
Click this icon in order to zoom in on a selected area on the map.
Zoom function: Zoom in
Zoom function: Zoom out
Click this icon to display the phase-angle difference (PAD) in the map.
The color legend can be hidden by way of a check box. The color defi-
nition is always displayed when the PAD function is opened.
Click this icon to display the voltage magnitude in the map. The color
legend can be hidden by way of a check box. The color definition is
always displayed when the function is opened.
Click this icon, in order to display the legend of the objects.
The legend is explained as follows.
Line
See Engineer Configuration
Generator
The displayed colors mean:
Red = The generator is overloaded.
Yellow = The generator is heavily loaded.
Blue = The generator is operating normally.
Unfilled = The values of the generator are not captured.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Element Setting Options

Substation
Red = A voltage that deviates significantly from the rated value was
measured in the substation. The limiting value Max2 or Min2 was
violated.
Yellow = A voltage that deviates considerably from the rated value
was measured in the substation. The limiting value Max1 or Min1 was
violated.
Blue = A voltage in the normal range was measured in the substation.
Gray = The substation is out of order.
Unfilled = The values of the substation are not captured.
Reference
When displaying the phase-angle difference, the reference is marked
by a white frame. In SIGUARD PDP Engineer, one or more substations,
generators or compensators can be defined as references.
You can find more information in chapter 6.1.9.2 Properties of the
Elements.
Compensator
Red = The compensator is overloaded.
Yellow = The compensator is heavily loaded.
Blue = The compensator is operating normally.
Gray = The compensator is out of order.
Dashed = The values of the compensator are not captured.
[sc_UI_legend, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-8 Window Section SIGUARD PDP UI - Map with a Legend Displayed
Display of Island State Detection (ISD)

If there is islanding between 2 or more substations, then the detected islands are displayed in the schematic
display as colored areas. The color scale corresponds to that of the diagrams (1st island shown in orange, 2nd
island shown is blue, etc.).
² Open the event list.
² Filter the list in column Event Element according to Island Detection.
² Select an event in order to display the corresponding islanding.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_UI_ISD, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-9 Islanding with a Certain Event
NOTE
i The values displayed in the ISD event are only minimally different from the values displayed in the charts,
since the application performs a mean-value generation.
If an island is detected, an event is generated using the application Island state detection. The event
contains information on frequencies in all islands. Since the calculated value is performed from a mean-
value generation, it can deviate from the value shown in the chart.
Display of Power Swing Recognition

A power swing detected in the electrical power system is shown in the schematic diagram as colored circular
areas around the substations. The circular areas can also be connected by colored, rectangular areas, if the
swing affects several substations.
² Open the event list.
² Filter the list in column Event Element according to Power Swing Recognition.
² Select an event in order to display the corresponding power swing recognition.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_UI_PSR, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-10 Power Swing Recognition with a Certain Event
You can find further information on the analysis of power swing detection in chapter 3.2.2 Display in the User
Interface .
Displaying the Phase-Angle Difference (PAD)

With this function, the phase-angle difference of the voltages between different PMUs can be displayed in
graphical form with a Heatmap. The locations form triangles, for example, Nuremberg – Muelheim – Paris,
that are shown in color. One PMU is defined in SIGUARD PDP Engineer as the reference.
You can find more information in chapter 6.1.9.2 Properties of the Elements.
In the following example, Nuremberg is defined as the reference PMU and shown in a gray border. If a PMU
has a positive phase-angle difference in comparison to the reference PMU, the phase angle leads. If a PMU has
a negative phase-angle difference in comparison to the reference PMU, the phase angle lags.
²
Click the icon to display the phase-angle difference.
The voltage phasors used to display the phase-angle difference are specified using the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
For this, all voltage phasors that can be used are given a priority. If the voltage phasor with priority 1 is of poor
quality, for example, because of missing time synchronization of the PMU or due to communication problems,
a voltage phasor with a lower priority is used instead. The reference substation is marked by a white frame
and is also specified in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
The color scale is displayed.
The vertices of each of the triangles consist of station/generator/compensator symbols which have been
assigned voltage phasors in the Graphics Editor in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer (see chapter 6.1.9.2 Properties
of the Elements).
The colors shown in the triangle correspond to the degree values of the measured phase-angle difference.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_UI_PAD, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-11 Displaying the Phase-Angle Difference
Displaying the Voltage Magnitude

With this function, the voltage magnitude at all stations can be displayed in graphical form with a heatmap.
The locations form triangles that are shown in color.
You can find more information in chapter 6.1.9.2 Properties of the Elements.
In the following example, Nuremberg is defined as the reference PMU and shown in a gray border. This has no
influence on the heatmap because the local rated value of the measuring signal is used as a reference. You
can set the rated value in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer (see chapter 6.1.8 Limit Editor)
²
Click the icon to display the voltage magnitude.
The substations used to display the voltage magnitude are specified using the SIGUARD PDP Engineer. For this,
all possible substations are given a priority.
The color scale is displayed.
The vertices of each of the triangles consist of station/generator/compensator symbols which have been
assigned voltage phasors in the Graphics Editor in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
The colors displayed in the triangles correspond to the values of the measured voltage magnitude divided by
the rated value. If the values are invalid, they are displayed as undefined.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_UI_voltage_magnitude, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-12 Displaying the Voltage Magnitude
Displaying Measured Values

The Display name and the associated topical value are displayed for measured values.
² If you move the black slider in the PSS Curve or in the Chart View, the topical, associated measured
value is displayed in the Map.
NOTE
i The value displayed in the Chart View differs slightly from the value displayed in the Map, because the
Map displays the real measured values and the Chart View also displays intermediate values.
In case of a limit violation, the text shown in the Map is colored.
Displaying the Power-Flow Direction

An arrow is shown for the power-flow direction. The direction of this arrow depends on the sign of the linked
measured power value.
² If you move the slider in the PSS Curve or in the Chart View, the direction of the arrow may change if
necessary.
In case of a limit violation, the arrow is colored accordingly.
If the value is Out of service, the arrow remains in the initial direction.
² If you wish to display the power flow as an arrow with a measured value, you must create 2 graphical
elements in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer. To avoid misinterpretations, suppress showing the sign in the
measured value.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.5 Chart View
4.5 Chart View

In the Chart View window section, you can simultaneously display several diagram groups. The diagram
groups are separated from one another by horizontal lines. Within a diagram group, the displayed time range
is aligned vertically, that is, values of an instant are listed exactly one below the other.
In order to group the display of measured values, you can open several Chart Views.
The time lines of the diagrams of a diagram group are always scaled identically to ensure comparability of the
values. Depending on the width of the y-axis label, however, diagrams in different diagram groups can be
scaled slightly differently.
Depending on whether you drop a measuring point above or below the horizontal line, a new diagram is
created within the diagram group (when you place the object above the line) or a new diagram group is
generated (when you place the object below the line).
Every diagram group can contain several Line diagrams but only one Vector diagram.
The Diagram type is determined by the type of the first curve. An analog curve is displayed in a line diagram,
a phasor in a vector diagram. In order to represent the change in the magnitude of a phasor with time in a line
diagram without an additional analog value, first create an empty line diagram and pull the phasor into it. To
generate a blank line diagram use the button.

You can display up to 16 curves in each diagram. To represent an additional curve in an existing diagram, drag
and drop a measuring point into the diagram. The curve adapts to the diagram type. A line diagram shows
only the amplitude of a phasor.
In real-time display mode, the curves in a line diagram move to the left. New values are added on the right
side.
[rgcsem99-090812-10.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-13 Chart View, Display Mode of Several Curves of a Time Range
The diagrams display the time range that has been selected with the slider in the PSS curve window section.
The cursor position on the time line corresponds to the cursor position in the PSS curve window section.
In offline mode, a past event can be rerun repeatedly to analyze the underlying dynamic processes. A cursor
then runs through the line diagrams.
Parameters for the Displayed Curves

The measured values displayed are listed with the respective colors next to or above the diagram. The corre-
sponding curve can be shown/hidden via the check-box selections.
Right-click an entry in the list to open a context menu. The menu items mean:
• Signals
Use this menu item to show/hide individual curves.
• Copy to clipboard ...

Select this menu item to copy the diagram to the Microsoft Windows clipboard.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.5 Chart View
• Show measure line (in offline mode only, only for line diagrams)
With this menu item, you can show a horizontal line for a certain measuring point. The exact measured
value is shown at intersection of this line with the diagram.
For details, also see Figure 4-42.
• Show second cursor (in offline mode only, only for line diagrams)
With this menu item, you can show a 2nd cursor (vertical line). The difference from the first measured
value is shown at intersection of this line with the diagram.
• Edit limits
With this menu item, you can open the Limit Editor for this signal. The old limiting values are displayed.
Alternately you can display the limiting values of a curve by double-clicking the corresponding entry in
the curve list.
• Delete signals
With this menu item, you delete a single signal from the chart without deleting the entire diagram.
After deleting a signal, the y-axis, the context menu, and the diagram toolbar are adapted accordingly.
Once you have deleted all signals, the diagram is empty. You can save Chart Views with empty diagrams
as favorites.
• Set reference phasor (only for phasor diagrams)

With this menu item, you can define a specific measuring point as reference phasor or remove the refer-
ence.
• Show average values (only for line diagrams, no formulas)

With this menu item, a mean value is generated for every measured value of the curve and the curve is
thus smoothed. The smoothed curve is identified by [Avg] in the name.
• Edit calculated signals

This menu item is only available with formulas.
With this menu item, you can edit calculated values.
• Save calculated signals

This menu item is only available with formulas.
With this menu item, you can save calculated values.
• Deselect all
With this menu item, you can hide all displayed chart signals. This is helpful if you want to concentrate on
one signal when there are many.
• Select all
With this menu item, you can show all chart signals again.
The following table explains the setting options and displays for the Chart View window section.
Table 4-3 Chart View Window Section
Element Explanation
Click this element in order to generate an empty line diagram.
A click on the left element successively reduces the height of all diagrams (for
overview).
A click on the right element successively enlarges the height of all diagrams (for
details).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.5 Chart View
Element Explanation
With a click on this element, the average values of the curve are displayed
(smoothing average generation).
Click this element in order to open a dialog in which you can switch on/switch off
the trace of the tie point and change the chronological length of the tie point.
The trace is displayed only in online operation.
Click this element to start the editor for all limiting values.
Click this element in the Limit Editor (Multiple Limit Editor) to activate changed
limiting values in the overall system. The color of the PSS curve bar changes from
orange to gray.
This element is visible only if a limiting value was changed in the Limit Editor or if
the Limit Editor (Single Limit Editor) is opened for an individual curve. It is opened
by double-clicking a curve/legend entry.
Click this element in order to change the scale of the y-axis.
• Axis
The following properties are to be set for the selected axis:
• dynamic
With the setting dynamic, the scaling of the y-axis is always automatically
selected such that the displayed curves are displayed at the maximum scale.
• maximized
With the setting maximized, the scaling is corrected such that the displayed
curves are displayed at the maximum scale.
• manual
With the setting manual, the scaling of the curves is set to the entered
minimum and maximum values.
• zero-aligned
If zero-alignment is selected for an axis, the y-axis is displayed from the zero
point and the curves are rescaled correspondingly.
If zero-alignment is selected for multiple axes, all selected axes are displayed
so that the zero line is identical. The curves are rescaled appropriately.
This element is active only with the maximized setting.
Click this element in order to correct the scaling one time, such that the displayed
curves are shown at maximum scale.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.5 Chart View
Element Explanation
Click this element to delete the relevant diagram, including all curves represented
in it. All following diagrams move up by one line.
This element is selected by double-clicking a measured value above the diagram
using the context menu.
The border color correlates with the curve color.
The element shows the currently valid limiting values for the associated curve.
You can change and enable/disable the limiting values. Enabled limiting values
are represented as a horizontal line in line diagrams and as a circular line in
phasor diagrams.
Effective limiting values are indicated by a set check mark. Limiting values that
have been locally changed in the UI but not yet saved in the system are displayed
with an orange background.
When clicking the cross, the element is closed and the changes are saved locally.
An active limiting value must be plausible (for example, Max2 > Max1), other-
wise, saving it is rejected.
Zoom Function
In Chart View you can select a section in a Line Chart in order to zoom in the display of the PSS Curve onto
this section.
[sc_Zoom-in, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-14 Zooming in Chart View

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.5 Chart View
If you have selected a section in the chart then the 2 outer sliders in the PSS Curve will be adjusted accord-
ingly. But this only happens if you release the mouse button inside the chart. If you do not release the mouse
button until you are outside the chart, then the display in the PSS Curve will not be adjusted.
[sc_Zoom-in-result, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-15 Zoomed Section in Chart View
The smallest section that you can zoom to is 12 s. If you select an even smaller section such as 2 s, then the
zoom level (Select time segment) changes. The lowest zoom level is 10 seconds. In order to zoom back out,
you must change the zoom level under Select time segment.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.6 Measured Values, Applications, and Formulas
4.6.1 Overview
In the window section Measurements, applications and formulas, you will find:
• Selected measurements
The list contains measuring points that belong to the selected objects in the window section SIGUARD
PDP UI - Map.
• All measurements
The list contains all measuring points that are available in the power-supply system. In this list, you can
also define whether the measuring points are listed in alphabetical order, sorted by unit or type.
• Predefined formulas
The list contains all predefined formulas.
These formulas can be applied to the measured values.
Information on the use of predefined formulas can be found in chapter 4.11.3 Displaying Curves.
• Voltage stability curves

The list contains special curves (applications), for example, voltage-stability curves.
• Application results
– ADR
If you license the ADR application and parameterize this with the SIGUARD PDP Engineer, you can
select the power frequency and power frequency rate of change displayed by the phase-angle
changes on the display in the ADR window section.
The power frequency and the power frequency change rate are calculated for the GDL application.
You can display these values in charts.
– Statistics
For each PMU statistical information on the quality of the connection is collected, which can be
shown in charts.
[sc_UI_Measruements_Formula_Lists, 2, --_--]
Figure 4-16 Listings of Measuring Points, Measuring Point Applications and Formulas
With the arrows, you can show or hide the complete window section or a listing.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
You can define whether these are listed in alphabetical order, sorted by unit or type by clicking the corre-
sponding column heading once or twice.
Up to 16 measuring points/formulas/VSCs/application results, for example, statistics, can be displayed in a
chart.
To do this, drag and drop the selected measuring point into the window section Chart View. A measuring
point of the Phasor type is represented as a vector diagram unless you drag and drop it to a previously created
line chart. A measuring point of the Analog type is always displayed as a line chart. You can insert measuring
points and formulas in line and vector diagrams. A corresponding mouse pointer indicates whether the drop
operation is allowed or not. You can select several measuring points and simultaneously drag and drop them
into a chart.
In the measurements window section, right-click a measuring point of the Phasor type to define it as a refer-
ence phasor or to delete it. Using the reference phasor, all phasors are displayed not in their absolute angle
position, but rather with their angle difference to the reference phasor.
All phasors displayed in the window section Chart View refer to the reference phasor. This means that all
phase angles are displayed relative to the phase of the reference phasor.
NOTE
i If you use PMUs with reporting rates higher than 50 Hz or 60 Hz, note that, to display them correctly in the
phasor diagram, it is necessary to transmit the reference phasor from a PMU with the highest reporting
rate.
This reporting rate must be a multiple of the reporting rates of the available PMUs.
Example 1: Not Highest Rate

Reference: 10 Hz
Referencing PMU: 120 Hz
A correct reference can be calculated only every 12 values, that is, the display is not correct.
Example 2: Not a Multiple

Reference: 25 Hz
Referencing PMU: 10 Hz
A correct reference can be calculated only every 5 values, that is, the display is not correct.
4.6.2 Selected Measurements
The list Selected measurements contains all measuring points selected in the schematic display. In this way,
the number of measuring points can be limited to one substation, for example.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_selected_measurements, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-17 Listing of the Selected Measuring Points
4.6.3 All Measurements
The list All measurements contains all measuring points that are available in the power-supply system.
[ovcvallm-090812-21.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-18 Listing of All Measuring Points
4.6.4 Predefined Formulas
The list Predefined formulas contains all predefined formulas in SIGUARD PDP. These formulas can be pulled
into a Chart View, in order to link measuring points as input variables to a curve. This curve is then displayed in
Chart View. Assign a unique name to the calculated curve.
NOTE
i Depending on the selected curve, only certain measured values can be used as input variables. With some
formulas, you can use constant values.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_predefined_formulas, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-19 Listing of All Predefined Formulas
A connection created like this is calculated and displayed in SIGUARD PDP UI locally only. Values from the past
are determined by an archive request for input data.
NOTE
i If you select a time range greater than 10 minutes, the values with full resolution will not be read out from
the SIGUARD PDP Archive, but the values from the condensed archive calculated for the rapid display or
large time ranges. It is not possible to generate an exact display of minimum and maximum for the indi-
vidual of the support points of the measured value graph. The only value that is calculated is the one that
was valid at the end of each period.
If this calculation is useful in general you can save this connection permanently. At this date and time, the
connection results are stored in the archive. In addition, for the other users of SIGUARD PDP, it is also avail-
able.
NOTE
i For the time range before establishing the connection, the input data to the connection are read from the
archive. The condensed archive values are not used to determine the results accurately. This allows the
calculation to be exact. Thus, the processing of a query for the time range before establishing the connec-
tion can take significantly longer than for the time range after establishing the connection.
NOTE
permitted:


E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.6.5 Voltage-Stability Curves
The list Voltage-stability curves contains all measuring points in the power system with which voltage-
stability curves can be calculated using the application VSC.
This is configured in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
[sc_VSC list, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-20 Listing of All Measuring Points for Calculation of the VSCs
4.6.6 Application Results
4.6.6.1 Statistics
Using the collected data under Statistics you can evaluate the connection to the PMUs (diagnostics and failure
analysis).
6 statistical values which can be displayed as diagrams are gathered for each PMU:
• count of receive errors

Number of errors received per minute.
• count of received frames

Number of telegrams that are transmitted from the PMU to the SIGUARD PDP Server per minute (for
example, 600).
For the time range, a default setting of 1 minute is set. You cannot change this value.
• count of telegram errors

Number of telegrams per minute, which can be detected as erroneous during the test of the checksum.
• count of timestamp errors

Number of errors with deviation from the regularity of time stamps per repetition rate.
• count of timestamp window error

Number of errors with deviation of time stamps per time slot (tolerance). The deviation can lie in the past
or in the future.
• latency
Measurement of maximum latency. The latency is the time difference between the measurement instant
in the PMU to the arrival at the SIGUARD PDP Server.
NOTE
i Consider that the absolute latency can be analyzed only if the SIGUARD PDP Server is time-synchronized.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_List_statistical_values, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-21 Listing of Statistical Measured Values
4.6.6.2 ADR
If you use the ADR application, you can display the average power frequency calculated in the ADR application,
the minimum and maximum power frequency, the difference between the minimum and maximum power
frequency, and the rate of change of the power frequency here.
[sc_ADR_Chart_View, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-22 Display of the Application ADR in the Chart View

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.6.6.3 PSR
If you use the PSR application, you can display the modes used in the PSR application here.
[sc_application_results_PSR-Channels, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-23 Display of the PSR Application in the Chart View
NOTE
i The channels JobIdOfMaxMagnitude and Magnitude of the global modes are for internal use only.
4.6.7 Filter Function
In the different subareas of the window section Measurements, applications, and formulas, you can filter
according to values in the Description column.
For sections where filtering is possible, you will find the Filter icon to the right next to the section name.
Set Filter
²
Click the icon .
A text box appears.

² Enter the text to be filtered in this text box.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
NOTE
• *
• ?
NOTE
i The filtering function does not take into account upper and lower-case letters.
In the Predefined formulas list, the function searches the entered text in the formula descriptions.
The text is not stored in Favorites. If you load Favorites, the filter text box is always hidden.
Cancel Filter
²
Click the icon .
The filter is removed. All entries are shown unfiltered.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.7 Limit Editor
4.7 Limit Editor

In the Limit Editor, you define the limiting values/thresholds that are to play a role in the evaluation. All
configured measuring points are listed.
The limiting values/thresholds can be defined in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer tool.
See chapter 6.1.8 Limit Editor.
Starting Limit Editor

Start the Limit Editor as follows:
²
In the window section Chart View, click the top left button .
You can enter limiting values for all measuring points and change them later (see chapter 4.5 Chart View).
3 minimum and 3 maximum values are possible for each measuring point. Enable the limiting values to ensure
that they are effective. Measuring points for which no limiting values are effective are not considered when
calculating the system status (Power System Status).
[sc_LimitEditor, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-24 Limit Editor, Definition of the Limiting Values
Entering Limiting Values

² Set the parameters for the limiting values.
6 columns are available for entering the limiting values:
• Min1, Min2, Min3

In these columns, enter the lower limiting values/threshold. Min3 is the lower/most critical value. Min1 is
the upper/least critical value.
• Max1, Max2, Max3

In these columns, enter the upper limiting values/thresholds. Max1 is the lower/least critical value. Max3
is the upper/most critical value.
Copying Limiting Values and Activations

Copy limiting values and activations as follows:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.7 Limit Editor
² While keeping the left mouse button pressed, select the limiting values and activations by dragging with
the mouse.
² Right-click in the selection and select Copy from the context menu.
² Right-click the cell which corresponds to the upper left corner of the area to be inserted and select Paste
from the context menu.
Effect of Limiting Values:
• The limiting values affect the coloring in the geographical overview picture in the single-line diagram.
The color of the stations indicates whether the voltages have violated limiting values. The color of the
lines indicates whether the currents have violated limiting values.
• If the Limits editor is opened in the Chart view, the limiting values are drawn into the line and vector
diagrams.
• The limiting values influence the status of the curve in the PSS curve window section.
² Make settings in the Limit Editor with the help of the buttons and list boxes.
The following table explains the setting options and displays of the Limit Editor.
Table 4-4 Limit Editor Window Section
Element Explanation
Use this element to select which measuring points are to be listed:
• Selected measurements
The measuring points preselected in the schematic display are listed.
• All measurements
All measuring points are listed.
• PSR
The data of the power swing recognition PSR is displayed.
• ADR
Results from the ADR Automatic fault recognition are displayed.
• Statistics
The communication statistics for the PMUs are displayed.
• All changed limits
Only the measuring points with limiting values that have already been
changed are displayed.
Click this element to activate changed limiting values in the overall system.
The Limit Editor is closed.
Enter the limiting value and enable it by checking it. Note that this change is
not immediately adopted into the overall system, but rather is only effective
locally on this computer.
Click this element to activate changed limiting values in the overall system.
The Limit Editor is closed.
Click this element to save the changes locally and to exit the Limit Editor.
The changed limiting values are available to the PSS simulation. The
behavior of the PSS curve and alerting remains unchanged until you save the
data in the overall system. This state is displayed by the PSS Curve bar being
colored orange.
Click this element to discard all changes and exit the Limit Editor.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.7 Limit Editor
NOTE
permitted:

You can find more information on the calculation of the power-system status in chapter 2.1.2 Calculations.
Edit Limiting Values in Chart View

² Right-click a diagram in the Chart View.
² Select Edit limits and select the measured value whose limiting values you want to edit.
A Limits editor appears in the Chart View.
² Enter the desired changes.
The PSS curve bar is colored orange.
NOTE
i This editor only contains the button X. This button saves the changes and closes the editor.
² Close the editor using the X button.

The PSS curve bar remains orange.
² If you want to reset or check the changes, open the Limit Editor.
The changed value is highlighted in orange.
² To reset the change, click Cancel.
The PSS curve bar is no longer highlighted in orange.
Click this element to enable changed limiting values in the overall system .

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.8 Alarm List and Event List
4.8.1 Overview
SIGUARD PDP UI messages can be shown in the form of lists:
• Alarm list
The Alarm list (Alarm list) contains only currently existing messages.
• Event list
The Event list (Event list) contains all messages (appearing and disappearing messages).
The alarm list and the event list are opened in the lower right window section within SIGUARD PDP UI. The
window can be separated and enlarged or inserted into another position in the SIGUARD program window
(see chapter 4.2.1 Arranging Program Interface).
The alarm list or event list contains alarms or events that occurred in the time range that is set by the left and
right limitation of the PSS curve.
NOTE
i If the message Out of Service is displayed, the mean value is less than 10 % of the calculated rated value.
The message does not indicate that the PMU is out of operation.
4.8.2 Alarm List
Open a window for an alarm list in SIGUARD PDP by clicking the button .
[sclisala-100713-16.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-25 Alarm List
The alarm list is comparable to an EXCEL table. It contains the following columns:
Table 4-5 Parameters of the Alarm List
Element Explanation
Time Point in time at which the warning indication was tripped in
hours:minutes:sec 1/1000 (time stamp). The warning indications can be
sorted according to time rising or falling, by clicking the heading Time
with the left mouse button. The column is always shown.
Date Date of tripping the warning indication in the format: Year-Month-Day
(for example, 2010-09-21)

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Element Explanation
Name Name of the physical PMU or the measuring channel that triggered the
warning indication.
Event element Element that triggered the warning indication (for example, PMU
device, Channel, Island Detection, or Power Swing Recognition)
Incidence Description of the event (for example, Limit Low 1 violated (limiting
value shortfall) or PMU device communication failure or License
Error)
Message Additional information (for example, size of the measured value: Value
379981 V, since the lower limiting value 1 of 380 000 V was undercut).
For notes on editing the Alarm list, see chapter 4.8.4 Editing of Messages.
4.8.3 Event List
Open a window for an event list in SIGUARD PDP UI by clicking the button .
[scmbelis-100713-11.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-26 Event List
A horizontal line marks the current point in time (offline operation). Events which lie in the future (from the
point of view of the current time cursor) are colored gray.
The time cursor (horizontal line) can be moved. Select the corresponding row and select the context menu
Move > locator. To analyze an event, the time cursor is placed on the instant when the event occurred. The
diagrams then display the measured values at the time of the event.
The event list comprises the following columns:
Table 4-6 Parameters of the Event List
Element Explanation
Time Point in time at which the event indication was tripped in
hours:minutes:sec 1/1000 (time stamp). The event messages can be
sorted according to time rising or falling. The column is always shown.
Date Date of tripping the event indication in the format: Year-Month-Day (for
example, 2010-09-21)
Name Name of the physical PMU, the measuring channel or the application
that triggered the event indication.
Event element Element that triggered the event indication (for example, PMU device,
Channel, Island Detection, or Power Swing Recognition)

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Element Explanation
Incidence Description of the event (for example, Limit Low 1 violated (limiting
value shortfall) or PMU device communication failure or License
Error)
Transition Display whether an appearing or disappearing event indication is
upcoming.
Message Additional information (for example, size of the measured value: Value
379981 V, since the lower limiting value 1 of 380 000 V was undercut).
4.8.4 Editing of Messages
For a better overview of the alarm list and the event list, the table can be edited.
Editing Columns
• Hiding columns
All columns with the exception of the column Time can be hidden. Open the context menu in the
header. Only marked headers are displayed (shown).
• Column sequence
You can move individual columns by dragging the header horizontally to another place in the table,
thereby changing the column sequence.
• Change column widths

All columns can be changed widthwise by dragging the column edge.
Sorting According to Column Contents

The alarm list and the event list can only be sorted according to time (rising or falling). For this, click the
header of the column Time.
Filtering According to Column Contents

In the column Name, Event element (Element that triggered the alarm) and Incidence (event) are available
in the list boxes according to whose parameters the lists can be filtered.
You can enter a filter text. Then, all events that contain the filter text you entered are displayed.
NOTE
• *
• ?
NOTE
i The filtering function does not take into account upper and lower-case letters.
In the event list, it is also possible to filter for the appearing or disappearing events. Placeholders are not
allowed in this filter.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Copying the Contents of Lists

Select a line and press <CTRL-A>, in order to select all lines, and <CTRL-C>, in order to copy lines into the clip-
board. Open the corresponding application (for example, Microsoft Word Pad) and press <CTRL-V>, in order to
copy the contents of the clipboard into the file.
4.8.5 Graphical Representation of Messages
If additional information is required for a list entry, you can display the following event elements in a curve by
dragging the name into the Chart View:
• Channel
• Power Swing Recognition
• Automatic Disturbance Recognition
• PMU Device (as long as this list entry relates to a short-circuit event)

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.9 Reporting
4.9 Reporting
In order to document an event, diagrams can be stored in the clipboard and inserted from there, for example,
into Microsoft Word.
Copying a Diagram into the Clipboard

You can copy a diagram into the clipboard as follows:
² Right-click the diagram in the Chart View window section.
² Select Copy to Clipboard ... from the context menu.
[cvsavmet-140911-08.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-27 Export to Metafile
² In the next dialog, enter the image size and confirm with OK.
² Open a blank document or a self-prepared report template using a document editor, for example, Micro-
soft Word.
² Press <CTRL> + <V> to insert the clipboard contents into the document.
² Open the event list or the alarm list.
² Select the relevant messages (click them individually or select all with <Ctrl> + <A>) and copy the
messages to the clipboard with <CTRL> + <C>.
² Press <CTRL> + <V> to insert the events or warning indications into the document.
² Add your own text as comment. To do so, use the default settings of the document editor.
² Save the document and print it.
Exporting Values
All measured values of the time range selected with the sliders or selected readings from the SIGUARD archive
can be exported to multiple files. For each reporting rate, a separate file is created that displays this reporting
rate in the file name. These export files can be processed further by using a suitable program (spreadsheet
program, COMTRADE Viewer, etc.).
NOTE
Measured values are exported into files as follows:

² Switch to offline mode.
² In the window section PSS curve, set the desired time range with the sliders.
² In order to export all measured values to a CSV file, select the menu item File > Export all > CSV....
Multiple CSV files are generated depending on the reporting rate. The events are written to a separate
CSV file.
- or -

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.9 Reporting
² In order to export the measured values of selected channels to a CSV file, select the menu item File >
Export chart data > CSV....
Multiple CSV files are generated depending on the reporting rate.
- or -
² In order to export all measured values to COMTRADE files, select the menu item File > Export all >
COMTRADE ASCII... or File > Export all > COMTRADE float32....
Multiple sets of COMTRADE files (a configuration file and a corresponding data file) are generated
depending on the reporting rate. The events are written to a separate CSV file.
- or -
² In order to export the measured values of selected channels to a COMTRADE file, select the menu item
File > Export chart data > COMTRADE ASCII... or File > Export chart data > COMTRADE float32....
Multiple sets of COMTRADE files are generated depending on the reporting rate. The events are written
to a separate CSV file.
The dialog Export all to CSV, Export chart data to CSV, Export all to COMTRADE, or Export chart data to
COMTRADE opens.
NOTE
permitted:

[sc_Export_all_to_CSV, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-28 Dialog Export all to CSV
² Enter the export name in this dialog.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.9 Reporting
² Select the resolution of the export.

Full resolution means that the data is exported in its maximum resolution. This maximum resolution
results from the Reporting rate of the PMU. A separate file is created for each Reporting rate.
You can select the condensing stage of the archive in the list box. With this condensing stage, you can
reduce the number of exported samples.
Example: Select 1 min. In the export file, you receive 1 sample per minute. To be able to display all
extreme values, the maximum, minimum, and mean value of the last minute are additionally exported.
With the check box Export events, you select whether the export should contain also the events of the
selected time range. If you select a resolution smaller than the Full resolution, this check box is automat-
ically deselected.
² If necessary, adapt the start and end time for the export. The position of the sliders of the PSS curve is not
changed.
² Click Save.
NOTE
i For longer jobs, the status bar displays the status of the respective job.
The status bar displays the status for the following jobs:
• CSV or COMTRADE export
• Create permanent archive
• Delete permanent archive

If the job was successfully completed, it is removed from the status bar. If an error has occurred, a dialog
will appear.
The measured values are exported to multiple CSV or COMTRADE files, depending on the set reporting rate. If
using COMTRADE export, an associated configuration file (extension .cfg) is created for each data file (exten-
sion .dat). The path and the directory were defined during the installation of SIGUARD PDP.
The quality of the measured values can also be taken from the CSV file, see the following example.
[rgcom018-060813-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-29 Extract from a CSV Export File

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.9 Reporting
Table 4-7 Significance of the Quality Code in a CSV Export File
Abbreviation Meaning Source of the Quality Code

ADI Application data invalid SIGUARD PDP Server
ADS Application data suspect SIGUARD PDP Server
ASY Value replaced by archive synchronization SIGUARD PDP Server
CHD Coherence: drain of oscillation SIGUARD PDP Server
CHS Coherence: source of oscillation SIGUARD PDP Server
CLF Time error PMU
COC Configuration change PMU
COE PMU communication error SIGUARD PDP Server
CTO Collector time-out SIGUARD PDP Server
DAI PMU data invalid PMU
DAM PMU data missing PMU
DAS Data can contain errors SIGUARD PDP Server
DNF Data not found in archive SIGUARD PDP Server
ERR PMU error PMU
H1V Limit violation Maximum 1 SIGUARD PDP Server
L1V Limit violation Minimum 1 SIGUARD PDP Server
NSY PMU not synchronized PMU
OOS Out of service SIGUARD PDP Server
PCE Calculation library error SIGUARD PDP Server
SC1 Time synchronization 1 PMU
SC2 Time synchronization 2 PMU
TGR Transfer trigger PMU
All events are written to another file <Filename>Events... .csv. The events are composed of the alarm condi-
tions (at the left-hand time t1) and the events between time t1 and the right-hand time t2.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.10 Applications in the UI
4.10 Applications in the UI
4.10.1 Overview
In SIGUARD PDP UI, the results from the following applications can be displayed:
• Island-State Detection in networks (ISD)

You can find additional information for displaying in the UI in chapter 3.1.2 Display in the User Interface.
• Power Swing Recognition in the network (PSR)

You can find additional information for displaying in the UI in chapter 3.2.2 Display in the User Interface .
• Display of Voltage-Stability Curves (VSC)

You can find additional information for displaying in the UI in chapter 3.4.2 Display in the User Interface.
• Display of Automatic Disturbance Recognition (ADR)

You can find additional information for displaying in the UI in chapter Displaying the Short Circuit in the
User Interface, Page 86.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.11 Working with SIGUARD PDP UI
4.11.1 Sample Event
A simple example is given to illustrate the handling of SIGUARD PDP.

In this example, a time range is selected from the archive that is displayed as critical in the PSS curve window
section. The essential curves for this time range are to be displayed and analyzed. The analysis is performed in
offline mode. The goal of the analysis is to find out why the PSS curve keeps going into the red range.
Procedure
The suggested procedure is to illustrate the individual steps for examining and assessing an event.
Proceed as follows:
• Select the time range in which the event to be examined is found.
• Display the essential curves to the event.
• Export the time range into the permanent archive.
• Import the time range from the permanent archive.
• Create and print a report.
4.11.2 Selecting the Time Range
The analysis of a time interval can only be performed in offline mode. In offline mode, the information from
the devices is still stored in the archive and can later be viewed and analyzed.
In the window section PSS curve, select a time range which you would like to display and analyze.
The temporal progression of the selected range can be followed in the window section SIGUARD PDP UI -
Map.
Switching on Offline Mode

² Click the Go offline button to set Offline mode.
The following figure shows the status curve with several critical ranges. These are displayed in red.
Figure 4-30 Power System Status, Curve with Critical Ranges
Selecting the Time Range

²
Set the length of the visible time range with the list box .
² Scroll with the arrows to the desired location in the archive.

² Move the sliders on the time line to the desired points using the mouse.
The time range between the sliders is represented in the diagrams.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Figure 4-31 Power System Status, Selecting the Time Range
Starting Playback
You can use the playback function to analyze an event from the past. You can adapt the playback function to
your needs by modifying the playback speed and the step width. As data must be reloaded from the archive in
the meantime, there can be time delays in the playback.
²
Click the button to position the cursor at the left edge of the selected time range.
²
Click the button to start the playback.
In the schematic display (SIGUARD PDP UI - Map window section), you can see the projected sample project.
It consists of 4 substations/measuring points and associated high-voltage lines. The coloring of the objects
changes, depending on the state at different instants.
The default object coloring is blue. Exceeding the 1st limiting value turns the display yellow, exceeding the
2nd limiting value turns the display red.
In the figure, the line between the measuring points Muelheim and Paris is clearly critical. The cause is to be
found below.
[rgcom026-060913-01.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-32 SIGUARD PDP UI - Map, Following the Progression

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Stopping Playback
²
Click the button to stop the playback.
Selecting a Specific Instant

² In the selected time range, click a point to display the state at this instant.
In the schematic display, you see the objects colored depending on the state at this instant.
4.11.3 Displaying Curves
Schematic Display with Objects

In the SIGUARD PDP UI - Map window section, you see a schematic display with the power-supply system
inserted. The power-supply system consists of objects, for example, generators and lines. You can display tool-
tips for the individual objects. Furthermore, a legend is available.
Display Tooltips
You can call tooltips for the individual objects on the schematic display. Measured values are displayed for the
respective objects.
²
Click the button to display tooltips.
² Place the cursor over an object to display the tooltip.

The available information on the object is displayed.
[rgcom070-230713-01.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-33 SIGUARD PDP UI - Map, Display Tooltip
Display the Legend

The objects of the schematic display and their coloring are described in a legend.
² Click the Legend button.
The legend is shown.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_UI_legend, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-34 SIGUARD PDP UI - Map, Display Legend
For further information on the objects in the schematic display, see chapter 4.4 Schematic Display of the
Energy Supply Power System (SLD)
Display the Phase-Angle Difference

In the schematic display, the stations included in the phase-angle difference display are shown with a colored
triangle. The magnitude of the phase-angle difference can be read from the coloration in the triangle in
comparison to the displayed color bars.
²
Click the button.
The triangle and the color bars with scale are displayed.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[scmappad-250713-01.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-35 SIGUARD PDP UI - Map, Displaying the Phase-Angle Difference
² Switch to offline mode and move the cursor to within the set time range.
The triangle is colored according to the color definition on the basis of the existing phase-angle difference.
Selecting Objects
In the schematic display, select the objects for which you want to display curves.
²
Click the button.
² In the SIGUARD PDP UI - Map window section, select a section (in the form of a circle) around the
objects that you want to analyze.
The list of selected measured values is shown under Selected measurements.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[rgcom073-230713-01.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-36 SIGUARD PDP UI - Map, Select Objects
² In the right side of the window, click the arrow above Measurements, Applications, Formulas.
The list of measured values is displayed.
The measured values available for the selected objects are listed in Selecting Measurements. In the next
step, you can display curves for these measured values.
[rgcsem99-090812-50.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-37 Measurements, Listed Measured Values
Zoom in on a Map Section

You can enlarge the display of a map section. Details of the power-supply system are visible in the enlarged
display. For example, multiple lines become visible that have previously only been represented as one single
line.
The details are only displayed if they have been previously parameterized.
²
Click the button to zoom in on the map section.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
The schematic display is shown enlarged.
[rgcom036-250713-01.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-38 SIGUARD PDP UI - Map, Enlarged Map Section
²
Click the button to undo the enlargement.
Displaying Curves
You can now represent the available measured values as curves in diagrams.
To analyze the event, create the following charts:
• A timing diagram with currents
• A vector diagram with voltages
• A diagram with a voltage-stability curve

²
In the Chart view window section, click the button to generate a blank line diagram.
² Drag and drop 2 measured currents with the mouse pointer, for example, NbgH/I1 and MlhM/I1, to the
generated diagram.
You can select several measured values in the list and simultaneously drag them into a diagram.
These measured values are current phasors of the measuring points Nuremberg and Mülheim. The timing
diagram represents the time characteristic of the absolute current values, but not their phase.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
As a time range, the time range selected in PSS curve is displayed in the window section.
[rgcsem99-260712-51.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-39 Timing Diagram, Currents
The figure shows considerable changes of the amperage and damped oscillations. The amperage changes are
caused by connecting and disconnecting a heavy load. The oscillations indicate a power swing.
Create a diagram with voltage phasors for further examination.
In the Chart view window section, you can scroll down to insert and display further diagrams.
² Drag and drop a voltage phasor, for example, NbgH/U1, to the Chart view window section below the
timing diagram.
A vector diagram with a voltage vector is displayed.
² In addition, drag and drop a voltage phasor, for example, MlhM/I1, to the vector diagram.
[rgcsem99-251010-42.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-40 Vector Diagram, Voltages
The vector diagram shows the characteristics of the phase angles of the voltages, that is whether there is a
phase displacement and how large this difference is. Furthermore, you can see whether the phase between
the voltages increases or decreases or remains the same. This enables you to derive, for example, whether 2
generators oscillate against each other.
A voltage-stability curve can provide additional information.
The voltage-stability curves are listed in Applications.
² Drag and drop a voltage-stability curve, for example, MlhM -> NbgH, to the Chart view window section
below the timing diagram.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
A diagram with the voltage-stability curve is displayed.
[scvsckur-091110-06.tif, 2, --_--]
Figure 4-41 Diagram with Voltage-Stability Curve
The voltage-stability curve displays the voltage over the power at a specific instant. In the figure, the critical
point has almost been reached. If the power was slightly higher, stability criteria would be violated and a
disconnection could occur.
Displaying Measured Values in the Diagram

The measured values can only be displayed in the offline mode.
² Move the mouse pointer over the diagram.
² In the context menu, select Show measure line > <Measured value>
[cvmeashz-160911-02.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-42 Showing a Measuring Line (Horizontal Line)
A horizontal line is shown in the color of the diagram. The topical measured value is displayed at its intersec-
tion with the diagram. In the time line, the date and time of day are shown for the cursor position.
² In the context menu, select Show second cursor.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[cvmeasvl-160911-03.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-43 Showing a Second Cursor (Vertical Line)
A second cursor (gray vertical line) and an additional horizontal measuring line are shown. At the intersection
with the diagram, the difference from the first measured value is displayed. In the time line, the time differ-
ence from the 1first measured value is displayed at the position of the second cursor.
Displaying Average Values of a Diagram

The average value can be generated only for line diagrams.
² Display a curve, for example:
[cvavgohn-200911-09.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-44 Diagram without Smoothing Average-Value Generation
² In the context menu, select Show average value.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[cvavgmit-200911-11.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-45 Diagram with Smoothing Average-Value Generation
The line diagram is displayed smoothed. The name of the measuring point is followed by [Avg] (average).
Hiding the Schematic Display

² Click the X in the upper right of the SIGUARD PDP UI - Map, window to hide the schematic display. The
display of the Chart View window section is enlarged.
You can also drag the Chart View component out of the main window and position and zoom in anywhere on
the desktop.
[sc_chart_view_no_schematic_display, 2, --_--]
Figure 4-46 Chart View, Hidden Schematic Display

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Changing Limiting Values

The limiting values can be shown and edited to the right of the diagram.
² Above the diagram, double-click a measured value to display its limiting values.
² Change a limiting value.
[cvgrenzw-250713-04.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-47 Changed/Configured Limiting Value
The old limiting values are displayed as a tooltip. After changing a limiting value, the background of the
limiting value is displayed in orange.
²
Click the button to save and activate the changed limiting value.
Opening the Limit Editor

²
Open the Limit Editor by clicking the button.
[rgcsem99-160911-45.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-48 Limit Editor
It lists all measured values with the associated limiting values. You can change and enable/disable the limiting
values.
² Enter new limiting values.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Activate the new limiting values with a check.

² Activate the changed limiting values by selecting Save Limits.
The Editor is exited.
Using Predefined Formulas

A number of predefined formulas are available in Formulas. These formulas can be applied to measured
values.
Use predefined formulas as follows:
² Drag and drop the desired formula, for example, ActivePower, in the Chart View window section.
A dialog is displayed in which you have to enter the parameters necessary for the new curve.
[sc_predefined_formula, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-49 Inserting a Predefined Formula
² Enter any name for the new curve in the Measurement name entry field.
² Drag and drop measuring points (voltage phasor and associated current phasor) from the Measurements
window section to the Measurement 1 and Measurement 2 text boxes.
² Enter a decimal value in the Factor entry field.
The curve is multiplied with this value. Typically, this value is 1. When calculating power, this factor can
deviate since it depends on the measurement (phase-to-phase voltage or phase-to-ground voltage).
[sc_parameters_predefined_formula, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-50 Entering Parameters for Formula
If you have entered all the required parameters correctly, the Create button is activated. This button is used to
create the calculated curve.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Confirm the entries with the ENTER key.

² Click Create to display the diagram showing the calculated curve. If you click Cancel, your changes will
not be saved.
The diagram with the calculated curve is displayed.
[rgcsem99-251010-48.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-51 Diagram with Calculated Curve
NOTE
i If the time range is set to 10 minutes or greater, the curve represents only an approximation. It reproduces
only the last value of the time range, because not every extreme value needed for the calculation is avail-
able.
This only applies to equations created on a temporary basis in the UI. If such equations are saved perma-
nently in SIGUARD PDP, an exact calculation and storage of all values is performed from this time point
forward.
4.11.4 Saving and Loading Time Ranges
4.11.4.1 Saving in the Permanent Archive

In SIGUARD PDP UI, measured data are continuously saved in a ring archive. If the ring archive is full, earlier
measured data will be overwritten and will be lost. To prevent this, time ranges and the measured values
contained in them are saved in a permanent archive at your request or in an automatically triggered (ATT)
way. You can generate such permanent archives manually via the user interface or they are loaded and are
available for evaluation purposes.
You can find more information on the ATT in chapter 3.5.1 Function Description .
Additionally, time ranges from the ring archive or from the permanent archive and the measured values
contained therein can be saved in CSV (comma separated value) or COMTRADE format. This format can, for
example, be opened in a spreadsheet and further processed.
Loading such a CSV or COMTRADE file is not possible here. However, a file export can also be performed from
a permanent archive.
You can find more information on saving in CSV or COMTRADE format in chapter 4.11.4.3 Exporting Data.
Proceed as follows:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Saving Time Ranges Permanently
NOTE
permitted:

² Select the menu File > Save time range....

The Save time range dialog is displayed.
[sctssave-260712-31.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-52 Save Time Range Dialog
The beginning point in time Locator left and the final point in time Locator right are automatically displayed
in the dialog and cannot be changed.
Changing the time range is possible only in the PSS Curve window section.
² In the Time range entry field, enter the name of the time range (for example, TimeRange_01) that you
want to save.
NOTE
i The name given must be unique. You cannot save 2 time ranges under the same name.
² Click the Save button to save the time range.

The time range is possibly stored as several files and directories.
NOTE
i Saving can last several minutes even though the window has already been closed. The amount of time
required for saving depends on the amount of the data that must be written in the permanent archive and
on the length of the time range you have selected.
4.11.4.2 Loading Time Ranges

Time ranges can be selected again and are available for evaluation again. They are no longer loaded into the
ring archive.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Loading Time Ranges

² Select the menu File > Load and manage time ranges....
The Load and manage time ranges dialog is displayed.
[sc_load_manage_time_ranges, 2, --_--]
Figure 4-53 Load and Manage Time Ranges Dialog
The automatically generated and manually created time ranges are displayed.
All available time ranges are displayed with name, start, and end time in a list format. The size of the window
can be changed.
NOTE
i The time range is not displayed in the list, until the export from the ring archive into the permanent archive
has finished completely.
An archive displays only the status at the respective point in time.
NOTE
i You can sort the list entries in ascending or descending order by name, start and end time by clicking the
column heading. A small arrow in the column heading shows the sort order.
² Select the time range that you would like to view/evaluate.

² To confirm the selection, click Load.
- or -
² Double-click the desired time range.
- or -
² Right-click the desired time range and select Load time range from the context menu.
The loaded time range with the corresponding measured values is displayed in the PSS curve window section.
You can leave this display from the permanent archive by selecting new data from the permanent archive or
by displaying current values in online mode.
NOTE
i To prevent the storage capacity on the hard disk from becoming insufficient, Siemens recommends
checking the available storage capacity regularly and deleting data no longer needed.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Rename Time Range
NOTE
permitted:

² Select the time range that you want to rename.
² Click the Rename button.
- or -
² Right-click the selected time range and select the Rename time range context menu.
- or -
² Press the F2 function key.
- or -
² Click the selected time range a 2nd time.
² Enter the desired name.
NOTE
i If there is already a time range with the same name, the new name is not accepted. The old name is
displayed.
If working in 2 UIs and wanting to rename a time range in the 1st UI and then save a time range in the 2nd
UI with the same name, an error message appears.
If the connection to the server is interrupted or the list cannot be loaded, a message is likewise received.
4.11.4.3 Exporting Data

The following export formats are available for further processing of data outside of SIGUARD PDP:
• CSV file
• COMTRADE-ASCII format according to IEC 60255-24:2013 (IEEE Std C37.111-2013)
• COMTRADE float32 format according to IEC 60255-24:2013 (IEEE Std C37.111-2013)
Special Features of the COMTRADE Export

For a selected time range, you can export the data of individual or all channels in COMTRADE format (in
accordance with the current standard IEC 60255-24 or C37.111, Edition 2.0, 2013).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
For each reporting rate, 2 files are written to the export directory:
• 1 configuration file (file extension: .cfg)
• 1 data file (file extension: .dat)

The complete file name corresponds to the convention also selected for the CSV export and contains the date
and time of the start of the data in addition to the name given to the file. The data itself can be written either
in readable ASCII format or alternatively in binary format (float32, that is, floating-point numbers with a
length of 4 bytes each).
In addition to the channel data, the SIGUARD events for the selected time range are also exported. Since the
COMTRADE format is not suitable for this export, the events are written as a CSV file analogous to the CSV
export. If the export is interrupted, for example, as a result of a master-standby switchover, the data previ-
ously written as a file is deleted in a similar way to the CSV export and then re-exported after the interruption
has ended.
NOTE
i If the selection of the time range is too small, channel data cannot be exported for specific reporting rates.
For example, if the selected time range is between 2 consecutive full minute values, then no statistical data
(reporting rate -60, corresponding to a cycle time of 60 s) is exported. In this case, the COMTRADE export –
in contrast to the CSV export – generates neither a configuration file nor a data file in COMTRADE format
for the associated reporting rate.
NOTE
i Not all parameters within the respective COMTRADE configuration file can be set. For example, for phasor
and analog channels the transmission ratio of the transducer is not known. Moreover, if phasor measure-
ment data is used, the information about the respective electrical phase is missing. For digital channels, the
information about the normal state is not available. In the convention selected here, this value is set to 0.
NOTE
i Since the data to be exported are always stamped with UTC, the COMTRADE configuration file specifies the
start time as well as the trigger time, which is identical in UTC, according to the convention selected here.
The time code is therefore specified in the COMTRADE configuration file with 0. Since the PMU data of a
file can have been recorded within different time zones, the local code in the COMTRADE configuration file
is also specified with 0. This means that formally UTC applies to all local time zones.
Exporting All Data
NOTE
permitted:


E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Select the menu File > Export all and select the desired file format.
Depending on the selected file format, the following dialogs appear:
[sc_Export_all_CSV, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-54 Dialog Export all to CSV
[sc_Export_all_COMTRADE_ASCII, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-55 Dialog Export all to COMTRADE ASCII
[sc_Export_all_COMTRADE_float32, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-56 Dialog Export all to COMTRADE float32
The beginning point in time Locator left and the final point in time Locator right are automatically displayed
in the dialog and cannot be changed.
Changing the time range is possible only in the PSS Curve window section.
² Enter the file name in the input field File name.
² Click the Save button to save the time range in the selected format.
Measured values are saved in the desired format. COMTRADE does not support alarms or events. As a
result, alarms and events are always exported to a CSV file, regardless of the desired file format.
More information on exporting can be found in 4.9 Reporting.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
The export directory is on the server and was defined during the installation. From a UI, this directory can be
accessed. Go to the path \\<servername>\SIGUARD_Export to copy or further process the export files from
there.
NOTE
i Saving can last several minutes even though the window has already been closed. The amount of time
required for saving depends on the amount of the data that must be written in the permanent archive and
on the length of the time range that has been selected.
Exporting Chart View Channels Data

The data of the chart view channels are saved in the export file.
Alarms and events are also saved.
More information on exporting can be found in 4.9 Reporting.
NOTE
² Select the menu File > Export chart data and select the desired file format.
Depending on the selected file format, the following dialogs appear:
[sc_Export_chart_data_CSV, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-57 Dialog Export Chart Data to CSV
[sc_Export_chart_data_COMTRADE_ASCII, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-58 Dialog Export Chart Data to COMTRADE ASCII

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_Export_chart_data_COMTRADE_float32, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-59 Dialog Export Chart Data to COMTRADE float32
² Enter the file name in the input field File name.

² To save the time range in the selected format, click Save.
NOTE
i If a reference phasor is active, then the channel data of this phasor are also saved.
If a formula is created as a chart, the channel data of the individual parameters of this formula are also
saved. The data of the PSS curve are also saved.
Opening the Directory

You can open the directory where the files are stored.
² Select the Show export directory from the File menu.
The directory opens, for example <Drive>\Siemens Energy\SIGUARD PDP\Export.
If this path does not exist on your computer, an error message stating that the path cannot be accessed will
appear.
4.11.5 Deleting Time Ranges
Time ranges and the measured values contained in them, which were saved in the permanent archive can be
deleted selectively.
NOTE
permitted:


E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Deleting a Time Range

[sc_load_manage_time_ranges, 2, --_--]
Figure 4-60 Load and Manage Time Ranges Dialog
All available time ranges are displayed with name, start, and end time in a list format. The size of the window
can be changed.
² Select one or more time ranges that you would like to delete.
If you click Cancel, your selection will not be saved.
NOTE
i Deleted time ranges cannot be restored.
² Confirm your selection by clicking the Delete button.

- or -
² Press the Del key.
- or -
² Right-click the selected time range and select Delete time range in the context menu.
A safety prompt appears. If confirming the safety prompt, the time range with the corresponding measured
values is deleted and the dialog is closed.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
4.12 Conclusion from the Analysis
4.12 Conclusion from the Analysis

The analysis of the sample event leads to the following result:
• The PSS curve is in the red range due to exceeded limiting values for current, see Figure 4-30.
• The cause for the exceedance is the periodic connection of a high load.
• The periodic connection of a high load causes power oscillations that are well damped, see Figure 4-51.
• The limiting value for current is exceeded briefly, see Figure 4-39.
• To avoid undesired protection trips, the protection settings of the line must be checked.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
5 Communication
5.1 PMU 178

5.2 PDC 190
5.3 E-Mail Notification Service (ENS) 199
5.4 ICCP 203
5.5 IEC 60870-5-104 209
5.6 OPC 214

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
5.1 PMU
The PMU communication subsystem performs all required functions for communication between SIGUARD
PDP and the connected PMUs. Another PDC from which data are expected is treated as a PMU. The IEEE
C37.118-2011 communication protocol is used. Communication can be carried out via TCP/IP or UDP/IP over 1
or 2 communication paths.
The communication functions PMU and PDC support the following special communication modes:
• unidirectional:
The transmitter of the data stream cannot receive commands. The data stream is automatically started by
the transmitter. To be able to interpret the data stream, the transmitter must send a Configuration Frame
on a cyclic basis.
• multicast:
The transmitter of the data stream sends the data frames in a Multicast group. Possible receivers of the
data stream register to this Multicast group and receive the data starting at this time. SIGUARD PDP sends
Command Frames via unicast directly to a PMU or to a PDC. Configuration Frames requested in this way
can be received both via multicast or via unicast.
[dw_siguardpdp_multicast, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-1 Communication with Data Stream and Multicast

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
The following communication types are available:
• TCP:
Data and commands are transmitted using the TCP protocol.
• UDP:
Data and commands are transmitted using the UDP protocol.
• UDP unidirectional:
To use this communication type, the PMU must transmit a Configuration Frame between the Data Frames
on a cyclic basis. SIGUARD PDP does not send commands to the PMU. The PMU gets online when the first
Configuration Frame is received.
• UDP multicast:
The Data Frames from the PMU are transmitted in a Multicast group. SIGUARD PDP registers to the Multi-
cast group and thus receives the Data Frames. Command Frames are transmitted directly to the PMU.
Configuration Frames, as a response to the corresponding Command Frame, can be received via the
Multicast Group and or directly while Data Frames are always expected in the Multicast group. Stop
Command Frames are not transmitted.
• UDP unidirectional multicast:

The Data Frames from the PMU are transmitted in a Multicast group. SIGUARD PDP registers to the Multi-
cast Group and thus receives the Data Frames. The PMU must transmit a Configuration Frame between
the Data Frames on a cyclic basis, also to the Multicast group. SIGUARD PDP does not send commands to
the PMU.
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled to set parameters for a PMU:
• An existing project or a new project must be open.
• The tab PMU must be selected.
Tab PMU is Selected

When selecting the tab PMU, the layout for adding and editing physical and logical PMUs is shown.
[sc_PMU_all, 5, --_--]
Figure 5-2 Selected Tab PMU

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
• Available PMUs
In the left window section, the overview of all available PMUs in the directory All PMUs is shown.
When opening the PMU tab, the All PMUs directory is selected. However, for large projects with many
PMUs and many measured values, the 1st PMU is selected.
• Selected PMU details

In the middle window section, the parameter data of the selected PMU is shown. If no PMU is created or
selected, this window section is colored gray.
In the upper part, the parameters of the selected PMU are displayed. In the lower part, the measuring
points created for this PMU are displayed in the form of a table.
Functions
The following functions can be performed when the tab PMU is selected:
Table 5-1 Functions for PMUs
Element Explanation
Click the New button in order to create a new physical PMU in the
selected directory All PMUs or a logical PMU within a selected physical
PMU.
Click the Duplicate button in order to duplicate either a selected phys-
ical PMU with the same name and subordinated logical PMUs or a
selected logical PMU.
Click the Delete button in order to delete either a selected logical PMU
or a selected physical PMU with all subordinated, logical PMUs.
Parameters of a Physical PMU or PDCs

As seen from the SIGUARD PDP, setting the parameters of a physical PMU is almost identical to setting the
parameters of a PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator).
If selecting a physical PMU in the window section Available PMUs, the following right window section is
displayed.
[sc_PMU_par, 5, --_--]
Figure 5-3 Parameters of a Physical PMU
In the following table, the setting options of the properties/parameters of a physical PMU are explained.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
Table 5-2 Parameters of a Physical PMU
Element Explanation
PMU device name The name of the physical PMU can be selected freely,
for example: Munich
Note
Ensure that all names in the overall system are unique, so that messages
in the event and alarm list can be assigned uniquely. The uniqueness is
checked in the framework of the validation.
PMU device ID ID of the connected physical PMU
The data must be inherited from the configuration of the physical PMU.
for example: 30
Synchronizable Activate this check box if this PMU is a SIGUARD PDP system with at least
version V05.20 and you want to use the archive synchronization func-
tionality.
For more information, refer to Archive Synchronization, Page 190.
PDC connection with data Mark this check box if you are entering the data for a PDC that will be
exchange used for data exchange.
Reporting rate Number of telegrams (frames) per second that are transferred from the
physical PMU.
This value must agree with the configuration of the physical PMU.
You can set the value via a list box from 1 frames/second up to
240 frames/second.
If the value does not comply with the configuration of the physical PMU,
an error message appears and no transfer takes place.
Timeout Time in seconds how long a delayed telegram from the PMU was waited
for.
If you are configuring the connection to a PDC, use a time-out value that
is greater than the greatest time-out value in the other PDC. Otherwise
the connection will be disconnected too early.
Communication type You may select the following communication types from a list box:
• TCP
• UDP
• UDP multicast
• UDP unidirectional
• UDP unidirectional multicast
The communication type TCP is the default.
If you have configured the communication type UDP multicast or UDP
unidirectional multicast , you must configure the Remote IP address
or the Multicast IP address . An error message will appear during the
validation if the necessary addresses are not configured.
Local UDP port Port on the local PDP Server used when setting the communication type
UDP or UDP unidirectional for receiving data frames from the PMU.
Remote IP address A IP address of the physical PMU connected in the LAN A network. The
check box is activated as the default.
This value must agree with the configuration of the physical PMU, for
example: 192.168.0.109.
Remote IP address B IP address of the physical PMU connected in the LAN B network (only
needs to be configured with LAN redundancy). If the check box is acti-
vated, the 2nd IP address can be configured.
This value must agree with the configuration of the physical PMU, for
example: 192.168.1.109.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
Element Explanation
Remote port Port of the physical PMU
This value must agree with the configuration of the physical PMU.
Recommended setting:
• 4712 for TCP

• 4713 for UDP
Range of values: 1025 to 49 151
Second remote port Port of the physical PMU
This value is used if the device cannot communicate redundantly over
exactly 1 port. In this case, the 2nd server uses the 2nd port configured
here.
Request PMU config frame To facilitate setting the parameters of a PMU, it is possible to read the
PMU configuration if there is a LAN/WAN connection and to display the
configuration in an embedded PMU config frame window.
To do this, enter at least the following parameters and click the Request
PMU config frame button:
• PMU device ID
• Remote IP address A
• Communication type:
– TCP
– UDP
• Remote port
Querying the configuration frame for the communication types UDP
unidirectional , UDP multicast, and UDP unidirectional multicast is
not possible.
In the PMU config frame window, individual or all measured values can
be selected via the Select all button and copied into the PMU configura-
tion via the Take over button.
The embedded PMU config frame window is closed using the Hide
PMU config frame button.
Multicast IP address A IP address of the Multicast group in the LAN A network.
This address is needed when the communication type UDP multicast or
UDP unidirectional multicast is set.
Range of values: 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255
Multicast IP address B IP address of the Multicast group in the LAN B network (only needs to be
configured with LAN redundancy). If the check box is activated, the 2nd
IP address can be configured.
This address is needed when the communication type UDP multicast or
UDP unidirectional multicast is set.
Multicast port Port of the Multicast group. This is used on the local PDP Server for
receiving the data frames from the Multicast group with a communica-
tion type of UDP multicast or UDP unidirectional multicast
Recommended setting: 4713

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
[sc_PMU_config_frame, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-4 Setting the Parameters of the PMU with an Embedded Window (Configuration Data)
More information can be found in the bibliography at /1/ SIMEAS R-PMU, Digital Fault Recorder, Manual
or /2/ SIPROTEC, High Voltage Bay Controller 6MD85/86, manual.
NOTE
i In case of missing or erroneous entry, the entry field is highlighted in red.
[dwpdcpmu-060812-01.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-5 PDC Connection with Data Exchange between PDC A and PDC B
If you want to connect 2 PDCs as shown in the preceding figure, you must mark the PDC connection with
data exchange check box in the receiving PDC so that the data exchange is not mutually blocked. This rule
applies in a similar manner for connecting PDC B to PDC A.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
Parameters of a Logical PMU

If selecting a logical PMU in the window section Available PMUs, the following right window section is
displayed.
[sc_PMU_logic, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-6 Parameters of a Logical PMU
The setting options of the properties/parameters of a logical PMU are explained in the following table.
Table 5-3 Parameters of a Logical PMU
Element Explanation
Logical PMU name The name of the logical PMU can be selected freely,
for example: Munich DAU1
Note
Ensure that all names in the overall system are unique, so that messages
in the event and alarm list can be assigned uniquely. The uniqueness is
checked in the framework of the validation.
Logical PMU ID ID of the connected logical PMU
for example: 31
NOTE
i The remaining parameter fields are not active (colored gray).
Editing Measuring Points
• Adding measuring points

In order to add a measuring point, click in the last line of the column Name. Enter a name for the new
measuring point. An additional blank line is inserted, by which a further measuring point can be defined.
The name PMU device of the physical PMU and the Logical PMU ID are automatically entered. Enter the
parameters Index, Type, and Unit according to the configuration of the physical PMU. Add the further
parameters.
• Copying/inserting measuring points

To copy measuring points, select one or several measuring points (lines) in the table and select the
context menu Copy.
To insert copied measuring points, select the line where you want to insert the points and select the
context menu Paste. As many lines, including the marked line, are always overwritten, as lines are
inserted.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
• Column sequence
You can move individual columns by dragging the heading to another place in the table, and thereby
change the column sequence.
• Delete measuring points

To delete measuring points, select one or several measuring points (lines) in the table and press <Del>
key.
NOTE
i Ensure that you create precisely those measuring points that the PMUs to be connected actually use in later
operation. A comparison with the parameter data of the PMUs is recommended.
Parameters of a Measuring Point

For every logical PMU, the created measuring points are displayed in window section under the PMU parame-
ters in the form of a table. They can be edited only with a selected logical PMU.
[sc_PMU_measuring_points, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-7 Parameters of the Measuring Points
In the following table, the setting options of the properties/parameters of the measuring points are explained.
Table 5-4 Parameters of the Measuring Points
Element Explanation
Name The name of a measuring point can be selected freely,
for example: MchP/400/NbgH/U1
PMU device name Name of the physical PMU
The data are automatically inherited,
for example: Munich
Log PMU ID ID of the logical PMU
The data are automatically inherited,
for example: 31
Index The index is a pointer to the protocol transferred from the PMU in order
to identify the corresponding measurement.
for example: 7

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
Element Explanation
Type The measurement type can be entered via a list box.
Available types are: Phasor, Analog or Digital.
Unit The unit of the measured value that is measured at this measuring point
can be entered according to measurement type via a list box,
for example: A for current, V for voltage, W for active power, VA for
apparent power, VAr for reactive power, Degree for the phase angle, Hz
for frequency, or Hz/s for the frequency changing rate.
NOTE
i The Archive check box that existed in this editor up to version V3.01 no longer exists since the values for
rapid display of longer time ranges are always archived.
Index
The IEEE C37.118 protocol is structured so that the measuring points within one logical PMU are transferred in
a specific order:
• All phasor values (Data class: Phasor)
• Frequency (Data class: Analog)
• Frequency changing rate (Data class: Analog)
• All other analog values (Data class: Analog)
• All digital values (Data class: Digital)

The index you must specify here during parameterization consecutively numbers the measuring points sepa-
rately for each data class.
Example for a Logical PMU SIMEAS R-PMU, Type VCDAU
Measuring Point, Logical Name, Example Type Unit Index

PMU
V1 MchP/400/NbgH/U1 Phasor V 1
V4 Phasor V 4
C1 MchP/400/NbgH/I1 Phasor A 5
C4 Phasor A 8
Frequency MchP/400/NbgH/f Analog Hz 1
Frequency changing rate MchP/400/NbgH/df/dt Analog Hz/s 2
Digital value 1 MchP/400/NbgH/SST1 Digital 1
Digital value 2 MchP/400/NbgH/SST2 Digital 2
...
Digital value 16 Digital 16

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
Not all measuring points offered by the PMU need to be applied to the SIGUARD PDP. One configuration for
such a PMU can look like this:
[sc_PMU_configuration, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-8 Configuration of a PMU
NOTE
i The Phasor Index 4 and Phasor Index 8 measuring points supplied by the PMU are not applied to the
SIGUARD PDP.
NOTE
i If you specify an index here that was not supplied by the PMU, there will be a configuration error in the
runtime system. This configuration error is displayed in the Communication UI as config fail (see PMU
Munich in the following figure). Consequently, all values of this physical PMU are not available.
[sc_CommUI_Server_Started, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-9 Configuration Errors in the Communication UI
Only one logical PMU is used in a SIPROTEC 5-PMU regardless of the number of printed circuit board assem-
blies.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
The order of the individual measuring points in the Phasor data class is defined as follows:
• Voltage a, 3-phase (Va1, Va2, Va3)
• Voltage b, 3-phase (Vb1, Vb2, Vb3)
• Current c, 3-phase (Ic1, Ic2, Ic3)
• Current d, 3-phase (Id1, Id2, Id3)
• Voltage e, 1-phase (Ve)
• Voltage f, 1-phase (Vf)
• Current g, 1-phase (Ig)
• Current h, 1-phase (Ih)

If you selected transmission by positive-sequence system only, only one phasor is sent for the 3-phase
voltages and currents; otherwise, 3 phasors are sent.
More information can be found on this in the PMU Manual /2/ SIPROTEC, High Voltage Bay Controller
6MD85/86, manual in chapter Setting the PMU parameters with DIGSI.
NOTE
i If a communication-network connection to the PMU exists, you can retrieve the configuration frame and
display it in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
Saving a Project
The data of a project should be saved after every change or reconfiguration. You can even save a project when
the validation is still not successful.
NOTE
i After saving a project, newly created measuring points are entered into the list Available measurements;
deleted measuring points are also deleted from this list.
More information can be found on saving projects in chapter 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
Validation
Topical errors can be displayed in tooltips during entry. A complete validation takes place via the menu Project
> Validate or via the icon . If error messages are displayed, re-edit the configuration. If the validation is
free of errors, the project can be activated for the runtime process.
You can find more information on validating a project in chapter 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
Activating a Project
After successful validation, an opened and saved project can be made available to the runtime process. This is
done via the Project > Activate menu or the icon .

More information on activating a project can be found in 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
5.1.3 Using Configuration Frame 3
In the C37.118-2005 protocol, the length of a channel name is limited to 16 characters. To overcome this
constraint, starting with version V4.00, SIGUARD PDP Engineer also uses Configuration Frame 3 as long as it is
supported by PMU or the PDC.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.1 PMU
If the PDC Server in SIGUARD PDP is requested to deliver a Configuration Frame 3, the SIGUARD-internal name
is transferred instead of the short name defined in SIGUARD PDP Engineer (max. 16 characters) for Configura-
tion Frame 1 or 2.
Thus, it is possible to avoid effort as well as potential error sources when entering again the channel names on
higher levels.
For the Service Class (SVC_CLASS), you only have to define in SIGUARD PDP Engineer whether you are trans-
ferring the data as Class M (Measurement) or P (Protection).
The following fields in Configuration Frame 3 are not used and are all initialized with 0:
• G_PMU_ID
• PMU_LAT
• PMU_LON
• PMU_ELEV
• WINDOW
• GRP_DLY
The field PHSCALE is only partially filled out because of missing information.
• Bytes 1 and 2: always 0
• Byte 3:
If calculation results of the equations Positive sequence, Negative sequence, or Zero sequence are to
be forwarded, the corresponding bits are set correctly.
In all other cases, Phase A is specified.
• Byte 4: not used
• Bytes 5 to 8: always 1
• Bytes 9 to 12: always 0

You can find further information in the standard IEEE Standard for Synchrophasor Data Transfer for Power
Systems - IEEE Std C37.118.2™-2011 (Revision of IEEE Std C37.118™-2005) in table 10.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.2 PDC
5.2 PDC
The PDC server subsystem performs all required functions for communication between SIGUARD PDP and
other PDCs if data from SIGUARD PDP must be forwarded. The IEEE C37.118-2011 communication protocol is
used. Communication can be carried out via TCP/IP or UDP/IP over 1 or 2 communication paths.
[Dw PDC redundancy one WAN, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-10 Examples of Non-Redundant Communication
[Dw PDC redundancy two WANs, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-11 Examples of Redundant Communication
You can find information on the special communication functionsunidirectional and multicast in chapter
Archive Synchronization
If the connection between PDP and PDC was interrupted, the PDP can request the missing data from the PDC
server subsystem after the connection has recovered.
This function requires SIGUARD PDP of at least version V05.20 on both sides.
For this, you must activate the Archive synchronization option in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer the PMU Editor.
If you have activated synchronization, more archive-synchronization data can be requested in addition to the
existing data stream.
If SIGUARD PDP is used as a data concentrator without an archive function, then the archive synchronization is
not possible. You can set the archive function in the Administrator-UI. You can find more information in the

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.2 PDC
SIGUARD PDP Administrator Manual in chapter Specify the Communication and Archive Configuration with
the Administrator UI.
NOTICE
Possible loss of communication
Non-observance of the safety instructions can lead to a communication failure of the online data
stream and to additional synchronization jobs.
² Select the Max synchronization rate parameter carefully. In case of synchronization, the available
bandwidth of the communication network must not be exceeded.
² Example: A PDC substation with 10 PMUs and a reporting rate: 50 1/s requires approx. 500 kbit/s. With
a communication network with a bandwidth of 1 Mbit/s, the Max synchronization rate may be a
maximum of 30 1/s to keep some spare capacity.
Simplified Configuration of the PDC Server

If you use SIGUARD PDP as a data concentrator, a common application of the PDC server is to forward all data
provided by PMU devices to a data stream.
In order to simplify the configuration of the PDC server in this case, the Take over PMU configuration func-
tion is available.
This function configures the PDC in such a way that all data from PMU devices are forwarded as a logical PMU.
You must configure a PDC server for each reporting rate you have configured for PMU devices. If you want to
concentrate more than 100 PMU devices, you must set up one PDC server per 100 started PMU devices.
Example
The following number of devices is available:
• 120 PMU units with 10 Hz
• 10 PMU units with 50 Hz

In this case, 3 PDC servers are required: 2 for 10 Hz and 1 for 50 Hz
If you configure additional PMU devices in the PMU Editor, new logical PMUs along with all channels are added
if you apply the Take over PMU configuration function again.
If you add more channels to existing PMU devices in the PMU Editor, the new channels are added as new
channels in the corresponding logical PMU if you apply the Take over PMU configuration function again.
You can apply the Take over PMU configuration function only if a valid configuration is available.
If you add more channels to a logical PMU in the PDC server manually, for example, calculation results, these
channels are deleted again if you apply the Take over PMU configuration function.
If you want to forward calculation results, you must configure a separate logical PMU in the PDC server. This
logical PMU is not deleted by the Take over PMU configuration function.
The function of the PDC server is the following:

SIGUARD PDC sends data in the IEEE C37.118 protocol to other PDCs. In this way, the data from SIGUARD PDP
can also be used by other PDCs.
Select the Communication tab.
To configure the communication interfaces, select the C37.118 folder in the tree structure on the left and
assign a name for all PDCs.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.2 PDC
[sc_PDC_name, 3, --_--]
Figure 5-12 Name for Folder C37.118
Next, the C37.118 folder is opened and an interface is selected.
Functions
The following functions can be performed when the folder C37.118 is selected.
Table 5-5 Functions for PDC Servers and Logical PMUs
Element Explanation
Click the New button to create a new PDC server
or
to set up a subordinate logical PMU for a selected PDC server.
Click the Duplicate button to set up a duplicate with the same name
and subordinate logical PMUs for a selected PDC server
or
to duplicate a selected logical PMU.
Click the Delete button to delete a selected PDC server with the subordi-
nate logical PMUs
or
to delete a selected logical PMU.
Table 5-6 Parameters for PDC Servers and Logical PMUs
Element Explanation
Name for all PDC servers Name for alarm and event messages that affect all PDC servers
Take over PMU configuration Clicking this button synchronizes the PMU devices defined in the PMU
editor and their channels with the existing PDC servers. For more infor-
mation, refer to chapter 5.2.1 Function Description.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.2 PDC
Parameters of the PDC Server

If selecting a PDC server in the Available communication interfaces window section, the following middle
window section appears.
[sc_parameters_PDC_server, 4, --_--]
Figure 5-13 Parameters of the PDC Server
The setting options of the properties/parameters of a PDC server are explained in the following table.
Table 5-7 Parameters of the PDC Server
Element Explanation
PDC server name You can freely select the name of the PDC server. This name is entered
as PDC Server Name in the protocol IEEE C37.118 and is agreed with
the communication partner. It does not need to be unique (compare
Internal name),
for example: SIGUARD
PDC server ID ID of the connected PDC server
This ID is entered as PDCID in the protocol IEEE C37.118 and is agreed
with the communication partner.
for example: 111
Internal name This name must be unique and may not occur with other objects (for
example, measured value, calculation, etc.).
This name is used for error messages in the alarm and event lists,
among others
Reporting rate Number of telegrams that can be transferred per second by the PDC
server.
The Reporting rate must be agreed upon with the communication
partner.
You can set the value via a list box from 1 frames/second up to
240 frames/second.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.2 PDC
Element Explanation
Communication type You must select one of the following communication types from a list
box:
• TCP
• UDP
• UDP multicast:
In addition, the Multicast IP address and Multicast port must be
configured
• UDP unidirectional:
Furthermore, the Send config frame periodicity, Remote IP
address, and Remote port must be configured.
• UDP unidirectional multicast:
Furthermore, the Send config frame periodicity, Multicast IP
address, and Multicast port must be configured.
The communication type none has been selected as the default but
must be changed.
Send config frame periodicity Periodicity at which the configuration frame is to be transmitted on a
cyclic basis (in s). This value is only used for communication types UDP
unidirectional and UDP unidirectional multicast.
Local IP address A IP address at which the PDC server can be reached from the outside. This
Local IP address B IP address helps to define the LAN interface to be used for communica-
tion to the outside. If there is only one interface, then enter the IP
address of the server, for example, 55.26.213.186.
You can edit the IP address only if the check box is selected.
Use channel name for configura- You can select whether the short text (config 2) or the long text
tion frame 3 (config 3) is transmitted. If you select this parameter, the short designa-
tion Channel Name is transmitted.
This parameter is not available for the communication types UDP unidir-
ectional and UDP unidirectional multicast.
Local port Port number used by the PDC server, for example: 4712.
Recommended range of values: 1025 to 49 151
Remote IP address A IP address of the PDC of the communication partner in the LAN A or LAN
Remote IP address B B network, for example, 172.58.222.63 or 172.58.223.63
Remote port Port number of the PDC of the communication partner in the LAN A or
LAN B network, for example, 4712
Multicast IP address A IP address of the Multicast Group in the LAN A or LAN B network, for
Multicast IP address B example, 230.58.222.63 or 230.58.223.63
Multicast port Port number of the PDC of the communication partner in the LAN A or
LAN B network, for example, 4712

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.2 PDC
Element Explanation
Archive synchronization Activate this check box if data are to be sent to a SIGUARD PDP system
that supports archive synchronization (V05.20 and higher) and you
want to use this function.
Max synchronization rate Using this parameter, you control how fast the data are to be sent to
archive synchronization.
Keep in mind that the communication network must have additional
bandwidth available for archive synchronization.
This list box will only be active if you have activated the Archive
synchronization check box.
Range of values: 1 to 600
NOTE
i The combination of IP address and port must always be unique. If the combination is not unique, a warning
is displayed.
NOTE
i For PMU-PDC and PDC-PDC communication, Siemens recommends use of port 4712 for TCP and port 4713
for UDP.
The server IP address with port 4712 or 4713 is used typically for communication from the PMU to your
PDC. If you wish to send data to an additional PDC, you must use either 1 or 2 additional LAN ports or
assign additional IP addresses to the existing LAN ports in order to have a unique combination of IP address
and port that is not being used by another program, for example, PDP, for this communication. Use, for
example, the following command: netsh interface ipv4 add address "LAN A" 172.17.200.11 255.255.0.0.
If necessary, contact your system administrator.
NOTE
i If there is no entry, the entry field is highlighted in red. Enter a value.
Parameters of a Logical PMU

If selecting a logical PMU in the Available communication interfaces window section, the following middle
window section is displayed.
[sc_PDC_logical_PMU_measuring_channels, 3, --_--]
Figure 5-14 Parameters of a Logical PMU and the Measuring Channels
The setting options of the properties/parameters of a logical PMU are explained in the following table.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.2 PDC
Table 5-8 Parameters of a Logical PMU
Element Explanation
Station name You can freely select the name of a logical PMU. This name is entered as
PDC Station Name in the protocol IEEE C37.118 and is agreed with the
communication partner. It does not need to be unique (in contrast to
Internal name).
for example: SIGUARD PMU1
Logical PMU ID ID of the connected logical PMU.
This ID is entered as PMUID in the protocol IEEE C37.118 and is agreed
with the communication partner.
for example: 112
Nominal frequency Rated frequency of the station
for example: 50 Hz
Service class If all the measured values of this logical PMU are measured by instru-
ment transformers, select M here. Otherwise, select P.
NOTE
i The remaining parameter fields are not active (colored gray), because they cannot be configured here.
Editing Measuring Channels
• Adding a measuring channel

In order to add a measuring channel, add a measuring point from Available measurements in the last
line of the column Measurement. An additional blank row is inserted, by which a further measuring
channel can be defined. Enter a name for the measuring channel.
The measuring channel is automatically attached to the proper point, for example, a phasor is attached to
phasors.
The measuring points are always shown in the following order:
– Phasors
– Frequencies
– Frequency changes
You can move the measuring channel using the context menu: Right-click the measuring channel and
select Up or Down in the context menu.
If you have moved the measuring channels, it can be that the order given above is no longer correct. As a
result, the project may no longer be valid. Pay attention to the proper order of the measuring channels.
• Changing a measuring channel

To change a measuring channel, drag a measuring point from Available measurements to an existing
measuring point in the Measurement column. The measuring point is overwritten.
• Deleting a measuring channel

To delete measuring channels, select the measuring channel (row) in the table and press the <Del>key or
select the Delete context menu.
• Changing column widths

All columns can be changed widthwise by dragging the column edge.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.2 PDC
NOTE
i Note that application data may have different reporting rates. All configured measuring channels are
forwarded only when the channel with the lowest reporting rate provides data. Therefore, Siemens recom-
mends setting up different PDC servers for data of different reporting rates. Statistical values for the
communication cannot be forwarded meaningfully, since these variables are calculated only once per
minute.
NOTE
i If dragging a measuring point from Available measurements to an existing measuring point in the Meas-
urement column, the existing measuring point is overwritten.
The table of the measuring channels must be sorted according to column Meas. Mode, in order to ensure a
correct transfer in accordance with the protocol IEEE C37.118.
To ensure this, selected lines can be moved upward or downward via the context menu.
For further details, see protocol IEEE C37.118.
Parameters of a Measuring Channel

For every PMU server, the relevant measuring channels set up are displayed in the form of a table in the
middle window section under the parameters of the PMU server and the selected logical PMU.
The setting options of the properties/parameters of the measuring channels are explained in the following
table.
Table 5-9 Parameters of a Measuring Channel
Element Explanation
Channel name You can freely select the name of the measuring channel. Since it is
entered into the protocol IEEE C37.118, the Channel name may not
exceed a length of 16 characters,
for example: MchP/400/NbgH/U1
Measurement Definition of the measuring point from Available measurements. The
values measured here are transferred via this measuring channel.
Meas. Mode Definition of the method of measurement for analog values except
frequency and frequency changing rate.
The following parameters are displayed on the basis of the measuring
point:
• S (Single point)
Measurement of the instantaneous value
• R (RMS = root mean square)
Measurement of the quadratic mean value (RMS value)
• P (peak)
Measurement of the maximum value
If the forwarded analog value corresponds to the raw value of a PMU,
set the value as specified by the PMU. If the forwarded analog value
comes from a SIGUARD PDP calculation, set the value according to the
calculation. Select, for example, the setting R for an active power calcu-
lation.
For values calculated in the SIGUARD PDP, the P setting is not correct.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.2 PDC
Element Explanation
Subst Magn Definition of a substitute value, which is transferred in place of the orig-
inal measured value.
If no value is entered, the original measured value is transferred.
Subst Angle Definition of a substitute value, which is transferred in place of the orig-
inal measured value.
An entry is allowed only in the case of phasors. If no value is entered,
the original measured value is transferred.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.3 E-Mail Notification Service (ENS)
Using the ENS (Email Notification Service) function, you can set up e-mails to be sent if certain SIGUARD
events occur.
In SIGUARD PDP Engineer, you can define certain events for which e-mails are sent, for example: PMU/
Communication error or Channel/Limit High 2 violated. These event types can be compiled into groups
called notification types. You can activate or deactivate these notification types in SIGUARD PDP Engineer. In
addition, you can activate or deactivate the individual event types of a selected notification type. Lastly, you
can also set the entire ENS application to inactive.
In SIGUARD PDP Engineer, you define the time which an event must last before an e-mail is sent. You define
the OR operation of all events that belong to one notification type. If an event or its OR operation lasts longer
than this defined time, an e-mail is sent. If the OR operation of all events that belong to one notification type
disappears (disappearing event) before the set time has elapsed, no e-mail is sent. If, afterwards, an event
belonging to this notification type reappears, the time count begins again.
OR Operation of Events
The 1st PMU reports a communication error. This message disappears before the time has expired. While the
message from the 1st PMU is still active, a 2nd PMU also reports a communication error. This 2nd message
also represents a time less than the set time, but the time span between the occurrence of the 1st event and
the disappearance of the 2nd event is greater than the set time. In this case, an e-mail is sent, because the
events are linked via an OR operation.
[dw_ENS OR connection events, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-15 OR Operation of Events
OR Operation of Event Types

A PMU reports a communication error. This message disappears before the time has expired. While the
message from the PMU is still active, a Channel/Limit High 2 violated exceedance is reported. This 2nd
message also represents a time less than the set time, but the time span between the occurrence of the 1st
event and the disappearance of the 2nd event is greater than the set time. In this case, an e-mail is sent,
because the event types are linked via an OR operation.
[dw_ENS OR connection event types, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-16 OR Operation of Event Types

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
The e-mail to be sent contains in its subject line information specific to each notification type concerning the
cause of the notification. You can edit the e-mail's subject line in SIGUARD PDP Engineer. Siemens recom-
mends defining subject lines as informative as possible.
The message text first indicates all pending alarms at the time of the triggering event minus the pre-trigger
time. This is followed by all events between the beginning of the pre-trigger time and the end of the follow-up
time. Each alarm and event contains the following information:
• Time (in Universal Time Coordinated, UTC)
• Description of the event or alarm
• Direction (rising edge or falling edge)
• If applicable, additional information

The period itself is defined by the values of the pre-trigger time and follow-up time that can be set in the
SIGUARD PDP Engineer compared to the time of the triggering event.
If an event lasts for a longer time, for example, if the PMU is down for a longer period of time, you do not
receive another e-mail. The system does not return to the initial state until a disappearing event comes for all
existing events. As of this point in time, the system can respond to newly appearing events.
NOTE
i If you have updated the configuration file and performed activation, then the application checks how long
the existing events have already existed. Then the e-mails regarding these events are sent, regardless of
whether a corresponding e-mail was already sent prior to activation.
Temporary Storage of Information

If e-mails cannot be sent, for example: because the mail server is not reachable, then this information is
temporarily stored so that the ENS application can send them as soon as the problem has been fixed.
The program keeps running, even if the mail server is not available. This results in the recipients potentially
receiving several e-mails of the same notification type – also containing identical information in the subject
line – once the mail server is available again. Correct assignment of the e-mails to the corresponding trig-
gering procedures is guaranteed by the original send time stated in the e-mail text.
NOTE
i The mail server is not part of the scope of delivery of the SIGUARD PDP.
Protocol
The SMTP protocol (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is used to send e-mails.
Authentication and Encryption

If encryption is possible on the server end, then the system attempts, depending on the receiving end, to
perform an encrypted transmission.
If the program logs on to the server internally, the user name and password are transferred. To do so, enter
the user name and password in SIGUARD PDP Engineer. The password is encrypted and stored in the configu-
ration file.
You can use TLS (Transport Layer Security) or SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) as encryption techniques.
Enter the port needed for connecting to the server in SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
Open SIGUARD PDP Engineer and open a project. Select the Communication tab.
Select the Email notification folder in the tree structure on the left.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
[sc_ENS all _2014-08-19, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-17 Selected Communication Tab
Functions
For a selected folder Email notification, the following functions can be performed.
Table 5-10 Functions for ENS
Element Explanation
Click New to create a configuration scheme for a new Email notification.
Click Duplicate to duplicate the configuration of an existing Email notification for

further processing.
Click Delete to delete a highlighted configuration.
Parameters of the ENS Communication

If you select an e-mail notification in the Available communication window section, the following middle
window section Email notification is displayed.
[sc_ENS parameters_2014-08-19, 3, --_--]
Figure 5-18 Parameters of an ENS
The setting options for the ENS communication parameters are explained in the following table.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
Table 5-11 Parameters of the ENS Communication
Element Explanation
Server parameters
SNMP server Server address
Address from Freely definable, transmitting e-mail address
User name Freely definable user name
Password Freely definable password
If you click the ... button, you can define the password. Enter the password 2 x.
You may use only ASCII characters in your password.
Notification
Name The name of the Email notification application is entered, changed, or displayed
in this field for an existing application.
Email subject Subject line of the e-mail to be sent
As the e-mail to be sent contains no content, Siemens recommends defining the
subject line as meaningful as possible.
Email addresses In this field, you enter the e-mail addresses of the recipients. The e-mail
addresses have to be separated by a semicolon.
Delay time In this field, you define the time in s for which an event must have lasted before
an e-mail is sent.
Lead time In this field, you determine the pre-trigger time in seconds from when events
should be recorded.
Follow-up time In this field, you determine the follow-up time in seconds until when events
should be recorded.
Event types Drag into this section the event types for which an e-mail has to be sent.
You can switch the email notification to active at all levels.
Event Types for Email Notification

Move the event types intended to trigger an e-mail notification from the list of available event types into this
section with drag and drop.
You can drag the individual event types or also groups of event types.
You can also sort this list of event types. If you want to cancel the sort function, right-click the element in the
list and select the Cancel sort context menu. The original sequence is then displayed again.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.4 ICCP
5.4 ICCP
The ICCP subsystem performs all required functions for communication to a SCADA/EMS/DMS system. Only
data can be forwarded to the SCADA/EMS/DMS system. Communication takes place via TCP/IP over 1 or 2
communication paths. Spontaneous events and measured values can be transmitted cyclically at a rate of 1
value per second.
The Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol, also designated IEC 60870-6/TASE.2, is a communication
protocol for the exchange of data between network control centers. SIGUARD PDP is able to send data to one
or several control centers with this communication protocol.
NOTE
i SIGUARD PDP cannot receive any data via ICCP.

You need a corresponding SIGUARD PDP license for the ICCP to function. The existence of this license is not

To configure communication protocols, select the ICCP folder in the tree structure on the left and assign a
name for the ICCP folder:
[sc_ICCP_name, 3, --_--]
Figure 5-19 Name for the ICCP Folder Is Assigned
Next, the ICCP folder is opened and a protocol is selected.
Functions
The following functions can be performed when the folder ICCP is selected.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.4 ICCP
Table 5-12 Functions for ICCP
Element Explanation
Click the New button to create a new protocol with the appropriate subdirecto-
ries Measurements and Group indication.
Click the Duplicate button to create a duplicate with a new name for the selected
protocol.
Click the Del button to delete a selected protocol with the associated subdirecto-
ries.
ICCP Communication Parameters

If you have selected an ICCP_Main in the window section Available communication interfaces, the following
middle window section ICCP is displayed.
[sc_ICCP_communication_parameters, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-20 ICCP Communication Parameters
The setting options for the properties/ICCP communication parameters are explained in the following table.
Table 5-13 ICCP Communication Parameters
Element Explanation
Local Settings
Name Definition of the ICCP interface name.
initiator If the check box is selected, then SIGUARD PDP is the initiator of the communi-
cation.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.4 ICCP
Element Explanation
Local domain name Definition of the local domain name
Local AR name Local application reference name
Remote Settings
Remote domain name Domain name of the partner
1st remote AR name 1st application reference name of the partner
Up to 4 names (corresponding to 4 computers at the partner) are supported.
2nd remote AR name 2nd Application reference name of the partner
3rd remote AR name 3rd Application reference name of the partner
4th remote AR name 4th Application reference name of the partner
Version
ICCP version The ICCP version with which this protocol is supposed to be compatible is set
in this list box.
The versions 1996-08 and 2000-08 are supported.
Bilateral table ID Identification of the bilateral table
In this table, the information exchanged via the protocol is listed and assigned
an agreed name. Various versions of this table should show different identifi-
cations.
Heartbeat
Link heartbeat If the check box is selected, then test telegrams are exchanged for verification
of the functionality of the communication link.
Link heartbeat interval Interval between 2 verification telegrams
(msec)
Data Package Parameters
Max MMS PDU size (bytes) Maximum size of the PDU for MMS reports in bytes.
The current PDU size is determined between the communicating peers and
can be below the maximum size. The PDU size determined is used to divide
large data volumes into smaller units for delivery.
Client response timeout (s) When the ICCP Client receives a select or operate request from a monitoring
unit and sends the request to the ICCP Server, this timer starts. The ICCP Server
must confirm the request before this time runs out.
Association request timeout After this time elapses, the time for a connection attempt has been exceeded.
(s) This means that, if your system initializes the connection, then it sends a
message to the peer in order to establish a connection. If no answer arrives
within the time set under Association Request Timeout, then your system
interprets it as a failed connection establishment. The system then waits for
the time set under Association Request Retry, before it tries again to estab-
lish a connection. This is only significant if the parameter Association Initiator
is set to Yes.
Association request retry (s) This is the number in seconds that must elapse between connection attempts.
This means that, after a failed connection attempt, the system may not start a
new connection attempt until this time has elapsed. See also Association
Request Timeout. This is significant only if the parameter Association
Initiator is set to Yes.
Server Settings

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.4 ICCP
Element Explanation
Server response timeout (s) This time-out value is used only by the ICCP server. The ICCP Client sends a
select or operate request. The ICCP Server receives this request and sends it to
a supervisory control. The counter does not start until afterward.
The supervisory control must confirm the request within this time. For
problem-free operation with ICCP, Siemens recommends setting a value below
the Client Response Timeout for this value.
Server reply timeout (s) If a message has been sent to a server (peer), time-out does not occur until
this number of seconds has passed. When this time runs out and the peer does
not answer, then the communication with the remote peer is interrupted.
Shortest periodic interval (s) For an ICCP peer, periodic data transmissions in intervals that were previously
determined remotely could be necessary. This parameter is the shortest time
interval, in seconds, that your system accepts. This parameter prevents incor-
rectly configured remote ICCP peers from overwhelming your system with
data requests.
Example: You have set this value, for example, to 30 s. A client creates a
transmission group having a periodicity of 10 s. ICCP recognizes this shortfall,
creates a protocol entry, and changes the periodicity of the transmission group
to 30 s automatically.
ICCP Measurements
If you have selected the subdirectory Measurements of an ICCP protocol, the following middle window
section ICCP Measurements is displayed.
[sc_ICCP_measurements, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-21 ICCP Measurements
For the definition of the measuring points, defaults must be selected so that only these specific parameters
are accepted.
The window section Default settings for drag and drop operation contains several check boxes with which it
is possible to select which information is transferred over ICCP via drag and drop.
If you have selected the check box Post event in the Limit editor, SIGUARD PDP generates the incoming
message Digital is set if the digital value changes from 0 to 1 and an outgoing message if the digital value
changes from 1 to 0.
Next, the measuring points are dragged into the middle window section via drag and drop. For every meas-
uring point, a row is created in accordance with the defaults (parameters).
The setting options for the parameters of the measuring points are explained in the following table.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.4 ICCP
Table 5-14 ICCP Parameters for the Measuring Points
Element Explanation
Server objects Here, measured values from the Available measurements are saved via drag
and drop. Note that, depending on the selection of the Default settings for drag
and drop operations, several server objects can be created with one drag and
drop operation.
invert If the check box is selected, then digital values of 1 are transmitted as 0 and vice
versa.
Slope Values from SIGUARD PDP can be adapted in their size with a slope. For example,
the voltages in SIGUARD PDP are processed generally in V. If the destination
system is supposed to receive the values in kV, then enter a slope of 0.001 here.
Offset Using the offset, values from SIGUARD PDP can be adapted to the destination
system by adding the offset to the output value.
Global If the check box is selected, the destination system can distribute this data via
ICCP.
If the check box is not selected, then transmission through the destination system
is not allowed.
There are 2 options for modifying the events:
• Globally changing the parameters according to the selection in the lower part of the middle window
section
• Manually changing the parameters that cannot be changed globally

For this, a row of the measuring point is selected. The default parameters are now also selected in the lower
part of the window section. Remove the selection, for example, for Max1. The corresponding lines for this
parameter are deleted.
NOTE
forwarded at the full second and with the values available for this time stamp. Statistical values for the
communication cannot be forwarded meaningfully, since they are calculated only once per minute.
ICCP Groupindication
With this editor, you can communicate monitoring notifications created through SIGUARD PDP, for example, a
communication error to a PMU or an error in the archive, to a SCADA/EMS/DMS system and display them there.
You can select individual messages or entire groups out of a large number of SIGUARD PDP messages and
assign them to one or several ICCP events.
If you have selected the subdirectory Groupindication of an ICCP protocol, the following middle window
section ICCP Groupindication is displayed.
[sc_ICCP_groupindication1, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-22 ICCP Groupindication

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.4 ICCP
Select different events and drag them into the center window section via drag and drop.
[sc_ICCP_groupindication2, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-23 ICCP Groupindication with Assigned Events
Individual events can be assigned to an existing group (insertion in a gray field under the object name).
Cumulative events are created after insertion as a group with a new object name (insertion in a white field in
the row Object name).
The setting options for the parameters of the events are explained in the following table.
Table 5-15 ICCP Parameter for Group Indication
Element Explanation
Object name Name of the ICCP event object that the ICCP partner can use to identify this
object.
Incidence key The SIGUARD PDP events selected for transmission to the ICCP destination system
Element type are identified by Incidence Key and Element Type. Several SIGUARD PDP events
can be linked to an ICCP event.
ID ID is the name of the object that is the reason for the event. You see the same
name on the corresponding pages of the SIGUARD PDP Engineer on which you
parameterize the object. If there is no object that is associated with this event,
you have no ID.
invert This check box controls whether a 0 or a 1 is transmitted with SIGUARD PDP
events.
If the check box is selected, then a 0 is transmitted by SIGUARD when an event
occurs.
Global If the check box is selected, the destination system can distribute this data via
ICCP.
If the check box is not selected, then transmission through the destination system
is not allowed.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.5 IEC 60870-5-104
5.5 IEC 60870-5-104
The IEC 60870-5-104 subsystem provides the option of sending selected measured values, calculations, and
messages to a SCADA/EMS/DMS system via the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. Communication takes place via
TCP/IP. Measured values and calculation results can be transmitted cyclically with a settable rate and sponta-
neous events can also be transmitted.
During configuration in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer, you can configure up to 4 interfaces, 2 per computer.
You can find more information in the standard IEC 60870-5-104.
With the IEC 60870-5-104 subsystem, you can establish connections with multiple control centers. Every
control-center connection can use up to 4 network interfaces. You can distribute the data to be transmitted
across multiple LRTUs (logical remote terminal units).
Quality Descriptors
Selected SIGUARD PDP quality codes are converted into corresponding IEC 60870-5-104 quality descriptors
according to the following table:
Table 5-16 Mapping of the SIGUARD PDP Quality Codes to Quality Descriptors in IEC 60870-5-104
SIGUARD PDP Quality Codes from Table 4-7 IEC 60870-5-104 Status
Abbreviation Meaning Value Time
COE PMU communication error INVALID VALID
CTO Collector time-out INVALID VALID
DAM PMU data missing INVALID VALID
ADI Application data invalid INVALID VALID
ERR PMU error NOT TOPICAL VALID
DAI PMU data invalid NOT TOPICAL VALID
NSY PMU not synchronized NOT TOPICAL INVALID
- All OK VALID VALID

To configure communication interfaces, select the folder IEC 60870-5-104 in the tree structure on the left and
assign a name for all IEC 60870-5-104.
NOTE
i You need a corresponding SIGUARD PDP license for the IEC 60870-5-104 to function. The availability of this
license is not queried in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.5 IEC 60870-5-104
[sc_IEC104_start_page, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-24 Name for Folder IEC 60870-5-104
Next, the IEC 60870-5-104 folder is opened and an interface is selected.
Functions
The following functions can be performed when the folder IEC 60870-5-104 is selected.
Table 5-17 Functions for IEC 60870-5-104
Element Explanation
Click the New button to create a new control-center connection or to create a
subordinate LRTU for a selected control-center connection.
Click the Duplicate button to create a duplicate with the same name and subordi-
nate LRTUs for a selected control-center connection or to duplicate a selected
LRTU.
Click the Delete button to delete a selected control-center connection with the
subordinate LRTUs or to delete a selected LRTU.
Parameters of the Control-Center Connection

Once you have selected a control center, the following middle window section appears:
[sc_IEC104_ControlCenter, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-25 IEC 60870-5-104 Control-Center Parameters
The setting options of the properties/parameters of a IEC 60870-5-104 are explained in the following table.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.5 IEC 60870-5-104
Table 5-18 Control-Center Parameters
Element Explanation
Remote control center You can freely select the name of a control center.
name
Time zone Time zone of the control center
Select the time zone of the control center from the list box, for example, Europe/
Berlin
Cycle period (s) Periodic data transmissions in intervals may be required for an IEC104 peer. You
set these data transmissions remotely. This parameter is the shortest time interval
in seconds that the system accepts. This parameter prevents incorrectly config-
ured remote IEC104 peers from overwhelming the system with data requests.
Admissible range of values: 1 s to 60 s
Interfaces
Active If you select the check box, this IP interface is switched to active.
Name Name of the interface
You can freely select the name of the interface.
As the name of the interface is used in the SIGUARD Events and in the Communi-
cation UI, Siemens recommends selecting a name that refers to the associated
client.
IP address IP address of the network interface used for communication with the control
center
Port The port number of the TCP protocol to be used for this communication
Standard: 2404
NOTE
i The following control-center parameters are default settings and cannot be changed:
• Test-frame period
Default setting: 20 s
• Time-out response
• Time-out acknowledgment
• Transmit window
Default setting: 12 telegrams
• Reception window
Default setting: 8 telegrams
NOTE
i If you parameterize a system with redundant PDP servers, you must parameterize at least 2 interfaces.
Enter an IP address of the 1st server for the 1st interface and an IP address of the 2nd server for the 2nd
interface.
Parameters of an LRTU
If you have selected an LRTU in the window section Available communication, the following middle window
section is displayed.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.5 IEC 60870-5-104
[sc_IEC104_LRTU, 2, --_--]
Figure 5-26 Parameters of an LRTU
The setting options of the properties/parameters of an LRTU are explained in the following table.
Table 5-19 Parameters of an LRTU
Element Explanation
ASDU address Address of the Application Service Data Unit (Common Address)
For the definition of the measuring points, default settings must be selected so that only these specific param-
eters are accepted.
The window section Default settings for drag and drop operation contains several check boxes with which it
is possible to select which information is transferred over IEC 60870-5-104 via drag and drop.
Next, the measuring points are dragged into the middle window section via drag and drop. For every meas-
uring point, a row is created in accordance with the default settings (parameters).
The setting options for the parameters of the measuring points are explained in the following table.
Table 5-20 IEC 60870-5-104 Parameters of the Measuring Points
Element Explanation
Telegram address Information Object Address
Range of values: 1 to 16 777 215
invert If the check box is selected, then digital values of 1 are transmitted as 0 and vice
versa.
Slope Values from SIGUARD PDP can be adapted in their size with a slope. For example,
the voltages in SIGUARD PDP are processed generally in V. If the destination
system is supposed to receive the values in kV, then enter a slope of 0.001 here.
Offset Using the offset, values from SIGUARD PDP can be adapted to the destination
system by adding the offset to the output value.
These data (measurements) are transmitted with the IEC 60870-5-104 type identification 36 (M_ME_TF_1)
and the cause of transmission 3 (spontaneous).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.5 IEC 60870-5-104
NOTE
forwarded according to the configured Cycle period with the values available for this time stamp. If you
want to forward statistical values for communication purposes, Siemens recommends setting up a separate
connection with a Cycle period = 60 seconds.
NOTE
i The remaining parameter fields are not active (colored gray), because they cannot be configured here.
Parameters of the Indications

When you have selected an Indications folder in the Available communication window section, the
following middle window section is displayed.
[sc_IEC104_Indications, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-27 Parameters of the Indications
The setting options of the properties/parameters of the indications are explained in the following table.
Table 5-21 Parameters of an LRTU
Element Explanation
Telegram address Information Object Address
Range of values: 1 to 16 777 215
Invert If the check box is selected, then digital values of 1 are transmitted as 0 and vice
versa.
Gi relevant Information objects with this marker are sent with a general interrogation (Gi).
These indications are transmitted with the IEC 60870-5-104 type identification 30 (M_SP_TB_1) and with the
cause of transmission 3 (spontaneous).
You can find further information on saving, validating, and activating the project in chapter 6.1.4 Shared
Functions.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.6 OPC
5.6 OPC
The OPC subsystem provides all required functions for communication in accordance with OPC-DA (Data
Access). SIGUARD PDP includes an OPC server. The data model of the OPC server is updated with new values
cyclically once per second.
SIGUARD PDP includes an OPC server that allows access to the data from SIGUARD with the Data Access Profile
version 3.
NOTE
i You need a corresponding SIGUARD PDP license for the OPC to function. The availability of this license is
not queried in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.

To configure the measuring points for the OPC server, select the OPC folder in the tree structure on the left.
[sc_OPC_measurements_configuration, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-28 Configuration of OPC Measuring Points
To configure the measuring points for the OPC server, the OPC folder is selected and a new OPC server is
created.
You can find further information in the Administrator Manual in chapter OCP.
Functions
The following functions can be performed when the folder OPC is selected.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.6 OPC
Table 5-22 Functions for OPC Servers
Element Explanation
Click the New button to define a new OPC server and assign measuring points to
the OPC server.
Click the Del button to delete an existing OPC server.
OPC Parameters
If you have created a new OPC server, the following middle window section OPC is displayed.
[sc_OPC_defining_server, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-29 Define OPC Server
The setting options for the OPC server are explained in the following table.
Table 5-23 OPC Communication Parameters
Element Explanation
Server name Definition of the OPC server name.
Port Port to which the OPC server is connected
Measurement Using drag and drop, the measured values from the Available measurements
list that are intended to be relayed through the SIGUARD PDP OPC server can be
inserted here.
invert This setting is active only in the case of digital measured values.
If the check box is selected, then the display of the binary signal is inverted, that
is, a 1 is transmitted as 0 and vice versa.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Communication
5.6 OPC
[sc_OPC_server_assigned_measurements, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-30 OPC Server with Assigned Measuring Points
You can find further information on saving, validating, and activating the project in chapter 6.1.4 Shared
Functions.
NOTE
forwarded at the full second and with the values available for this time stamp. Statistical values for the
communication cannot be forwarded meaningfully, since they are calculated only once per minute.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6 SIGUARD PDP Engineer
6.1 Basic Functions 218

6.2 Applications 255
6.3 Communication 257
6.4 Working with SIGUARD PDP Engineer 259

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
6.1 Basic Functions
6.1.1 Overview
Application of SIGUARD PDP Engineer

SIGUARD PDP Engineer is the parameterizing and settings tool for SIGUARD PDP. You can set up and change
the function of SIGUARD PDP with it. The following tabs are available for editing:
• PMU
Add, duplicate, change, or delete physical and logical PMUs.
Adding or changing measuring points for existing or new PMUs.
• Calculation
Add, duplicate, change, or delete calculated values.
Assign parameters of calculated values with factor and formula that uses the input measured values from
the measured and calculated values.
• Limit Editor
Configuring Limiting Values/Threshold Values of the Measuring Points
• Graphics
Add, duplicate, or delete elements for graphical representation of power-supply systems.
Using the functions of the single-line diagram
• Application
Adding, duplicating, deleting and parameterization of various applications:
– Voltage-Stability Curve (VSC)
– Island State Detection (ISD) in networks
– Swing recognition in networks (Power Swing Recognition PSR)
• Communication
Adding, duplication, deletion and parameterization of communication via various interfaces:
– C37.118
Creation of PDC server and logical PMUs and configuration of the measuring channels
– ICCP
Parameterization of the communication parameters, assignment and parameterization of the meas-
ured values to be transmitted and assignment of events to be transmitted.
– IEC 60870-5-104
Parameterization of the communication parameters, definition of the LRTU through assignment and
parameterization of the measured values to be transmitted and assignment of events to be trans-
mitted.
– OPC
Parameterization of the OPC servers and assignment and parameterization of the measuring points.
• Triggers
Adding, changing, and deleting conditions to generate an automatic event-driven permanent archive
(ATT) and changing the pre-trigger time, the post-trigger time, and the retrigger time.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
NOTE
i Fields may be dimmed for the following reasons:
• The field cannot be edited.
• The field makes no sense for configuration, for example:

If you have selected the communication type TCP, the field Local UDP port is displayed, but cannot be
set.
Installation
The tool SIGUARD PDP Engineer is available on DVD and is installed on the target computer together with
SIGUARD PDP UI (see Administrator Manual, System installation).
Program Window
The main window of SIGUARD PDP Engineer is composed of the following window sections:
[scengwin-corrected, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-1 Schematic Representation of the Program Window of SIGUARD PDP Engineer
NOTE
i You can change the individual windows sections in the direction of the arrow by dragging the boundary
line.
• Menu
You call up general functions via the menu (see chapter 6.1.2 Menu).
• Toolbar
You call up functions that can be used within a project via the toolbar (see chapter 6.1.3 Toolbar).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
• Tabs
Via the tabs, you select various configuration and parameterizing options.
Depending on the selected tab, corresponding window sections and functions are available to you (see
chapter 5.1.2 Parameters and Setting Notes to 5.6.2 Parameters and Setting Notes).
• Overview
In the left window section, the tree structure of the existing elements for the selected tab are shown.
• Parameters/Properties
In the middle window section, the parameters and/or properties of the selected element are shown.
• Lists
In the right window section, lists are shown depending on the selected tab (for example, measured and
calculated values or element types).
• Error messages after Validation

In the lower window section Project validation - Errors, error messages are shown based on the valida-
tion, for example:
– Info (tab name): Description
– Error (tab name): Error description
For further information, see chapter 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
• Topical error messages

For every element that is marked with a warning symbol, a quick info (tooltip) can be shown. Point to
the element with the cursor. The quick info contains the element type and a description of the error that
has appeared.
For further information, see chapter 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
6.1.2 Menu
Each menu consists of the following parts:
Menu Group Project

Within the menu group Project, you can call up the following functions:
• Project > New...

Creates a new project.
• Project > Open...

Opens an existing project.
You can open only one project at a time. If you want to open another project or want to create a new
one, you must close the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
If one of the redundant servers is not available, configuration changes are not possible with the SIGUARD
PDP Engineer. Thus, it is possible to keep consistency for the configuration of both servers. If, neverthe-
less, you need to change the configuration before the server is available again, remove the server from
the system (refer to Administrator Guide, chapter "Removing a Defective Server from a System".
• Project > Save

Saves changes to an existing project.
• Project > Validate

Tests a project for validation and shows information or any errors in the window section Project valida-
tion Errors.
• Project > Print...

Prints all data of a project on your printer (also in PDF format).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
• Project > Activate

Activates a project that has been edited, checked for validation, and saved for the runtime process.
• Project > Exit

Closes the open project.
If the project has not been saved yet, a security question is asked whether it should be saved prior to
closing.
NOTE
i The following settings in SIGUARD PDP can be edited both in the SIGUARD PDP UI and in the SIGUARD PDP
Engineer:
• Limiting values (in the Limit editor tab)
• Definition of calculations and formulas (in the Calculation tab)

It is ensured that while editing in SIGUARD PDP Engineer, no changes can be made in the SIGUARD PDP UI.
This measure starts when the project is opened and is retained until the changes are successfully activated
or editing is canceled.
Menu Group Edit

Within the menu group Edit, you can call up the following functions, which are also implemented in the
toolbar:
• Edit > Undo

Reverses an executed function.
• Edit > Redo

Restores a reversed function.
NOTE
i You can reverse up to 500 changes.
Menu Group Help

Within the menu group Help, you can call up the following functions:
• Help > Engineer...

Calls up the help function of SIGUARD PDP UI and SIGUARD PDP Engineer
• Help > About...

Gives information about the program version of SIGUARD PDP Engineer
6.1.3 Toolbar
Buttons
Executes the following functions via the buttons on the toolbar:
Table 6-1 Toolbar of SIGUARD PDP Engineer
Element Explanation
Click the button New, in order to create a new project.
Click the button Open, in order to open an existing project.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Element Explanation
Click the button Save, in order to save changes to an existing project.
Click the button Validate, in order to check the opened project for vali-
dation.
Click the button Undo, in order to reverse an executed function.
Click the button Redo, in order to restore a reversed function.
Click the button Print in order to print all data from a project.
Click the button Activate, in order to activate a project that has been
edited, checked for validation, and saved for the runtime process.
6.1.4 Shared Functions
For all editors in SIGUARD PDP Engineer, the following shared functions are available.
Inputs
An entry field is highlighted in red if an entry is required. Entries are transferred into the configuration by:
• Pressing the <Enter> key
• Pressing the <Tab> key
• Moving the cursor out of the entry field

Entries of decimal numbers are only valid if they are entered with a period (for example, 0.01).
Saving a Project
The data of a project should be saved after every change or reconfiguration (local copy of the configuration).
A configuration that is not yet valid can be saved but not activated.
Validation
> Validate or via the corresponding icon . If error messages are displayed, re-edit the configuration. If the
validation is free of errors, the project can be activated for the runtime process.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
• Topical error messages

For every element that is marked with a warning symbol , a quick info (tooltip) can be shown. Point to
the element with the cursor. The quick info contains the element type and a description of the error that
has appeared.
[scfkttip-160713-12.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-2 Topical Errors in Tooltip

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
• Error messages after Validation

In the lower window section Project validation - Errors, error messages are shown based on the valida-
tion, for example:
– Error (tab name): Error description
– Warning (tab name): Description
– Info (tab name): Description
[scerrval-160713-05.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-3 Example of an Error Message

This window section can be hidden so that only the header is visible. The number of error messages is
displayed in the header. If error messages occur, a red warning symbol also appears in the header (for
example, in the tree structure of Calculated measurements), in order to clarify which configuration triggered
the error message.
After processing the error messages and revalidation, no more messages should be displayed. The project is
valid.
Activation of a Project
After successful validation, an opened and saved project can be made available to the runtime process. This
takes place via the menu Project > Activate or via the corresponding icon . At the same time, the config-
uration is written to a defined position in SIGUARD PDP UI or an existing configuration with the local copy from
SIGUARD PDP Engineer is overwritten. SIGUARD PDP UI must then be restarted.
6.1.5 Copying Elements in SIGUARD PDP Engineer
You can copy functions, for example a PMU, into the editors of the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
This copy function is available in the following editors:
• PMU
• Calculated measurements
• Graphics
In this editor, you can copy the functions only via the Copy icon.
• Application
• Communication
Copying is not possible in the Limit Editor and Triggers editors.
² To copy the function, right-click the function you want to copy and select Copy in the context menu.
- or -
²
Select the function that you want to copy and click the icon.
A copy of the selected function is created in the tree in the left section of the window. This copy is given the
name extension -Copy.
If you create another copy of the original, then this copy is assigned a number in the name extension, -Copy
(2). This number rises for each additional copy.
If you create a copy of a copy, then it receives the name extension -Copy-Copy.
6.1.6 PMU Editor
You can find further information on configuration in chapter 5.1.2 Parameters and Setting Notes .
6.1.7 Calculated Measurements
NOTE
i Using the calculated values and additional functions of SIGUARD PDP, for example, IEC 60870-5-104
communication, it is possible to actively change the state of the energy supply system. For example, this
can come about by opening a circuit breaker when the phase-angle difference between 2 substations
exceeds a specified limiting value.
Siemens has checked the operation of the individual equations. You, as the user, are responsible for veri-
fying the combination of equations to a system-protection mechanism in the form of a point-to-point test.
The following requirements must be satisfied for creating and editing calculated values:
• A project must be created or an existing project must be opened.
• The tab Calculation must be selected.
Tab Calculation Is Selected

When you have selected the tab Calculation, the layout for adding and editing calculated values is displayed.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
[sc_calcuation_with_filter-270214.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-4 Selected Tab Calculation
• Calculated measurements
In the left window section, the overview of all existing calculated values is shown in the directory All
calculated objects.
• Selected calculated measurements

In the middle window section, the parameter data (Name, Factor and Formula) of a selected calculated
value are displayed.
• Available measurements
In the right window section, all available values Available measurements are displayed with name, type,
and unit, which are used for the input measurand of the formula.
NOTE


E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
NOTE
• *
• ?
Functions
The following functions can be executed via buttons in the tree view when the tab Calculation and marked
element are selected.
Table 6-2 Functions for Calculated Values
Element Explanation
Click the Create a new calculation button in order to create a new calculated
value in the marked directory All calculated objects.
Click the Duplicate a selected calculation button in order to duplicate a marked
calculated value for further editing.
Click the Delete the selected calculation button or press the key Delete in order
to delete a marked calculated value.
Parameters of a Calculated Value

When you have selected a calculated value in the window section Calculated measurements, the following
middle window section is displayed.
[sccalpar-100713-32.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-5 Parameters of a Calculated Value
A calculated value consists of the Name, which is made up of the Factor and the Formula.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
In the following table, the setting options of the properties/parameters of the calculated values are explained.
Table 6-3 Parameters of a Calculated Value
Element Explanation
Name In this field the name of the calculated value is entered, changed, or displayed in
the case of an existing value. The name can be selected freely.
If no entry takes place, a name is automatically assigned.
Factor Multipliers for calculated values
Only numerical entries with a period in the place of the comma are valid.
Formula You can select various formula functions. For this, corresponding input measur-
ands Input measurements are necessary, which can be defined via measured
and calculated values.
Input measurements Input measurand for the calculation that is assumed from the measured and
calculated values Available measurements.
You can also enter constants for specific formulas.
NOTE
NOTE
i To increase the query quality, all values are archived starting with SIGUARD PDP V3.10.
NOTE
i To ensure data consistency, you can enter and change the name and the factor for calculating the power
margin only in the Application tab.
You cannot edit the calculations for determining the power margin in the Calculation tab.
Define Calculated Measurements

If a newly created calculated value is not yet defined, for example, if no formula is stored, the list box is unde-
fined.
Define a formula with the corresponding input measurands. The type of the calculated value is determined
from the 1st input measurand (phasor, analog, or digital), and furnished with the corresponding unit in the
overview, if the formula allows variable input measurands. Other formulas require input measurands of a
precisely defined type.
Defining Formulas
The following formula functions are available.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Table 6-4 Overview of the Formulas for a Calculated Value
Element Formula Explanation Available in

the SIGUARD
PDP UI
Active power (6 P = Re{V1*conj(I1)} + Calculation of the active power with 6 X
inputs) Re{V2*conj(I2)} + input measurands
Re{V3*conj(I3)}
Active power P = Re{(bb1*V1 + bb2*V2 Calculation of the active power, based on X
(substation usage) + bb3*V3) *conj(I)} the busbar voltages (V1 to V3) and the
current in the bay (i) while considering the
position of the busbar disconnector (bb1
to bb3)
Active power (2 P = Re{V*conj(I)} Calculation of the active power with 2 X
inputs) input measurands
Add 2 analogs x=a+b Addition of 2 analog values X
Add 2 phasors X=A+B Addition of 2 phasors (2 voltages or 2 X
currents, respectively)
Angle difference x = deg(A) - deg(B) Calculation of the phase angle between 2 X
between 2 phasors phasors
Apparent power (6 S = IV1*conj(I1)I + Calculation of apparent power with 6 input X
inputs) IV2*conj(I2)I + measurands
IV3*conj(I3)I
Apparent power S = I(bb1*V1 + bb2*V2 + Calculation of the apparent power, based X
(substation usage) bb3*V3) *conj(I)I on the busbar voltages (V1 to V3) and the
to bb3)
Apparent power (2 S = IV*conj(I)I Calculation of apparent power with 2 input X
inputs) measurands
Conductance from V G = Re{[(V1*I1 - V2*I2) + Conductance G of a line through measure- X
and I (V1*I2 - V2*I1)] / (V22- ment of the voltage and current at the
V12)} beginning and the end
Conjugate a phasor X = conj(A) Conjugation of a phasor (voltage or X
current)
Divide 2 analogs x = a/b Division of 2 analog values (numbers) X
Logical AND x = AND(a,b) Logical AND relation of 2 digital inputs X
Logical NOT x = NOT(a) Logical inversion of a digital input X
Logical OR x = OR(a,b) Logical OR operation of 2 digital inputs X
Logical XOR x = XOR(a,b) Logical XOR operation of 2 digital inputs X
Multiply 2 analogs X = a*b Multiplication of 2 analog values X
(numbers)
Negative sequence Xneg = (A + a2*B + a*C)/3 Calculation of system components nega- X
tive-sequence system
Positive sequence Xpos = (A + a*B + a2*C)/3 Calculation of system components posi- X
tive-sequence system
Power factor lambda = P/S = Calculation of the power factor from active X
Re{V*conj(I)} / IV*conj(I)I power and apparent power and the input
measurands voltage and current
Reactance from V X = Im{1/Yq} = Im{V12 - Reactance X of a line through voltage and X
and I V22) / (V1*I2 - V2*I1)} current measurement at the beginning
and the end

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions

the SIGUARD
PDP UI
Reactive power (6 Q = Im{V1*conj(I1)} + Calculation of reactive power with 6 input X
inputs) Im{V2*conj(I2)} + measurands
Im{V3*conj(I3)}
Reactive power Q = Im{(bb1*V1 + bb2*V2 Calculation of the apparent power, based X
(substation usage) + bb3*V3) *conj(I)} on the busbar voltages (V1 to V3) and the
to bb3)
Reactive power (2 Q = Im{V*conj(I)} Calculation of reactive power with 2 input X
inputs) measurands
Resistance from V R = Re{1/Yq} = Re{(V12 - Resistance R of a line through measure- X
and I V22) / (V1*I2 - V2*I1)} ment of the voltage and current at the
beginning and the end
Rotate a phasor X = A * Power(e,x) Rotation of a phasor X
Scaling of analog x=m*a+c Scaling of an analog value a with the help X
of a gradient m and a constant summand c
Subtract 2 analogs x=a-b Subtraction of 2 analog values (numbers) X
Subtract 2 phasors X=A-B Subtraction of 2 phasors (2 voltages or 2 X
currents, respectively)
Susceptance from V B = Im{[(V1*I1 - V2*I2) + Susceptance B of a line through measure- X
and I (V1*I2 - V2*I1)] / [V22 - ment of the voltage and current at the
V12)} beginning and the end
Zero sequence Xzero = (A + B + C)/3 Calculation of system components zero- X
sequence system
Rate of change of x = dV/dt Calculation of the rate of change of the -
voltage magnitude voltage magnitude
Rate of change of x = dPhi/dt Calculation of the rate of change of the -
phase-angle differ- phase-angle difference
ence
Combination of x = |V| + c * dV/dt Calculation of the voltage magnitude and -
voltage magnitude the rate of change of the voltage magni-
and rate of change tude
of voltage magni-
tude
Combination of x = f + c * df/dt Calculation of the frequency and the rate -
frequency and rate of change of the frequency
of change of
frequency
Combination of x = Phi + c * dPhi/dt Calculation of the phase-angle difference -
phase-angle differ- and the rate of change of the phase-angle
ence and rate of difference
change of phase-
angle difference
Frequency from x = 50 * (1 + deltaPhi/ Calculation of the frequency from the -
phase-angle differ- 360° * repRate/50) phase-angle differences, fnom = 50 Hz
ence (fnom = 50 Hz)
Frequency from x = 60 * (1 + deltaPhi/ Calculation of the frequency from the -
phase-angle differ- 360° * repRate/60) phase-angle differences, fnom = 60 Hz
ence (fnom = 60 Hz)

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions

the SIGUARD
PDP UI
Drop of analog value x = fct(a, t) Calculation of a drop in an analog value -
within a time More information can be found in
interval 3.7.2 Calculation of the Time Change of
an Analog Value.
Detect ongoing x = fct(da/dt, c, t) Calculation of a continuously increasing -
variation of rate of absolute rate of change in an analog value
change of analog More information can be found in
3.7.3 Calculation of a Continuously
Increasing Absolute Rate of Change in an
Analog Value.
Quotient of magni- X = IAI/IBI Quotient of the magnitude of 2 phasors -
tudes of two phasors
L1 phasor from X1 = (Xpos + Xneg + Calculate the L1 phasors from the -
symmetric compo- Xzero) symmetric components Xpos, Xneg, Xzero.
nents
L2 phasor from X2 = (a**2 * Xpos + a * Calculate the L2 phasors from the -
symmetric compo- Xneg + Xzero) symmetric components Xpos, Xneg, Xzero.
nents
L3 phasor from X3 = (a * Xpos + a**2 * Calculate the L3 phasors from the -
symmetric compo- Xneg + Xzero) symmetric components Xpos, Xneg, Xzero.
nents
Rate of change of X = dI/dt Calculation of the rate of change of the -
current magnitude current magnitude
Logical AND with x= Logical AND operation with 2 invertible -
optional inversion AND(a,b,optInv1,optInv2) digital inputs
optional inversion AND(a,b,c,optInv1,optInv digital inputs
(three inputs) 2,optInv3)
optional inversion AND(a,b,c,d,optInv1,optIn digital inputs
(four inputs) v2,optInv3,optInv4)
optional inversion AND(a,b,c,d,e,optInv1,opt digital inputs
(five inputs) Inv2,optInv3,optInv4,optI
nv5)
Logical OR with x= Logical OR operation with 2 invertible -
optional inversion OR(a,b,optInv1,optInv2) digital inputs
optional inversion OR(a,b,c,optInv1,optInv2, digital inputs
(three inputs) optInv3)
optional inversion OR(a,b,c,d,optInv1,optInv digital inputs
(four inputs) 2,optInv3,optInv4)
optional inversion OR(a,b,c,d,e,optInv1,optI digital inputs
(five inputs) nv2,optInv3,optInv4,optIn
v5)
Flip-flop x = Flipflop(set,reset) Set-reset flip-flop with dominant reset -
input signal.
More information can be found in
3.7.4 Flip-Flop.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions

the SIGUARD
PDP UI
Angle difference x = PADLimit(V1,V2,c,t) Calculation of a digital signal resulting in a -
between 2 voltage value of 1 if the absolute value of the
phasors with limit angle difference between 2 voltage
phasors for a specified time t (in s) is larger
than a threshold value c (in °).
3.7.5 Detecting the Violation of a Voltage-
Angle Difference.
Comparator x = COMP(pos,neg) Comparison of analog values or constants -
If the input signal pos is greater than the
input signal neg, the output value is 1. If
the input signal pos is less than or equal to
the input signal neg, the output value is 0.
Rising edge x = RisingEdge(a) If the input signal a goes from 0 to 1, the -
output signal x is set to 1 for exactly one
cycle. The duration of one cycle is the
reciprocal of the input-signal reporting
rate.
You can create a falling-edge detector by
connecting a NOT function with a rising-
edge detector.
PMU status to digital x = PmuStatusToDigital(a) If the quality information of the analog -
measured value a is good, the output
signal is set to 1. Otherwise, the output
signal is set to 0.
More information on the quality good can
be found in 3.7.5 Detecting the Violation
of a Voltage-Angle Difference.
Absolute value of x = abs(a) Yields the absolute value of the analog -
analog value a.
Absolute value of x = abs(A) Yields the absolute value of the magnitude -
phasor magnitude of the phasor
The magnitude of a phasor is never nega-
tive.
Timer x = Timer(a,pickup- The timer is used to ensure that an input -
Time,dropoutTime) signal is 1 for a set time (pickupTime in
seconds) until the output signal is set to 1.
In addition, the output value is only then
set to 0 after the dropout time (dropout-
Time in seconds) has elapsed, starting with
the falling edge of the input signal.
3.7.6 Timer.
Delayer phasor x = Delayer(t-1) Delay for the calculation -
Delayer analog x = Delayer(t-1) More information can be found in -
Delayer digital x = Delayer(t-1) 3.7.7 Formulas for Generating Closed -
Dependencies (Delayer).
Rate of change of x = da * repRate/50 Calculates the rate of change of an analog -
analog value for one value for one cycle based on the rated
cycle (fnom = 50 Hz) frequency of 50 Hz

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions

the SIGUARD
PDP UI
Rate of change of x = da * repRate/60 Calculates the rate of change of an analog -
analog value for one value for one cycle based on the rated
cycle (fnom = 60 Hz) frequency of 60 Hz
Rising edge timer x = RisingEdgeTimer (a, t) Sets the output signal to 1 for a given time -
period t, after a rising edge has been
detected in the input signal. If a 2nd rising
edge appears during the time period t, no
additional pulse is output.
Time shifter analog x = TimeShifterAnalog To take a previous condition into consider- -
(shift Time) ation, a reference to values from the past
Time shifter digital x = TimeShifterDigital must be possible. Based on the architec- -
(shift Time) ture, a shift of more than 10 s is not
possible.
During system startup, the OUT time data
has a poor quality flag for t seconds since
no valid data is available.
The formulas Frequency from phase-angle difference (fnom = 50 Hz) and Frequency from phase-angle
difference (fnom = 60 Hz) use the current time stamp and a parameterizable number of past time stamps as
operands. You can enter it in SIGUARD PDP in a text field. However, you do not enter the number of time
stamps, just the duration in seconds. The number of time stamps is then calculated from the duration and the
reporting rate of the operand.
You can enter a maximum 10 s as a time duration.
For implausible values, the SIGUARD PDP Engineer reacts as follows:
• Example 1:
10 Hz operand = 100 ms
Duration entered: 0.55 s
Result: 550 ms
550/100 = 5.5
In this case, the number is rounded, this means 5 time stamps are used.
• Example 2:
10 Hz operand = 100 ms
Duration entered: 0.05 s
Result: 50 ms
50/100 = 0.5
In this case, the minimum of 2 time stamps is always used.
NOTE
i If you set a value > 60 Hz, the frequency calculations do not function.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
NOTE
i Due to the characteristics of the following equations, recalculation in the UI is not always shown correctly:
• PAD Limit
• Flipflop
• Timer
• Delayer equations
• Equations attached in a closed loop to delayer equations
NOTE
i During a calculation, the Out of service status flag can be inherited by one of its operands.
Allocate Input Quantities

Depending on the formula, a corresponding number of entry fields for the input measurands Input measure-
ments are represented. Before each field the type/unit of the measured or calculated value Available meas-
urements is displayed, which must be routed to this field.
Example:
If a phasor is multiplied by an analog value, a phasor must be attributed as the 1st input measurand. The 2nd
input measurand can only be allocated to one analog value. Other routings are not valid and cannot be
executed.
Assuming Formulas
If there are duplicated calculated values, there are 2 possibilities for defining formulas and corresponding
input measurands:
• Selection of a formula via the list box and reallocation of the input measurands from the measured and
calculated values Available measurements
• Select the contents of the list box by double-clicking. This activates the group function and the selection
of the formula can be performed via the keys <Up arrow> or <Down arrow>, where already existing
input measurands are maintained and do not need to be rerouted.
NOTE
i The old input measurands are only assumed if the list box is opened and a function is selected with the
same input types.
Saving a Project
For further information on saving a project, see 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
Validation
Current errors can be displayed in tooltips during entry. A complete validation takes place via the menu
Project > Validate or via the icon . If error messages are displayed, re-edit the configuration. If the valida-
tion is free of errors, the project can be activated for the runtime process.
If a warning appears, you can still activate the project.
For further information on validating a project, see 6.1.4 Shared Functions.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
takes place via the menu Project > Activate or via the icon .
For further information on activating a project, see 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
6.1.8 Limit Editor
In the Limit Editor, you define the limiting values/thresholds for the individual measuring points of the power-
supply system that are to play a role in the evaluation.
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled to set parameters for a measuring point:
• At least one source must be created (for example, Applications, Calculated measurements or PMUs) and
corresponding measuring points must be configured.
• The Limit editor tab must be selected.
• One Limit group (source) must be selected (for example: PMU Munich).
The corresponding measured values are displayed as rows and can be configured.
NOTE
i Starting in Version V3.10, you can set limiting values for Calculated values and Application data in SIGUARD
PDP Engineer, too (previously only possible in the SIGUARD PDP UI).
The Limit Editor Tab Has Been Selected

After you have selected the Limit editor tab and a Limit group (for example, Munich DAU1), the layout for
editing the parameters of the individual measuring points is displayed.
[sc_Limit_Editor_Limit_Group, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-6 Selected Limit Editor and Limit Group Tabs
The following parameters are displayed for each measuring point of a selected Limit group:
• Name
Display of the name of the measuring point, for example, MchP/400/NbgH/U1
• Source
Display of the source generating this measured value, for example, PMUs\Munich\Munich DAU1

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
• Type
Display of the type of the measured value, for example: phasor or analog
• Unit
Display of the unit
• Post event
You can receive an indication when digital values change: appearing when values change from 0 to 1
and disappearing when values change from 1 to 0. For this, you must set the checkmark at Post event
in the Limit Editor of the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
Parameters of a Measuring Point

For every logical PMU, the created measuring points are displayed in window section under the PMU parame-
ters in the form of a table. They can be edited only with a selected logical PMU.
[sc_Limit_Editor_Measurement_settings, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-7 Parameters of the Measuring Points
In the following table, the setting options of the properties/parameters of the measuring points are explained.
Table 6-5 Parameters of the Measuring Points
Element Explanation
Nominal Entry of the rated value of the value to be measured,
for example: 400000
If the check box is selected, the rated value is included in the measure-
ment.
Min1 ... Min3 Definition of up to 3 lower limiting values in relation to the rated value,
for example: 380000, 360000 and 340000.
Max1 ... Max3 Definition of up to 3 upper limiting values in relation to the rated value,
for example: 420000, 430000 and 440000.
If the respective check box is marked, the corresponding limiting value is
included in the measurement.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Element Explanation
Post event This check box is only active for digital values.
If the corresponding check box is marked, SIGUARD PDP generates a
rising-edge indication Digital is set when the digital value changes from
0 to 1 and a falling-edge indication when the digital value changes from
1 to 0.
You can find more information in the section Indication for Digital
Value, Page 237.
PSS factor The PSS factor states the influence of the measurement on the PSS
curve.
The higher the PSS factor selected, the greater the influence on the PSS
curve.
Standard = 1
NOTE
i The PSS factor can be configured only for the measured values of a PMU and for a connection result. For
other sources, an entry is not possible in this configuration column.
Indication for Digital Value

You can receive an indication when digital values change: appearing when values change from 0 to 1 and
disappearing when values change from 1 to 0. For this, you must set the checkmark at Post event in the
Limit Editor of the SIGUARD PDP Engineer. The associated events show the incidence Digital is set in the event
and alarm list. You can use this indication to forward the change of the digital value via IEC 60870-5-104 or
ICCP.
Limiting Values
A hysteresis is set by default for each individual limiting value.
Every measured value contains noise. If hysteresis is not set, indications are issued again and again in case of
limiting value exceedance or shortfall.
To avoid this, hysteresis values are set: a hysteresis below the upper limiting value and another hysteresis
above the lower limiting value. In this way, there are only 4 indications:
• One indication, for example, Max 1 violated appearance, as soon as the upper limiting value Max1 is
exceeded
• One indication, for example, Max 1 violated disappearance, as soon as the value drops below the hyste-
resis
• 1 indication as soon as the value drops below the lower limiting value Min1
• 1 indication as soon as the value exceeds the hysteresis again

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
[dwhyster-corrected, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-8 Hysteresis of Limiting Values
(1) t1: Max 1 violated appearance

(2) t2: Max 1 violated disappearance
(3) t3: Min 1 violated appearance
(4) t4: Min 1 violated disappearance
The hysteresis value is defined for each unit and specified as a percent of the rated value. You can find the
default settings for the hysteresis value in the following table. You cannot change these default settings. If the
value drops below, for example, 2 %, the value is marked with the flag out of service. No current flows and
the equipment is out of service.
Name of the Unit Unit % Hysteresis % Out of Service
Current A 1 2
Voltage V 0.1 5
Active power W 1 5
Reactive power VAr 1 5
Apparent power VA 1 5
Frequency Hz 0.02 50
Impedance Ohm 1 10
Admittance S 1 10
Temperature °C 1 10
Percent % 1 10
NOTE
i The values given in percent for Hysteresis and out of service are referenced to the rated value.
At this time, you cannot enter a rated value for the Phase unit. The frequency changing rate (Frequency
deviation) has no rated value. As a result, there is no hysteresis for the Phase and Frequency deviation
units.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Saving a Project
NOTE
i After saving a project, newly created measuring points are entered into the list Available measurements;
deleted measuring points are also deleted from this list.
You can find more information on saving a project in chapter 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
Validation
takes place via the menu Project > Activate or via the icon symbol.
You can find more information on activating a project in chapter 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
6.1.9 Graphical Representation of Electricity-Supply Systems (Graphics)
6.1.9.1 Overview
The following requirements must be met in order to create and edit graphical representations of networks:
• A project must be created or an existing project must be opened.
• The tab Graphics must be selected.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Tab Graphics Is Selected

If the tab Graphics was selected, the layout for creating network graphics is displayed.
[sc_Engineer_graphics_view, 2, --_--]
Figure 6-9 Selected Tab Graphics
• Elements
In the left window section, the overview of all elements already existing in the directory root are shown
(for example, Layer1 for the complete graphic or parts of a graphic and subelements for stations, lines,
and others). The overview represents an organization of the graphical elements for a network.
If you click an element, the Editor automatically switches to the Edit mode . The element is selected in
the Editor:
– A substation is marked with a solid green circle.
– For a line, the 1st coordinate is marked with a solid green circle. All other coordinates are marked
with empty green circles.
• Graphics view
The single-line diagram is displayed in the upper part of the middle window section. An image can be
displayed in the background. Elements can be selected from the Element types and placed graphically
over a possibly available background image.
If you click an element in the Graphics view window section, the corresponding element is selected in
the Elements window section and vice versa. You can only select elements in the Edit mode.
• Element properties
In the lower part of the middle window section, the properties of the marked element are displayed.
The properties are divided into:
– General properties, tab Properties
– Properties of the coordinates, tab Coordinates
– List of routed measurements, tab Measurements
• Element types
A library of graphical elements is shown in the upper part of the right window section. These elements
are available for drawing a graphical network structure in the window section Graphics view.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
• Element type properties

In the middle of the right window section, you can determine the color and size of the text displayed in
the map for the selected element, for example, generator.
Note that no text is displayed for power lines.
In the lower part of the right window section, all available measurements Available measurements are
shown with name, type, and unit, which are used for the configuration of the element properties and
produce a color according to the quality of the measured value.
NOTE

NOTE
• *
• ?
Functions for Elements

The following functions can be executed for editing the elements via buttons.
Table 6-6 Functions for Elements
Element Explanation
In this Editor, this button does not have any function and is always dimmed.
Click the Duplicate button to duplicate an existing graphic element. The graphic
element is added at the end.
Click the Delete button to delete a graphic element.
Functions for Graphical Editing

The representation of a network in the schematic display is comparable to a structure with 2 levels that lie on
top of one another:
• Single-line level
Schematic display using the corresponding functions of the single-line diagram
• User level
Representation of a network with the parameters that are defined in SIGUARD PDP Engineer in the tab
Graphics.
The following functions can be performed for graphical processing of the elements in the window section
Graphics view via buttons.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
[sc_graphics_view, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-10 Interface for the Editing of Graphic Elements

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Table 6-7 Functions for Graphic Elements
Element Explanation
Click the Navigate in map button to navigate within the schematic display and
use the functions of the single-line diagram.
Single-line level
Click the Edit mode button to define or change the position of an element.
• Positioning element
User level – Select an element in the window Element types.
– Use drag and drop to drag the element to the desired position in
Graphics view.
The newly positioned element appears in the tree structure. For this,
the properties under Properties can now be defined.
• Changing element position
– Select the element in the tree structure.
– Use drag and drop to drag the selected element to the new position in
the Graphics view .
The graphical icon changes its position.
or
– Click the Edit mode button.
– Select the element in the Graphics view .
– Use drag and drop to drag the selected element to the new position in
the Graphics view .
The graphical icon changes its position.
• Moving coordinate points
– Select the element in the Graphics view .
– Select the desired coordinate point.
– Use drag and drop to drag the coordinate point to the new position.
• Adding coordinate points
– Move the mouse in the Graphics view over the selected element, for
example, a line.
The indication double click to add coordinate appears in the title bar
of the Editor.
– Double-click the desired position to add a coordinate.
Click the Zoom to area button to select a rectangle, the contents of which are
enlarged to the size of the window section.
User level
Click the Zoom in button to gradually enlarge the schematic display.
Single-line level
Click the Zoom out button to gradually scale down the schematic display.
Single-line level

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Element Explanation
Click the Show phase-angle differences button to display a colored triangle
between the stations, including the stations where an existing phase-angle differ-
ence is to be measured in relation to the reference station (marked with a white
Phase-angle difference square frame).
This colored triangle only gets visible if you have parameterized the measured
values accordingly for a minimum of 3 substation icons.
Click the Show voltage magnitude button to display a colored triangle between
the stations, including the stations where an existing voltage magnitude is to be
measured in relation to the reference station (marked with a white square
Voltage magnitude frame).
6.1.9.2 Properties of the Elements

The parameter assignment of the properties of an element is distributed to the following tabs.
Properties
Depending on which element you have selected in the Elements tree, the following parameters are available
in the Properties tab:
[sc_Graphics_Editor_Substation, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-11 Parameter Properties, Substation Selected

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
[sc_layer_properties, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-12 Parameter Properties, Layer1 Selected
[sc_Graphics_Editor_Measurements, 2, --_--]
Figure 6-13 Parameter Properties, Measurement Selected
Table 6-8 Parameters of the Tab Properties
Element Explanation
Internal name Name of the element that is displayed in the overview (technical name)
Displayed name Name of the element that is displayed in the schematic display, for
example, Berlin
Note that no name is displayed for power lines in the schematic display.
Description Description of the element
Label hiding Priority assignment
The labels in Graphics view can overlap. To prevent this, you can assign
a priority. For this, activate the check box Label hiding. If you have acti-
vated the check box, the field Priority is activated.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Element Explanation
Priority This field is active only if you have activated the check box Label hiding.
Enter the priority. 1 is the highest priority.
This specification works only in conjunction with other elements for
which you have also assigned a priority. If 2 labels overlap each other,
the priority helps decide which label is hidden.
The priority is also visible in the UI, but cannot be changed there.
Image Specification of the background image
This field is displayed only if you have selected the Layer1 node in the
tree structure.
Using the X button, you can delete a background image.
Using the ... button, a dialog opens where you can select a new back-
ground image.
Background Specification of the background color
tree structure.
Using the ... button, a dialog opens where you can select a new back-
ground color.
Phase-angle difference Specification of the colors and the range of values
tree structure.
The ... button opens the following dialog for the phase-angle difference
settings.
Voltage magnitude Specification of the colors and the range of values
tree structure.
The ... button opens the following dialog for the voltage magnitude
settings.
Decimal places List box for the number of decimal places
You may display 0 to 3 decimal places.
This field is displayed only if you have selected a measured value in the
tree structure.
Default setting: 1
Unit prefix List box for the prefix of the unit
The following prefixes are available:
• M
• k
• m
• µ
tree structure.
Suppress negative sign Hiding the negative sign, for example, with the combined use of an
arrow to represent the power-flow direction
tree structure.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
[scgracol-100713-37.tif, 2, --_--]
Figure 6-14 Settings for the Phase-Angle Difference
The Phase-angle difference dialog is used to perform the following settings:
• Min color
Definition of the color for the minimum phase-angle difference. The ... button opens the dialog for the
color setting.
• Max color
Definition of the color for the maximum phase-angle difference. The ... button opens the dialog for the
color setting.
• Undef color
Definition of the color for an undefined phase-angle difference. The ... button opens the dialog for the
color setting.
• Min value
Definition of the value for a minimum phase-angle difference, for example, -20°
• Max value
Definition of the value for a maximum phase-angle difference, for example, 20°
• Opacity
Setting of the opacity (transparency) of the color triangle over the map, for example, 75 %.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
[sc_voltage_magnitude, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-15 Settings for the Voltage Magnitude
The Voltage magnitude dialog is used to perform the following settings:
• Min color
Definition of the color for the minimum voltage magnitude. The ... button opens the dialog for the color
setting.
• Max color
Definition of the color for the maximum voltage magnitude. The ... button opens the dialog for the color
setting.
• Undef color
Definition of the color for an undefined voltage magnitude. The ... button opens the dialog for the color
setting.
• Min value
Definition of the value for a minimum voltage magnitude, for example, 0.75
• Max value
Definition of the value for a maximum voltage magnitude, for example, 1.25
• Opacity
Setting of the opacity (transparency) of the color triangle over the map, for example, 75 %
The color scale with the displayed range of values represents the current setting.
Element Type Properties
[sc_line_properties, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-16 Parameter Properties, Power Line
In the Element type properties section, you can set the color of the element, for example for the power line.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
If you click the button, you can select the desired color:
[sc_color_selection, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-17 Color Selection
You cannot deselect the default value, but can only select a different State.
If you have validated and activated your changes, the color settings will also be imported in the SIGUARD UI.
Coordinates
The following functions are available in the Coordinates tab.
[sc_graphics_coordinates, 2, --_--]
Figure 6-18 Parameter Coordinates

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Table 6-9 Functions of the Tab Coordinates
Element Explanation
An element is added at the position where you drag and drop it.
To position a selected element (for example, Paris station) centrally in
the Graphics view window, you have 2 options:
• Click the Fly to coordinate button. The marked coordinate is used

for the new configuration.
• Double-click an element in the Elements tree structure to position
it centrally in the Graphics view window, where the first coordi-
nate is always used for the configuration.
Click the Add coordinate button and click in the schematic representa-
tion to add a new coordinate for this element. The new coordinate is
inserted under the marked line.
The parameters of a coordinate are shown in a table. Editing is not
possible here.
• Screen coordinate X
• Screen coordinate Y
A station is defined by a point (a coordinate pair), a power line is
defined by 2 or more coordinate pairs (a start point and an end point or
intermediate points of the polygon).
If you left-click in the editor, another coordinate is added. If you right-
click or press <Esc>, this mode is ended.
Note that this button is only displayed for power lines.
Click the Change coordinate button to change the position of the
element with the text.
• Select the element in the tree structure, the position of which is to

be changed.
• Click the button Change coordinate.
The cursor appears as + - icon in Graphics view
• Position the cursor on the new position and click the left mouse
button.
The new coordinates are assumed in the table.
Click the Change label coordinate button to change the position of the
text in relation to the symbol.
Position the cursor on the new position and click the left mouse button.
Click the Remove coordinate button to delete a marked coordinate for
this element.
Note that this button is only displayed for power lines.
You may also delete a coordinate by selecting the coordinate and
pressing <Del>.
Measurements
The measuring points defined for this element are displayed in the Measurements tab. In this way, a connec-
tion of the graphic element to the measuring channels is created, so that the element is colored dynamically
in SIGUARD UI if there are limit violations on these measuring channels.
Use drag and drop to drag individual measurements from the Available measurements list into the editor.
You may also select several measurements in the Available measurements list and drag them into the editor
using drag and drop.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
NOTE
i For the element Measurement, use drag and drop to move one measurement from the Available meas-
urements list to the Measurements tab. If you move another measurement from the Available measure-
ments list to the Measurements tab, this will replace the measurement already there.
NOTE
i To display the phase-angle difference or the voltage magnitude in SIGUARD PDP UI, you must define the
following additional information for the substation, generator, or compensator elements.
• Select one or more voltage measured values for displaying the phase-angle difference from the set of
voltage measured values you have assigned to the element by assigning a priority value greater than
0, for example, the voltage of phase A (Phase-angle difference priority column).
If the voltage phasor with priority 1 is of poor quality, for example, because of missing time synchroni-
zation of the PMU or due to communication problems, a voltage phasor with a lower priority is used
instead.
Assign the priority values only to voltage phasors of the same phase.
• You must assign a priority for at least one substation, generator, or compensator element. You can
find the corresponding table in the Layer 1 element in the Priorities tab.
If the communication to all PMUs of the substation/generator/compensator that is set to a priority 1
fails, the next higher priority is automatically used.
More information can be found in 6.4.5.2 Dragging Elements into a Graphic.
[scgrap04-100713-10.tif, 2, --_--]
Figure 6-19 Parameter Measurements

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Table 6-10 Functions of the Tab Measurements
Element Explanation
Measurement name Allocation of measuring points
The measuring points are dragged from Available measurements into
the column Measurement name and are thus defined for this graphic
element. To display the graphical elements, different measurement
qualities are used. The PMU symbol indicates the state of the PMU. All
other icons display possible limit violation. The measuring points cannot
be edited here.
Measurement type Type of measuring point (for example, phasor, analog or digital meas-
ured value, calculated analog or digital measured value).
The type here cannot be changed but only displayed.
Phase-angle difference priority Prioritization for the coloring of the phase-angle difference
You may specify numbers starting from 1 up. You may only assign a
number once. If you enter a number a second time, an error message
appears.
To delete measuring points, select a measuring point (line) and click the corresponding button .
Layer1
The substations for which measuring points have been defined are displayed in the Priorities tab. Substations
for which no measured values have defined are not listed here.
You set the priority of the substations in this tab. If all the PMUs of a substation fail, the substation with the
next-highest priority is automatically used as the reference.
[sc_substation_priorities, 1, --_--]
Table 6-11 Functions of the Priorities Tab
Element Explanation
Substation name Name of the substation
Priority Prioritization of the substation
You may specify numbers starting from 1 up. You may only assign a
number once. If you enter a number a second time, an error message
appears.
The substation with priority 1 is bordered with a white square in the
map.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
6.1.9.3 Element Types

In the upper right window section Element types of the tab Graphics, various types of elements are available
to you for the creation of a graphical network structure.
[sc_graphic_elements, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-20 Overview of the Element Types
Table 6-12 Functions of the Element Types
Element Explanation Changeable Properties

Substation Element for a Station Color and size of the text
You can change the text.
PMU Element for a Phasor Measurement Unit Color and size of the text
(PMU)
You can change the text.
Generator Element for a power plant or a power- Color and size of the text
plant unit
The name of the generator is displayed.
Compensator Element for a static VAR compensator SVC Color and size of the text
The name of the compensator is displayed.
Line (5 pixel) Element for a thick line (collective repre- Color for every state and selection of the
sentation of parallel systems) – voltage displayed state in SIGUARD PDP Engineer
level 1 (default)
Line (3 pixel) Element for a thin line (individual line) – Color for every state and selection of the
voltage level 1 displayed state in SIGUARD PDP Engineer
(default)
Line 2 (5 pixel) Element for a thick line (collective repre- Color for every state and selection of the
sentation of parallel systems) – voltage displayed state in SIGUARD PDP Engineer
level 2 (default)
Line 2 (3 pixel) Element for a thin line (individual line) – Color for every state and selection of the
voltage level 2 displayed state in SIGUARD PDP Engineer
(default)
Measurement Element for measured value Color in the normal state and size of the
text
Direction Element for the display of the power-flow Color for every state and selection of the
direction displayed state in SIGUARD PDP Engineer
The direction depends on the sign. (default)
The element is also colored in case of a
limit violation.
You can specify the start point and the end
point and assign 1 measured value.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.1 Basic Functions
Saving a Project
For further information on saving a project, see chapter 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
Validation
takes place via the menu Project > Activate or via the icon .
You can find more information on activating a project in chapter 6.1.4 Shared Functions.
You can find more information on changing the background image, etc., in chapter 6.4.5.1 Changing the
Background Image and Colors.
6.1.10 Triggers
You can find more information on configuration in chapter 3.5.2 Parameters and Setting Notes.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.2 Applications
6.2 Applications
6.2.1 Overview
For configuring and assigning parameters of applications, the following requirements must be met:
• The tab Application must be selected.
Tab Application Is Selected

When you have selected the tab Application, the layout for adding and editing applications is displayed.
[sc_Application_tab, 2, --_--]
Figure 6-21 Selected Tab Application
• Existing applications
In the left window section, all available applications are displayed as folders:
– Automatic Disturbance Recognition (ADR)
– Custom application
– Island-state detections (ISDs)
– Power-swing recognitions (PSRs)
– Voltage-stability curves (VSCs)
• Selected application
In the middle window section, the parameter data of the selected application is shown.
and unit, which are used for the input measurands within the configuration of the applications.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.2 Applications
NOTE

NOTE
• *
• ?
Hints Regarding Configuration and Parameterization

The configuration and parameterization of the individual applications is done in SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
• Island-State Detection in networks (ISD)

You can find additional information for displaying in the UI in chapter 3.1.3 Parameters and Setting
Notes.
• Power Swing Recognition in the network (PSR)

Notes.
• Display of Voltage-stability curves (VSC)

Notes .
You can find the parameters and setting notes for the applications in the following chapters:
• ISD:
• PSR:
• ADR:
• Custom application:
• VSC:
• ATT:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.3 Communication
6.3 Communication
6.3.1 Overview
To configure and set the communication-interface parameters, the following requirements must be met:
• The tab Communication must be selected.
Tab Communication Is Selected

When you have selected the tab Communication, the layout for adding and editing communication interfaces
is displayed.
[sc_communication_tab, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-22 Selected Tab Communication
• Available communication
In the left window section, all available communication interfaces are displayed as folders:
– C37.118
– Email notification (ENS)
– ICCP
– IEC 60870-5-104
– OPC
• Selected application
In the middle window section, the parameter data for the selected communication interfaces are shown.
and unit, which are used for the input measurands within the configuration of the applications.
NOTE


E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.3 Communication
NOTE
• *
• ?
You can find the parameters and setting notes for the communication functions of SIGUARD PDP (SIGUARD
PDP COM (Communication)) in the following chapters:
• PMU: 5.1.2 Parameters and Setting Notes
• C37.118 (PDC): 5.2.2 Parameters and Setting Notes
• ENS: 5.3.2 Parameters and Setting Notes
• ICCP: 5.4.2 Parameters and Setting Notes
• IEC 60870-5-104: 5.5.2 Parameters and Setting Notes
• OCP: 5.6.2 Parameters and Setting Notes

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
6.4 Working with SIGUARD PDP Engineer
6.4.1 Overview
With the help of examples, the use of SIGUARD PDP Engineer shall be demonstrated to you.
The suggested procedure is to illustrate the individual steps for parameter assignment with SIGUARD PDP Engi-
neer.
Keep in mind that this chapter does not describe all possible configurations, only typical parameter examples
are described. You can find more detailed descriptions in the chapters 6.1 Basic Functions and 6.3 Communi-
cation.
6.4.2 Example: Project, PMU
Proceed as follows:
• Create a new project.
• Create a new physical PMU.
• Create a new logical PMU.
• Define the measuring points for this logical PMU.
• Save the project.
• Perform the validation.
• Activate the project for the runtime process when the configuration is complete.
Creating a New Project

²
Click the button in order to create a new project.
The dialog for entering the project name appears.
[scpronew-270910-08.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-23 Dialog Create New Project
² Enter the name for the new project.

² Confirm the entry with the button Create.
Opening an Existing Project

²
Click the button in order to open an existing project.
The dialog for opening the project appears.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[scprojop-281010-09.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-24 Dialog Open
² Select the directory in which the file type SIGUARD Engineering File is found.
² Select the SIGUARD PDP Engineer file (SEF format).
² Confirm the entry with the button Open.
The project data are loaded.
Creating a New Physical PMU

² Go to the PMU tab.
² Select the directory All PMUs.
²
Click the button in the window section Available PMUs in order to create a new physical PMU.
The window for entering the parameters for a physical PMU is displayed.
[sc_PMU_new, 3, --_--]
Figure 6-25 Parameters of the Physical PMU
Fill out the required entry fields marked in red.

² Enter the name in the field PMU device name and confirm with the <Enter> key.
The name will be inherited in the overview Available PMUs.
² Enter the PMU device ID (inherit from the PMU).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Select the Reporting rate (inherit from the PMU).

² Define the Timeout, for example, 5 s.
² Select the Communication type, for example, TCP.
² Enter the Remote IP address A and the Remote port (inherit from the PMU).
You can find more information in chapter 5.1.2 Parameters and Setting Notes .
Creating a New Logical PMU

Every physical PMU must always have at least one logical PMU created under it. The new physical PMU is still
marked.
²
Click the button in the Available PMUs window section in order to create a new logical PMU.
The window for entering the parameters for a logical PMU is displayed.
[sc_logical_PMU, 3, --_--]
Figure 6-26 Parameters of a Logical PMU

² Enter the name in the field Logical PMU name and confirm with the <Enter> key.
The name will be inherited in the overview Available PMUs.
² Enter the Logical PMU ID (inherit from the PMU).
NOTE
i Pay attention to the following when setting the ID parameters for physical and logical PMUs:
• SIMEAS R-PMU
For a SIMEAS R-PMU, you can only enter the ID for a physical device. Every printed circuit board
assembly is a logical PMU. The printed circuit board assembly IDs use dense numbering.
Example: SIMEAS R-PMU with 2 printed circuit board assemblies:
– ID of the physical PMU (PMU device ID): 10
– ID of the 1st printed circuit board assembly (1st logical PMU, Logical PMU ID): 11
– ID of the 2nd printed circuit board assembly (2nd logical PMU, Logical PMU ID): 12
• SIPROTEC 5-PMU
The SIPROTEC 5-PMU only uses one logical PMU. The ID of the logical PMU is the same as the ID of the
physical PMU.
Example:
– ID of the physical PMU (PMU device ID): 20
– ID of the logical PMU (logical PMU ID): 20

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Defining Measuring Points

² Select the field Name in the table.
The name of the PMU device and the Logical PMU ID are inherited from the text boxes above.
² Enter a name for the measuring point.
A 2nd row is inserted into the table. The line can be used for the definition of a further measuring point.
[sc_logical_PMU_par, 3, --_--]
Figure 6-27 Name of the Measuring Point
² Enter the Index (inherit from the PMU).

You can find more information on the index field in chapter 5.1.2 Parameters and Setting Notes .
² Enter the type of measuring point via the list box Type (inherit from the PMU).
The selected parameter is inherited.
[sc_PMU_type_list, 3, --_--]
Figure 6-28 List Box Type
² Enter the unit of the measuring point via the list box Unit (inherit from the PMU).
The selected parameter is used in the Unit field.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_PMU_unit_list, 3, --_--]
Figure 6-29 List Box Unit
Reading Configuration Data

If you want to align your PMU configuration with the Siemens configuration, proceed as follows:
² Select a PMU.
² Click the Request PMU config frame button.
[sc_PMU_config_frame, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-30 Accepting PMU Data from PMU Config Frame
A 2nd table appears. This table shows the PMU settings.

² Align these data with the data in the other table.
Saving a Project
²
Click the button in order to save a project.
Performing a Validation
²
Click the button in order to check the project for warnings and errors.
If errors are still present, these are shown as Error. An activation is not possible.
If warnings are still present, these are shown as Warning. An activation is possible.
If the validation is free of errors, it is shown as Validation finished successfully!.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sc_validation_error, 3, --_--]
Figure 6-31 Validation
²
Click the button in order to activate a project for the runtime process.
NOTE
i Activate the project only after the configuration is complete.
6.4.3 Example: Calculated Values
Proceed as follows:
• Create a new project (see chapter 6.4.2 Example: Project, PMU ).
• Create a new calculated value.
• Set the parameters for this calculated value.
• Perform the validation.
• Activate the project for the runtime process when the configuration is complete.
Creating New Calculated Values

² Select the Calculation tab.
² Select the directory All calculated objects.
²
Click the button in order to create a new calculated value.
The window for entering the parameters is displayed.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
[sccalnew-160713-16.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-32 Parameters for a Calculated Value

² Enter the name of the new calculated value and confirm with the <Enter> key.
The name will be changed in the overview accordingly.
² Enter the Factor (Standard = 1).
² Enter a formula via the Formula list box, for example, Add two analogs.
The selected formula is inherited.
[sccalfor-160713-07.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-33 Selection of the Formula

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
NOTE
i To increase the query performance, all values are archived as a matter of course starting with SIGUARD PDP
V3.10.
Saving a Project
²
Performing a Validation
²
Click the button in order to validate a project.
If errors are still present, these are shown as Error (Calculation): ....
[sccalval-260713-08.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-34 Missing Input Measurand
The missing input measurand is shown as an error (fields are highlighted in red).
² Drag the input measurands from Available measurements (Type: Analog) into the fields Input meas-
urements.
The error messages are no longer shown.
²

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
NOTE
6.4.4 Example: Limit Editor
Proceed as follows:
• Open a project.
• Open the Limit editor.
• Select the Limit group for which the limiting values are to be defined.
• Change the limiting values/threshold values of the project.
Defining Limiting Values

² Select a Limit group, for example, the logical PMU Munich.
The measuring points for this PMU are displayed with the defined limiting values.
[sccallg2-160713-09.tif, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-35 Limiting Values of the Selected Limit Group
² Double-click the value to add or change it.

² Enter the rated value in the Nominal column and select the corresponding check box if this value is to be
included in the measurement.
² Enter the lower limiting values (Min1 to Min3) column and select the corresponding check box if this
value is to be included in the measurement.
² Enter the upper limiting values (Max1 to Max3) column and select the corresponding check box if this
value is to be included in the measurement.
² If you want to receive an indication when digital values change, mark the Post event check box.
You can use this indication to forward the change of the digital value via IEC 60870-5-104 or ICCP.
² Enter the PSS factor (Default = 1).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Saving a Project
²
Perform Validation
²
Click the button in order to check the project for validation.
If errors are still present, these are shown as Error (???): ... displayed.
²
NOTE
6.4.5 Example: Graphics Editor
6.4.5.1 Changing the Background Image and Colors

Proceed as follows:
• Open a project.
• Open the Graphics Editor.
• Change the graphics settings of the project.
Changing the Background Image

² Select Layer1.
The Element properties section displays the properties of Layer1.
² To load an image as the background image, select the ... button next to the Image field.
² Navigate to the storage location of the image and select the image.
NOTE
i SIGUARD PDP supports the JPG and PNG image formats.
² Click Open.
The image name is displayed in the Image field.
The image is displayed as the background image.
The image is automatically enlarged so that it is completely visible.
Deleting the Background Image

² Click the X button next to the Image field.
The background image is deleted. The background is shown as gray.
Changing the Background Color

Gray is set as the background color. If you wish to change the background color, proceed as follows:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Select the Layer1 node in the Elements section.

The Element properties section displays the properties of Layer1.
² To change the background color, select the ... button next to the Color field.
The Color dialog appears.
² Select the desired color and click OK.
The color code is displayed in the Color field, for example, #0000FF for the color blue. In addition, the
selected color is shown in a field to the right next to Color.
NOTE
i You can only fill out the Image and Color fields using the ... button. You cannot enter any contents into
these fields.
Zoom
To enlarge or reduce the size of the background image, you have the following possibilities:
²
Click the or button.
- or -
² Roll the scroll wheel.
6.4.5.2 Dragging Elements into a Graphic

The following describes how you can expand your existing schematic display with the following elements:
• 2 substations
• 1 line
• 2 PMUs
Adding Substations
² Open the Graphics Editor.
² Select the Layer1 node.
²
Using the or icon, select a suitable visible display area to display the new network elements.
- or -
²
Using the move function (the icon), select a suitable visible display area to display the new network
elements.
The visible display area changes.
² From the Element types section, drag a Substation icon to the position in the graphic where the icon is
to be displayed.
A new substation icon is displayed in the schematic image. One New Substation element is added to the list
of elements.
² In the list of elements, select the new element New Substation.
The properties of the new element are displayed in Element properties.
² Select the Properties tab.
The general properties are displayed.
² Change the internal name (Internal), the displayed name (Displayed) and the description (Description)
if necessary.
The internal name is shown in the list of elements and the displayed name is shown in the Graphics view.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² To connect the substation icon to one or more measured values, select the Measurements tab in the
Element properties.
An empty table is displayed.
² To display limit violations of measuring points on this icon, drag the appropriate measuring point, for
example, voltage or frequency, from the list of Available measurements into the Element properties –
Measurements.
One row with the measuring-point name and measuring-point type is added to the table.
NOTE
i To display the phase-angle difference or the voltage magnitude in SIGUARD PDP UI, you must define the
following additional information for the substation, generator, or compensator elements.
• Select one or more voltage measured values for displaying the phase-angle difference from the set of
voltage measured values you have assigned to the element by assigning a priority value greater than
0, for example, the voltage of phase A (Phase-angle difference priority column).
If the voltage phasor with priority 1 is of poor quality, for example, because of missing time synchroni-
zation of the PMU or due to communication problems, a voltage phasor with a lower priority is used
instead.
Assign the priority values only to voltage phasors of the same phase.
• You must assign a priority for at least one substation, generator, or compensator element. You can
find the corresponding table in the Layer 1 element in the Priorities tab.
If the communication to all PMUs of the substation/generator/compensator that is set to a priority 1
fails, the next higher priority is automatically used.
² Repeat the previous step for additional measuring points.

One row with the measuring-point name and measuring-point type is added to the table each time.
² Repeat these steps for the other substation.
The Graphics view shows the second substation icon, the list of elements shows another substation element.
Adding a Line
² To add a line, drag a Line (3 pixels) icon from the Element types section and drop it in the graphic
where the line is to start.
A new element New Line (3 pixels) is displayed in the list of elements.
² If you want to draw a polygon with knee-points, move the cursor to the first knee-point of the line and
left-click. Move the cursor to the next knee-point and left-click.
You can repeat this step as often as you want.
² Move the cursor to the position where the line is to end and left-click.
To complete this process, right-click.
- or -
² If you want to draw a direct line without knee-points, move the cursor to the position where the line is to
end, left-click and then right-click.
² Select the Properties tab in the Element properties section.
The name and description are displayed.
² Change the internal name and the description. No name is displayed on lines in the schematic image.
The new name is displayed in the list of elements.
² To link the line to one or more measured values, select the Measurements tab in the Element proper-
ties section.
An empty table is displayed.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² To display limit violations of measuring points on the line, select one or more measuring points, for
example, voltage or frequency, from the list of Available measurements and drag them into the
Element properties – Measurements table.
One or more rows with the measuring-point name and measuring-point type are added to the table.
² Repeat the previous step for additional measuring points.
One row with the measuring-point name and measuring-point type is added to the table each time.
Adding Knee-Points to a Line

²
To add additional knee-points to a line, select the Edit mode (the icon) in the toolbar and click the
line in Graphics view .
The line is marked in the list of elements.
² Open the Coordinates tab in the Element properties section.
² In the Graphics view, select the knee-point after which the additional knee-point is to be added.
² Click the icon.
² Move the cursor in the Graphics view to the coordinate of the new knee-point and left-click.
You can repeat this step as often as you want.
² To complete this process, right-click.
Changing Coordinates
²
Select the Edit mode (the icon).
² In the Graphics view , select the icon whose coordinates you wish to change.
² Use drag and drop to drag the selected coordinate to the new position.
Adding a Measured Value

² To add a measured value, drag a Measurement element from the Element types section and drop it in
the graphic at the position where it is to be displayed.
A measured value is shown in the Graphics view.
² In the list of elements, select the new element New measurement.
The properties of the new element are displayed in the Element properties.
² Change the Internal name and the Description if necessary.
² Enter a prefix, for example, f =, into the Displayed name field if necessary.
² Select the number of Decimal places.
² Select a Unit prefix, for example, M (Mega) or k (kilo).
² Select the Measurements tab in the Element properties.
An empty Measurements table is displayed.
² Connect a measured value by dragging a measuring point from the list of Available measurements into
the list of measurements.
A row with the measuring-point name and measuring-point type is added to the table.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Adding a Power-Flow Direction

² To display the power-flow direction in the Graphics view, drag a Direction icon from the Element types
section and drop it in the graphic at the position where it is to be displayed.
² Click with the mouse on the desired final position of the element in the Graphics view.
An arrow is displayed in the Graphics view.
² In the list of elements, select the new element New direction.
The properties of the new element are displayed in Element properties.
² Change the internal name (Internal name) and the description (Description) if necessary.
² Select the Measurements tab in Element properties.
² Link a measured value by dragging a measuring point from the list of Available measurements into the
list of Measurements.
Adding a PMU
² To display the state of a PMU in the Graphics view, drag a PMU icon from the Element types section and
drop it at the position in the graphic where it is to be displayed.
A new PMU icon is shown in the schematic image, one New PMU element is added to the list of elements.
² In the list of elements, select the new element New PMU.
The properties of the new element are displayed in the Element properties.
² Change the Internal name, the Displayed name, and the Description if necessary.
² Select the Measurements tab in the Element properties.
² To display the state of the PMU, connect one measured value from the PMU to the PMU icon by dragging
one measuring point from the Available measurements list to the list of Measurements.
² Repeat the last 5 steps to incorporate a 2nd PMU icon into the schematic image.
Another element is added to the list of elements, another PMU icon is displayed in the Graphics view.
² Save, validate, and activate your changes as described in chapter 6.4.1 Overview.
The new icons are displayed in the SIGUARD PDP UI and their color reflects the state of limit violations.
6.4.5.3 Changing Text Color and Text Position for an Element Type
You can change the text color and text position for the following element types:
• Substation
• PMU
• Generator
• Compensator
The text color and text position is changed for all elements of the same type.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Select the desired element type in the Element types section.

² Click the ... button in the Element type properties area under Color.
The Color dialog appears.
² Select the desired color and click OK.
² Specify the desired scaling for the text in the Element type properties section under Scale. The default
value is 0.5.
If the text should be bigger, select values > 0.5. If the text should be smaller, select values < 0.5.
Changing the Text Position for an Element

The element is inserted in the top right of the map by default.
² To reposition a text, select the relevant element in the Element section.
² Select the Coordinates tab in the Element properties section.
² Click .
The Graphics view is positioned so that the selected element is displayed in the middle.
² Click to change the position of an element with the text.
² Click to change the position of the text in relation to a element.
6.4.6 Example: Application Editor
6.4.6.1 Setting ISD Parameters

The following describes how to set the parameters in the ISD application.
You can find more information on the individual parameters in chapters 3.1.2 Display in the User Interface
and 3.1.3 Parameters and Setting Notes, Table Table 3-2.
NOTE
i The information in the entry fields is not accepted until you position the cursor in a different field by
clicking the mouse or pressing the tab key.
² Select the Application Editor.

²
In the tree structure on the left, select the ISDs folder and click the icon in the toolbar above.
Entry fields appear in the middle Application – Island detection section.

² Enter a name used to report application errors in the Alarm List, for example, ISD.
The name is displayed, the red entry field background disappears. Reselect, if necessary in advance, the ISD
subitem in the tree structure.
² Put a check mark in the Active check box.
The check box is shown as selected.
² Activate at least the Static check box, and maybe Dynamic and Limit for Potential Network Split is
active.
The corresponding check boxes are displayed, the text boxes are enabled.
² Change the time constants for the static or dynamic island detection if necessary.
The values are displayed.
² For static island detection, set a limiting value for the frequency, for example, 0.05 Hz. If this limiting
value is exceeded, a split into several islands is signaled in the schematic image and in the Alarm List.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
The value is displayed, the red entry field background disappears.

² For static island detection, set a limiting value for the frequency, for example, 0.01 Hz. If this limiting
value is exceeded, a possible split into several islands is signaled in the Alarm List.
² For static island detection, set a limiting value for the frequency changing rate, for example, 0.001 Hz/s.
If this limiting value is exceeded, a possible split into several islands is signaled in the Alarm List.
² To sort the Available measurements list according to unit, click the Unit headline element.
The list of available measured values is sorted according to units.
² Scroll to the frequency measuring points (unit: Hz).
The frequency measuring points are displayed.
² Drag one frequency measuring point from the list of Available measurements and drop it into the
empty cell in column f.
Information is added to the table. At least one additional frequency measuring point and 2 corresponding
measuring points for the frequency changing rate are necessary.
² Repeat the last step.
An additional frequency measuring point is displayed.
² Drag the frequency changing rate measuring point of the same substation as in the step before last from
the list of Available measurements and drop it into the empty cell in column f.
The measuring point for the frequency changing rate is displayed.
² Repeat the last step.
The measuring point for the frequency changing rate is displayed.
² Repeat dragging the frequency measuring point and the measuring point for the frequency changing rate
for additional substations.
The measuring points selected are displayed.
If the power system splits into several islands, the associated sections receive the one area as the background.
NOTE
i Pay attention to the following when entering the values:
• Keep in mind that you must always specify both the frequency and the frequency changing rate.
• Always specify one value for the limiting value even if you do not want to use the function. To do this,
switch the function to active, change the limiting value, and then switch the function to inactive.
6.4.6.2 Setting PSR Parameters

The following describes how to set the parameters in the PSR application.
You can find further information on the parameters in chapters 3.2.2 Display in the User Interface and
3.2.3 Parameters and Setting Notes.
NOTE

²
In the tree structure on the left, select the PSRs folder and click the icon in the toolbar above.
Entry fields appear in the middle Application Power Swing Recognition section.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Enter a unique name in PSR Name, for example, PSR.

The name is displayed.
² In the tree structure on the left, select the New Job <n> subitem.
All the parameters of the job are displayed in the Application Power Swing Recognition section.
² Edit the job name, for example, PSR Job <StationA> <StationB> where <StationA> and <StationB> are
the names of the substations involved. Keep in mind that the name must be unique within the entire
SIGUARD PDP system.
The job name is modified both in the Application Power Swing Recognition section and the Existing appli-
cations section. Before this, you may also need to reselect the PSR Job <StationA> <StationB> subitem in the
tree structure.
² In Job Type, select whether you want to monitor an active power, a phase-angle difference, a power
frequency, or the active power for a generator.
Depending on the job type, the Inputs table is modified.
² Give the Output signal a unique name, for example, PSR Job <StationA> <StationB> delta_phi.
The name of the output signal is displayed.
² Specify a rated value for this job under Thresholds / Events, nominal. All values of the Threshold table
are referenced to this rated value.
The rated value is displayed.
² If you are making 1-phase measurements for the input values, check the Only one Phase check box.
The Inputs table is modified if necessary.
² Drag the required measuring point from the list of Available measurements and drop it in the Inputs
table.
The appropriate name of the measuring point is displayed. Missing measuring-point name fields are marked in
red.
² Repeat the previous step as long as the Inputs table contains red fields.
The table displays all selected measuring points.
² Enter a name for a swing mode in the Modes table, for example, PSR Job <StationA> <StationB> Mode
1.
One entry appears in the Modes table. 4 entries with the application results of this mode appear in the
Outputs table.
² If you want to reserve this mode for swings of specific frequencies, check the Frequency band check box
and specify the upper and a lower limiting value of the frequency for which this mode is to be used.
The table displays the corresponding frequency limiting values.
² Repeat the step before last for additional modes.
In the Modes table, one row is displayed per mode and in the Outputs table, 4 rows are displayed per mode.
² Adapt the names of the outputs if necessary.
The corrected names are displayed.
In the SIGUARD PDP UI, recognized swings are marked using round areas about the substations involved and
with a connector line.
NOTE
i To ensure that modes with unexpected frequencies can be displayed, enter at least one mode that is not
restricted to a frequency band.
6.4.6.3 Setting ADR Parameters

The following describes how to set the parameters in the ADR application.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
You can find more information on the individual parameters in the chapters 3.3.1 Function Description and
NOTE
Selecting a PMU
First, you must select the PMUs that must provide data for the ADR application.
² Select the PMU Editor.
² In the tree structure on the left, select a PMU that must provide data for the ADR application.
² In the ADR input type list box, select the physical value if the PMU provides physical components.
- or -
² In the ADR input type list box, select the symmetric value if the PMU provides symmetrical components.
- or -
² In the ADR input type list box, select the inactive value if the PMU provides no data for the ADR applica-
tion.
² Repeat these steps for all further PMUs.
²
In the tree structure on the left, select the ADR folder and click the icon in the toolbar above.
Setting Parameters for the GDL Application

If you want to use the GDL application, proceed as follows:
² In the tree structure on the left, open the ADR folder and select the GDL application.
Entry fields appear in the middle section Generation / Demand loss.
² Select the check box Active.
² If your power supply network has a rated frequency of 60 Hz, select 60 in the Nominal frequency list
box.
² In the Max. stabilization time field, specify the maximum time in which the primary control has prob-
ably cleared an imbalance between production and consumption. This imbalance is generated by the
failure of a power plant or a major load. Select, for example, 20 s.
² If you want to receive a warning in case of a failure of small generators or loads, select the check box
Warning.
The entry field for the corresponding rate of change of frequency threshold value is activated.
² Enter the threshold value, for example, 0.01 Hz/s.
² In the Alarm field, specify the threshold value of the rate of change of frequency for the alarm threshold,
for example, 0.02 Hz/s.
Setting Parameters for the SCD Application

If you want to use the SCD application, proceed as follows:
² In the tree structure on the left, open the ADR folder and select the SCD application.
Entry fields appear in the middle section Short circuit detection.
² Select the check box Active.
² In the Max. clearing time field, specify the maximum time required by the protection to clear a short
circuit, for example, 2 s.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² If you want to receive a warning in case of small current increases, select the check box Warning.
The entry field for the corresponding current change rate threshold value at the point in time when the short
circuit occurred is activated.
² Enter the threshold value, for example, 2000 A/s.
² In the Alarm field, specify the threshold value of the current change rate at the point in time when the
short circuit occurred, for example, 4000 A/s.
² In the Clearing field, specify the threshold value of the current change rate at the point in time when the
short circuit is cleared, for example, 2000 A/s.
6.4.6.4 Setting VSCs Parameters

The following describes how to set the parameters in the VSC application.
You can find more information on the parameters in chapters 3.4.2 Display in the User Interface and
NOTE

²
In the tree structure on the left, select the VSCs folder and click the icon in the toolbar above.
Entry fields appear in the middle Voltage-stability curves section.

² First, select whether you are monitoring the corresponding line at one end (1 PMU) or at both ends
(2 PMUs).
If necessary, the content of the Voltage-stability curves section changes.
² Enter a unique name for the VSC, for example, VSC KslB LpzB.
The name is displayed, the red background disappears.
² For the display in the SIGUARD PDP UI, specify the maximum power Pmax in MW and the maximum
voltage Vmax in kV.
Appropriate numerical values are displayed.
² If you have selected 1 PMU: Specify the voltage and current at the start of the line by dragging the corre-
sponding measuring points from the Available measurements list into the appropriate field (Vin, Iin).
The names of the measuring points are displayed.
² If you have selected 1 PMU: Specify the elements of the π equivalent circuit of the line (R, X, B, G) in
ohms or μS.
- or -
² If you have selected 2 PMUs: Specify the voltage and current at the end of the line by dragging the corre-
sponding measuring points from the Available measurements list into the appropriate field (Vout, Iout).
If the power margin is to be calculated for the voltage-stability curve, do the following steps:
² Activate the Calculate power margin check box.
² Specify the name of the power-margin calculation as it will be displayed in the user interface under
Voltage-stability curves.
The name must be unambiguous.
² Enter a value for Factor, for example, 1.
² Correct the value for Factor if necessary.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
In the SIGUARD PDP UI, one or more entries are displayed under Application > Voltage-stability curves. You
may select among them.
6.4.7 Example: Communication Editor
6.4.7.1 Overview
In the Communication Editor, you set the communication parameters for the following protocols:
• C37,118
• ENS
• ICCP
• IEC 60870-5-104
• OPC
6.4.7.2 Setting C37.118 Parameters

The following describes how to set the parameters of the C37.118 communication.
You can find further information on the parameters in chapter 5.2.2 Parameters and Setting Notes .
NOTE
² Open the Communication Editor.

²
In the tree structure on the left, select the C37.118 folder and click the icon in the toolbar above.
Entry fields appear in the middle C37.118 section.

² Enter the name to be used as the station in C37.118, for example, the name of your own company, in the
PDC server name field. The name may not be longer than 16 characters.
² Enter the PMU/DC ID in the C37.118 protocol that you have negotiated with your communication
partner. It is defined by the ID scheme of your communication partner (PDC Server ID).
The ID is displayed.
² Enter the Internal name.
This name must be unique and may not appear with other objects (for example, measured value, calcula-
tion, etc.).
² In the list box, select the Reporting rate you have negotiated with your communication partner.
² Select the Communication type, for example, TCP.
² Enter the IP address of the network interface card you will use to communicate with your partner (Local
IP address A).
The IP address is displayed.
² Correct the local port to be used for communication with your partner. In the event of questions, contact
your network administrator (Local port A).
The port number is displayed.
² In case of communication redundancy, enter the Local IP address B. First, select the check box.
The IP address is displayed.
The communication type is displayed, in the case of tcp, the Remote port (UDP only) field is deleted.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
You can find more information in chapter 5.2.2 Parameters and Setting Notes .
Entering the PMU

² Select the newly entered connection in the Available communication interfaces tree structure and click
the icon to enter a logical PMU.
New entry fields are enabled in the C37.118 section.

² Enter the name of the station for the first logical PMU that you have negotiated with your communication
partner (Station name). The name may not be longer than 16 characters.
The name of the station is displayed.
² Specify the rated frequency (50 or 60, Nominal frequency field).
The rated frequency is displayed.
² Enter the PMU ID for this logical PMU that you have negotiated with your communication partner (log.
PMU ID).
The ID of the logical PMU is displayed.
² Select the Service class, for example, M.
NOTE
i For the following steps, pay attention to the proper order of the measuring-point types:
• All phasors (voltage and current)
• Frequency
• Frequency changing rate
• Additional analog values
• Digital values
A different order is not permitted.
² Drag the first phasor measuring point that you want to transfer from the Available measurements list
into the bottom row in the Measurement column.
The name of the measuring point is displayed.
² Enter a name negotiated with your communication partner for this measuring point. The name may not
be longer than 16 characters.
² If you do not want to transfer the measured quantities for magnitude and/or phase, you can enter a
substitute value in the Subst. Magn column or the Subst. Angle column that will be transferred in place
of the measured quantity
The substitute values are displayed if applicable.
² Repeat the last 3 steps for all phasors that you want to transfer to the 1st logical PMU.
Information is added to the table.
² Drag the frequency measuring point that you want to transfer from the Available measurements list
into the bottom row in the Measurement column.
² Drag the frequency changing rate measuring point that you want to transfer from the Available meas-
urements list into the bottom row in the Measurement column.
² If you want to transfer any other analog values, drag the corresponding measuring point from the Avail-
able measurements list into the bottom row in the Measurement column.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Enter a name you have negotiated with your communication partner for this measuring point. The name
may not be longer than 16 characters.
² Select the method of measurement according to Table 5-9 (Meas. Mode).
The method of measurement is displayed.
² Enter a substitute value if applicable for the analog values entered in the previous step (Subst. Magn).
The substitute values are displayed.
² Repeat the last 3 steps for any additional analog values.
² If you want to transfer a digital value, drag the corresponding measuring point from the Available meas-
urements list into the bottom row in the Measurement column.
² Enter a name you have negotiated with your communication partner for this measuring point. The name
may not be longer than 16 characters.
² Enter a substitute value if applicable for the analog values entered in the previous 2 steps (Subst. Magn).
The substitute values are displayed.
² Repeat the last 3 steps for any additional digital values.
² Repeat these steps for additional logical PMUs that you want to send to your communication partner.
One logical PMU is added to the Available communication interfaces tree structure. The content of the
logical PMU is edited and displayed in the C37.118 section.
² Repeat these steps for additional communication partners.
Additional C37.118 connections with the logical PMU are added to the Available communication interfaces
tree structure.
The corresponding PDC servers are displayed in the Communication UI.
NOTE
i • According to C37.118, no names are required for the frequency or the frequency changing rate.
• You can also transfer calculation results, for example, an active-power calculation. Pay attention to the
result type and enter it at the proper point within a logical PMU.
• You can change the order of the measuring points using a context menu in the table.
6.4.7.3 Setting ENS parameters

The following section describes how to parameterize the ENS communication.
You can find more information on the parameters in chapter 5.3.2 Parameters and Setting Notes.
NOTE
Initial Parameterization of the ENS Function

If you parameterize the ENS function for the 1st time, you first have to enter the parameters for the SMTP
server and user. To do this, proceed as follows:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
²
Select the Email notification folder in the tree structure on the left and click the icon in the toolbar
above.
Entry fields appear in the middle window section Email notification.
² Enter the address of your SMTP server under SMTP server address, for example, mail-
server.company.com.
² Check the port number of the SMPT server under SMTP server port and correct this number if necessary,
for example 587 for an authenticated connection.
² Click the Active check box to activate the ENS function.
² Under Sender email address, enter the e-mail address to be used by ENS, for example noreply-
SIGUARD-PDP@company.com.
² Under Timeout, check the value of the permitted timeout to be used for communication, and correct it if
necessary. For example, enter 60.
² Mark the Use TLS/SSL check box if you want to use TLS/SSL for communication between ENS and the
mail server.
² If a user name and password are required for authentication, enter a user name under User name.
Click ... to open the password input dialog. Enter the password twice and click OK to confirm.
²
Once you have entered the parameters for the SMTP server and the user and clicked the icon, the
entry fields for a new notification appear.
Parameterizing the notification

² Enter a name for the rule, for example PMU com fail.
² Enter a subject line for the e-mail under Email subject.
² Under Email addresses, enter the email addresses to which the notification will be sent.
² Enter the Delay time in seconds. This is the time for which an event must have lasted before an e-mail is
sent.
² Move the event types intended to trigger an e-mail notification from the list of available event types into
the event-types section using drag and drop.
- or -
² Move a group of event types intended to trigger an e-mail notification from the list of available event
types into the event-types section using drag and drop.
6.4.7.4 Setting ICCP Parameters

The following describes how to set the parameters of the ICCP communication.
The appropriate PDC servers are displayed in the Communication UI diagnostic tool.
See Administrator Manual, Diagnostic Tool, Communication UI.
You can find further information on the parameters in chapter 5.4.2 Parameters and Setting Notes.
NOTE
While setting the parameters, you must enter references to a configuration file for ICCP. You can find a config-
uration file under Windows XP in C:\Program Files\SISCO\osill2\OSILL2.CFG and in the appropriate directories
for other versions of the operating system.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
The following parameters make reference to this configuration file:
• Local AR name
• 1st Remote AR name
• 2nd Remote AR name
• 3rd Remote AR name
• 4th Remote AR name
NOTE
i Only change the configuration file after discussions with your administrator or ICCP specialists.
Creating the ICCP Connection

²
In the tree structure on the left, select the ICCP folder and click the icon in the toolbar above.
Entry fields appear in the middle Communication – ICCP section.

² Change the name of the ICCP connection to a valid, unique ICCP name, for example ICCPLINK1.
² Check and, if necessary, correct the Version, Bilateral Table ID and initiator values that must be negoti-
ated with your communication partner.
² Check the additional configuration parameters, in particular in the Local Settings, Remote Settings, and
Version sections.
Adding Measuring Points

² In the Available communication interfaces tree structure, open the ICCPLINK1 node and click the
Measurements folder.
The Communication – ICCP Measurements input section is displayed.
² In the Default Settings for drag and drop operations section, select the data of a measuring point to be
sent via ICCP during a drag and drop operation. For example, select Magnitude and the messages for
limit violations Min2 and Max2.
Corresponding entries are displayed in the check boxes.
² Drag one or more measuring points from the Available measurements list into the empty table area.
Several rows are entered in the table for each selected measuring point. This depends on the selection in the
previous step and on the data type.
² Change the names of the Server objects to comply with the negotiations you had with the communica-
tion partner.
The changed names are displayed.
² Check whether all values should be Global. Global means that your communication partner is allowed to
forward the information via ICCP.
Information available under Global is indicated by means of a check mark.
² Check whether the standard values for Slope and Offset are correct. For a transmission in kV, set a slope
of 0.001, for example.
The changed values are displayed.
² Check whether you need to invert the messages regarding limiting values. To invert the values, check the
check box in the Invert column.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Inverted messages show a check mark in the Invert column.

² If you wish to delete a measuring point completely from the table again, select the row with the corre-
sponding name in the Measurement column. Open the context menu by a right-click and click Delete.
The measuring point with all derived ICCP information is removed from the table.
² If you wish to delete the derived ICCP information of a measuring point completely from the table again,
select the row with the corresponding name in the Server objects column. Open the context menu by a
right-click and click Delete.
The selected ICCP information is deleted.
² Repeat these steps for all measuring points that you wish to transfer using ICCP.
² If you wish to transfer messages not resulting from limit violations via ICCP, select the Groupindication
item in the tree structure.
The Communication – ICCP Measurements section is displayed.
² Select an event from the Events tree structure and drag it into the Communication – ICCP Groupindica-
tion section. You may select one specific element, for example, PMU device communication failure –
Nuremberg or you can transfer all messages with the same cause summarized, such as PMU device
communication failure.
² Change the names of the Server objects to comply with the negotiations you had with the communica-
tion partner.
The changed names are displayed.
² Check whether all values have to be Global. Global means that your communication partner is allowed to
forward the information via ICCP.
Information available under Global is indicated by means of a check mark.
² In the Invert column, check the check box if transmission is to be inverted.
In this case, 0 = alarm present, 1 = alarm not present.
In the case of Invert, a check mark is displayed.
² If you want to delete a group indication completely from the table again, select the row with the corre-
sponding name in the Group Indication column. Open the context menu by a right-click and click
Delete.
The measuring point with all derived ICCP information is removed from the table.
² If you wish to delete an individual message that is part of a group indication from the table again, select
the corresponding row with the description of the message in the Incidencekey, Elementtype, and
Origin columns. Open the context menu by a right-click and click Delete.
The selected ICCP information is deleted.
² Repeat these steps for all messages and message connections that you wish to transfer using ICCP.
The appropriate ICCP servers are displayed in the Communication UI diagnostic tool.
6.4.7.5 Setting IEC 60870-5-104 Parameters

The following describes how to set the parameters of the IEC 60870-5-104 communication.
The appropriate IEC104 servers are displayed in the Communication UI diagnostic tool.
You can find more information on the parameters in chapter 5.5.2 Parameters and Setting Notes .

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
NOTE
Creating the IEC 60870-5-104 Control-Center Connection

²
Select the IEC 60870-5-104 folder in the tree structure on the left and click the icon in the toolbar
above.
Entry fields appear in the middle IEC 60870-5-104 section.
² Change the name of the IEC 60870-5-104 control-center connection to a valid and unique
EC 60870-5-104 name, for example, TSO partner control center.
² Select the time zone under Time zone.
² Enter the time interval under Cycle period (s).
² Under Interfaces, enter the name, the IP address, and the port of the IP interface.
² Click the Active check box to activate the IP interface.
Creating an LRTU
² In the tree structure on the left, select the control center connection for which you want to create an
LRTU, and click the icon in the toolbar above.
The object LRTU 0 is created in the tree structure. For each additional LRTU, the number at the end increases,
for example, LRTU 1.
Text boxes appear in the middle IEC 60870-5-104 LRTU measurements section. These text boxes are used to
parameterize the transfer of measured values and associated limiting-value indications.
² Enter the Asdu address.
The red background disappears.
² In the Default Settings for drag and drop operations section, select the data of a measuring point to be
sent via IEC 60870-5-104 during a drag and drop operation. For example, select Magnitude and the
messages for limit violations Min2 and Max2.
² Drag one or more measuring points from the Available measurements list into the empty table area.
² Enter the Telegram address.
² Check whether the standard values for Slope and Offset are correct. For a transmission in kV, set a slope
of 0.001, for example.
The changed values are displayed.
² Check whether you need to invert the messages regarding limiting values. To invert the values, select the
check box in the Invert column.
² Select the Gi relevant check box if you want information objects to be sent for a general interrogation
(Gi).
² If you want to delete the derived IEC 60870-5-104 information relating to a measuring point from the
table, select the row with the corresponding name. Open the context menu by a right-click and click
Delete.
- or -

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
² Select the row heading of a measuring point and change the check box in the Modify entries by clicking
the respective check box area. If you deselect a check box, the corresponding row is deleted. If you
select a check box, a row is added.
The selected IEC 60870-5-104 information is deleted.
² Repeat these steps for all measuring points you wish to transfer via IEC 60870-5-104.
Parameterizing Indications
² Select the Indications folder in the tree structure under the LRTU.
A table appears in the IEC 60870-5-104 LRTU indications section. This table is used to parameterize the
transfer of other messages apart from the measured values, for example, PMU communication error.
² Select an event from the Events tree structure and drag it into the IEC 60870-5-104 LRTU indications
section. You can select a specific element, for example, PMU device communication failure – Nurem-
berg.
If you select a higher-level element, all subordinate elements are selected and added to the table, for
example, 1 element for each PMU for a PMU communication error.
1 row is added to the table for each selected event.
² Enter the Telegram address for each measuring point.
² In the Invert column, select the check box if transmission is to be inverted.
In this case, 0 = alarm present, 1 = alarm not present.
² Select the Gi relevant check box if you want information objects to be sent for a general interrogation
(Gi).
² If you want to delete a message from the table, select the corresponding row. Open the context menu by
a right-click and click Delete.
The selected IEC 60870-5-104 information is deleted.
² Repeat these steps for all messages and message connections you wish to transfer via IEC 60870-5-104.
The corresponding IEC 60870-5-104 servers are displayed in the Communication UI diagnostic tool.
6.4.7.6 Setting OPC Parameters

The following describes how to set the parameters of the OPC communication.
NOTE

²
In the tree structure on the left, select the OPC folder and click the icon in the toolbar above.
Entry fields appear in the middle Communication – OPC section.

² Specify a name for the OPC server, for example SIGUARD_PDP.
² Specify a port number to be used for the server.
The port number is displayed.
² Drag one or more measured values from the Available measurements list of measuring points into the
free area below the table headline.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
The names of the measuring points are displayed.

² Digital values can be inverted. To do this, check the appropriate check box in the Invert column.
The check box is displayed.
The corresponding measuring points can be displayed in an OPC browser.
The OPC browser is not included in the scope of delivery.
6.4.8 Example: Triggers
The following describes how to set the parameters in the ATT function.
² Select the Triggers Editor.
²
In the tree structure on the left, select the ATTs folder and click the icon in the toolbar above.
Entry fields appear in the middle section Automated timerange trigger - Save time range.
² Enter a unique name in the Name field.
² Enter a suitable Lead time, for example, 200 sec.
² Enter a suitable Follow up time, for example, 200 sec.
² Enter a suitable Max retrigger time, for example, 100 sec.
² Check whether the Active check box has been selected.
² Select the Measurements tab.
The Default settings for drag and drop operations selection area and the Available measurements list
containing available measuring points and application results are displayed.
² In the Default settings for drag and drop operations section, select those indications whose raising or
cleared indication is to create an automatic time slice, for example, Limit low 2 and Limit high 2.
² From the Available measurements list, drag the measuring points into the Automated timerange
trigger - Save time range section. A message from these measuring points is to create an automatic
time slice. Repeat this step for all application messages that are to create an automatic time slice.
² Select the Applications tab.
A list of the messages for the ISD and PSR applications is displayed.
² Select the individual jobs or superordinate nodes and drag them into the Automated timerange trigger
- Save time range section. Repeat this step for all application messages that are to create an automatic
time slice.
² Change the value in the Transition column if you wish to create an automatic time slice based on a
cleared indication (Disappearing).

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
7 Multisite Manager
7.1 Function Description 288

7.2 User Interface 291
7.3 Parameters and Setting Notes 293
7.4 Working with SIGUARD PDP Multisite Manager 297

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
7.1 Function Description

SIGUARD PDP systems can be installed in parallel with SCADA/EMS systems. SCADA/EMS customers often
require both a main and reserve control-center architecture (National main and National backup in the
following figure), where a redundant SCADA is installed twice in 2 different locations. Both work on the same
shared network and therefore have the same data model.
[dw_multisite, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-1 Multisite Architecture with Regional PDCs and National SPDCs
The preceding figure shows a multisite architecture with regional PDCs and Super-PDCs (SPDCs) at the national
level. The PDCs collect the data of the PMUs of the regional substations and forward them to the national
SPDC.
The SPDCs collect the data of the regional PDCs and use the SIGUARD PDP applications, for example, ISD and
PSR. Furthermore, the data is archived and sent to neighboring power-system operators (via C37.118) and
SCADA/EMS (via IEC 60870-5-104). For simplification, the figure does not show connections to the outside.
For example, to insert a new PMU into the overall system, the corresponding regional control center must first
be updated. If this is not done, the data-maintenance and test system (Data maintenance) is not able to
receive PMU data at the national level, thus failing to fulfill its intended task as a centralized data-maintenance
and test system.
Therefore, central data maintenance can only be used for all systems at the national level. The systems at the
regional level are maintained individually. This is also possible remotely from the data-maintenance and test
system.
To control the configurations on all servers from one location, the project name, version number, and genera-
tion number are visible on the UI of the Multisite Manager. This prevents activation of a production configura-
tion on a test system that uses a test project.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
Requirements for proper functioning

For proper functioning of a multisite system, the following conditions must be met:
• All computers of the multisite system must have the same SIGUARD PDP software version. During a
version upgrade, it is allowed to run SPDC systems with different software versions, but data mainte-
nance is not possible during this time.
• Configuration changes made with the SIGUARD PDP Engineer may only be performed on an SPDC system
(data-maintenance system). Data maintenance of the other SPDC systems using SIGUARD PDP Engineer
is not possible.
• The functions Save calculation (see chapter 4.6.4 Predefined Formulas) and Save changed limiting
values (see chapter 4.7 Limit Editor) in the SIGUARD PDP UI are not available on the SPDC systems that
are not a data-maintenance system.
• During a version upgrade of an SPDC system, the system must be stopped completely (both master and
standby servers). Different software versions on the master and standby servers are not supported.
Siemens recommends assembling a multisite system from the following SPDC systems:
• Data-maintenance and test system

All data-maintenance measures are carried out with the SIGUARD PDP Engineer. The changes can also be
tested on this system.
• 1 or 2 production systems:
Main system, backup system
• If necessary, 1 development system

The Multisite Manager is used to configure all functions of the SIGUARD PDP identically on all SPDC systems.
Example
You need an IEC 60870-5-104 interface on the main system. In order to be able to configure this interface,
you must configured this interface on the data-maintenance system. Activation by the Multisite Manager
copies the necessary configuration data to the main production system (and also to the backup production
system). Only the IP addresses on the SPDC systems must be adapted before activation to the production
system in the Multisite Manager configuration.
Data-Maintenance Measures
In a multisite system, data-maintenance measures must be differentiated into 2 categories:
• Structural changes in the overall system may require an extension of the multisite configuration before
you can activate them on the production systems. These include the following actions:
– Adding or removing a PDC server (see chapter 5.2.2 Parameters and Setting Notes )
– Adding or removing an IEC 60870-5-104 interface (see chapter 5.5.2 Parameters and Setting
Notes )
– Adding or removing a redundant server on the data-maintenance system (see SIGUARD PDP Admin-
istrator Manual, chapters 4.2.8.2 and 4.2.8.3)
For the structural changes, observe the relevant procedure descriptions in the chapters 7.4.2 Adding a
PDC Server to 7.4.5 Deleting the IEC 60870-5-104 Interface.
• All other data-maintenance measures, for example, adding a PMU or changes in the schematic display of
the electrical power system, are performed as follows:
– Performing the data-maintenance measure with the SIGUARD PDP Engineer on the data-mainte-
nance system
– If necessary, check of the data-maintenance measure
– Activation of the modified configuration on the production systems using the Multisite Manager

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
NOTE
i The data maintenance of regional systems, which provide only subsets of the total data, is not possible
with the Multisite Manager, since the concept of using the configuration frame according to IEEE C37.118
does not allow this.
NOTE
i Corrections to the configuration in the Multisite Manager, for example, changed IP address, can only be
activated together with a configuration change in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer of the data-maintenance
system, since a higher generation number of the configuration is required for activation on the other
systems.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
7.2 User Interface
7.2 User Interface

The Multisite Manager provides information in 2 tabs:
• PDP configuration status:

The PDP configuration status tab displays the state of the PDP configuration.
[sc_Multisite manager PDP config status, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-2 Multisite Manager – PDP Configuration Status Tab
[sc_Multisite Manager_activation required, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-3 Multisite Manager – PDP Configuration Status Tab – Activation/Initialization Required
In this tab, the following information is available:

– Sites

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
7.2 User Interface
– Server
– Project:
Name of the SIGUARD PDP project as defined in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer when creating the
project
– Version:
Software version of SIGUARD PDP
– Generation:
Generation number of the configuration. Changed configurations have a higher generation number.
A multisite network is up-to-date if all servers have the same generation number.
– Next Generation:
Appears only during an ongoing activation and represents the generation number that will be acti-
vated soon.
• Multisite configuration:
– Server and archive:
This tab contains information about the server parameters and archive paths of the individual sites.
– Communication:
This tab contains information about the communication settings of the individual sites.
Status Displays
Table 7-1 Status Displays of the Multisite Manager
Status Explanation
The generation is up-to-date (identical to the data-maintenance and test system).
An activation is currently in progress.
An activation is required, the Activate button is visible.

There is an error: The project or version is not identical to the data-maintenance and test
system or the server cannot be reached.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager

Functions
The following functions can be performed in the Multisite Manager.
Table 7-2 Functions of the Multisite Manager
Element Explanation
Click the Save button to save the changes.
Click the Validate button to validate the changes.
Click the Exit button to close the Multisite Manager.
Parameters in the Tab Multisite Configuration – Server and Archive

All settings are made in the Multisite configuration tab.
In the left window section, you can find a tree view of the multisite system. You can select an SPDC system
(Site) and associated PDC servers or IEC 60870-5-104 (IEC 104 server) in this tree view. The respective param-
eters are displayed in the right section.
[sc_Multisite manager Multisite config server archive, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-4 Multisite Manager – Multisite Configuration Tab, Server and Archive
Table 7-3 Functions of the Multisite Configuration Tab
Element Explanation
Click the Duplicate button to create a duplicate with the same name
when the site is selected.
You can create a maximum of 4 sites.
Click the Rename button to rename a site.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
Element Explanation
Click the Delete button to delete a selected site.
Click the Validate button to validate the changes.
To adjust the parameters of a system, select the system in the tree view on the left side (Site).
NOTE
i The parameters of the data-maintenance and test system are edited in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer. There-
fore, they cannot be changed in the Multisite Manager and are dimmed.
[sc_Multisite Manager Multisite config_master site, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-5 Multisite Manager – Multisite Configuration Tab, Server and Archive, Example Master Site
The setting options for the server and archive parameters are explained in the following table.
Table 7-4 Parameters for Multisite Configuration – Server and Archive
Element Explanation
Configuration master site Activate this check box if you have selected the data-maintenance system. You
must flag exactly one system as a data-maintenance system in this way.
Server 1 If the selected system has a redundant configuration, the parameters Host name
Server 2 and IP address LAN A must be filled. If necessary, the parameter IP address LAN
B must also be filled (if a redundant communication network is used).
Host name Name of server 1 or server 2
IP address LAN A IP address of the interface on LAN A in server 1 or server 2, with which the PMU
data are to be received
IP address LAN B IP address of the interface on LAN B in server 1 or server 2, with which the PMU
data are to be received
Path to ring archive Path name to the directory where the ring archive is to be stored. If the system is
server-redundant, this must be a UNC path.
Path to permanent Path name to the directory in which the permanent archive is to be stored. If the
archive system is server-redundant, this must be a UNC path.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
Element Explanation
Path to export Path name to the directory in which the CSV and COMTRADE exports are to be
stored. Siemens recommends defining a UNC path.
Active Activate this check box to enable the offline archive function.
Store to tape Path name to the directory of the staging area that is to be used to copy ring-
archive files to the tape.
Restore from tape Path name to the directory of the staging area, where data backed by tape is
provided for copying into the permanent archive.
Data flow control Option to reduce the data flow to the permanent archive.
You can find more information on these parameters in the SIGUARD PDP Administrator Manual in the chapters
4.2.6.2 and 3.6.
Parameters in the Multisite Configuration Tab – Communication, Section PDC Server
[sc_Multisite manager Multisite configuration, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-6 Multisite Manager – Multisite Configuration Tab, Communication
To adjust the parameters of a system, select the corresponding PDC server in the tree view on the left side
(Site).
NOTE
i The parameters of the data-maintenance and test system are edited in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer. There-
fore, they cannot be changed in the Multisite Manager and are dimmed.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
[sc_Multisite Manager Multisite config_communication_master site, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-7 Multisite Manager – Multisite Configuration Tab, Communication, Example Master Site
The setting options for the communication settings are explained in the following table.
Table 7-5 Parameter Multisite Configuration – Communication PDC Server
Element Explanation
PDC Server Name of the PDC server. This parameter cannot be changed in the Multisite
Manager. A name change must be performed in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
Subsequently, you must transfer the changed name to the multisite configuration
(Configuration → Merge from local PDP configuration...)
IP address LAN A Parameters of the interface on LAN A
IP address LAN B Parameters of the interface on LAN B
Active Activate this check box to enable the interface.
Port Port number for the PDC server on LAN A and LAN B
You can find more information on these parameters in chapter 5.2.2 Parameters and Setting Notes .
Table 7-6 Parameter Multisite Configuration – Communication IEC 60870-5-104-Server
Element Explanation
IEC60870-5-104-Server Name of the IEC 60870-5-104 server
You can find more information on these parameters in chapter 5.5.2 Parameters and Setting Notes .

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
7.4 Working with SIGUARD PDP Multisite Manager
7.4.1 First Configuration of a Multisite System
To configure a multisite system for the first time, proceed as follows:

² Install SIGUARD PDP on all required servers.
You can find more information in the SIGUARD PDP Administrator Manual in the chapters 4.2.1 to 4.2.4.
² Create the first SIGUARD PDP configuration on the data-maintenance system using the SIGUARD PDP
Engineer.
You can find more information in chapter 6 SIGUARD PDP Engineer.
Activate this configuration.
² Start the data-maintenance system.
You can find more information in the SIGUARD PDP Administrator Manual in chapter 4.2.6.
² Check the proper functioning of your configuration.
² Start the Multisite Manager.
A message dialog indicates that an initial Multisite configuration is now being created.
[sc_Multisite manager loading configuration, 1, --_--]
Confirm this dialog.

² In the Multisite configuration tab, define a name for the data-maintenance and test system using the
Rename button.
² Expand your multisite configuration in the Multisite Manager with the first production system.
You can find more information in chapter 7.4.6 Adding Another Production System.
² Perform the previous step for the other production and development systems as well.
Validation
The Editor contains a validation function to avoid incorrect input as much as possible.
²
Click .
- or -
² Press <Ctrl> + <Q>.
If the validation was successful, the following message appears:

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
[sc_validation successful, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-8 Multisite Manager – Validation Successful
If the validation is incorrect, the following message appears:
[sc_Multisite manager validation error, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-9 Multisite Manager – Validation Failed, All Sites Affected

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
[sc_Multisite Manager validation error 1 site, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-10 Multisite Manager – Validation Failed, 1 Site Affected
The failed validation is indicated by a red icon in the tree on the left and the affected parameter is highlighted
in red.
As long as the multisite configuration is not valid, necessary activations on production systems cannot be
executed.
² A tooltip text for the parameter shaded in red provides more information about the error. Correct the
error and click the button.
Saving
If you have done changes and validated them, but have not yet saved them, an asterisk appears in the header:
[sc_Multisite Manager_configuration unsaved, 1, --_--]
Figure 7-11 Changed Configuration Not Saved
² To save your changes, select the menu Configuration → Save.

- or -
²
Click the button.
- or -
² Press <Ctrl> + <S>.
7.4.2 Adding a PDC Server
To add a PDC server to the overall system, proceed as follows:

² Use the SIGUARD PDP Engineer on the data-maintenance system to define the configuration parameters
of the PDC server.
² Activate this configuration change in the SIGUARD PDP Engineer.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
² Check the PDC server for correct functioning (if necessary, with a test software).
During this process, a dialog appears indicating that you must adjust the multisite configuration based on
the SIGUARD PDP configuration. Confirm this dialog with Yes.
² Open the Multisite configuration tab and carry out a validation if necessary.
Click the button or press <Ctrl> + <Q>.

You can find more information on validation in chapter Validation, Page 297.
² Select the nodes flagged with a red icon in the left tree one by one and add the IP addresses LAN A and if
necessary LAN B. Ask your system administrator for it.
²
Validate your changes with .
- or -
² If there are still validation errors (red icon next to the name of the Multisite configuration tab), correct
them.
² Save the updated multisite configuration via the menu Configuration → Save.
- or -
²
Click the button.
- or -
² Open the PDP configuration status tab.
² Activate these data modifications on the production systems.
NOTE
i If you parameterize a system with redundant PDP servers, you must parameterize at least 2 interfaces.
Enter an IP address of the 1st server for the 1st interface and an IP address of the 2nd server for the 2nd
interface.
7.4.3 Adding an IEC 60870-5-104 Interface
To add an IEC 60870-5-104 interface to the overall system, proceed as follows:

² Use the SIGUARD PDP Engineer on the data-maintenance system to define the configuration parameters
of the IEC 60870-5-104 interface.
² Check the IEC 60870-5-104 interface for correct functioning (if necessary, with a test software).
² Open the Multisite configuration tab and carry out a validation.
Click the button or press <Ctrl> + <Q>.

You can find more information on validation in chapter Validation, Page 297.
² Select the nodes flagged with a red icon in the left tree one by one and add the IP address. Ask your
system administrator for it.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager
²
- or -
them.
- or -
²
Click the button.
- or -
7.4.4 Deleting a PDC Server
To delete a PDC server from the overall system, proceed as follows:

² Delete the PDC server using the SIGUARD PDP Engineer on the data-maintenance system.
²
- or -
them.
- or -
²
Click the button.
- or -
7.4.5 Deleting the IEC 60870-5-104 Interface
To delete an IEC 60870-5-104 interface from the overall system, proceed as follows:
² Delete the IEC 60870-5-104 interface using the SIGUARD PDP Engineer on the data-maintenance system.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager

²
- or -
them.
- or -
²
Click the button.
- or -
7.4.6 Adding Another Production System
NOTE
i You can configure a maximum of 4 systems (1 data-maintenance system, 3 production systems).
To add another production system, proceed as follows:

² Open the Multisite configuration tab.
² Select the data-maintenance system (Site) in the tree on the left side.
²
Click the button.
A new system (Site) is added.

² Click the button in order to adjust the name of the new system.
²
- or -
² Select the nodes flagged with a red icon in the left tree one by one and correct or complete the incorrect
settings.
² Repeat the last 2 steps until there is no validation error.
- or -
²
Click the button.
- or -

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Multisite Manager

² Initialize the production system with the Initialize button.
² Initialize the ring archive using the Administrator UI on the production system. You can find more infor-
mation in the SIGUARD PDP Administrator Guide in chapter 4.2.6.4.
² Start SIGUARD PDP on the production system. You can find more information in the SIGUARD PDP Admin-
istrator Guide in the chapters 4.2.6.5. to 4.2.6.7.
7.4.7 Deleting a Production System
To delete a production system, proceed as follows:

² Open the Multisite configuration tab.
² In the tree on the left, select the data-maintenance system (Site) you want to delete.
²
Click the button.
The system is deleted from the multisite configuration.

²
- or -
² If validation errors occur, correct the appropriate settings.
- or -
²
Click the button.
- or -

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Literature
/1/ Siemens AG, SIMEAS R-PMU, Digital Fault Recorder, Manual

E50417-H1000-C360-A2
/2/ Siemens AG, SIPROTEC, High Voltage Bay Controller 6MD85/86, manual
C53000-G5000-C015-1
/3/ Siemens AG, SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processing Administrator Manual
E50417-H1000-C496-B2

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Glossary
Alarm list
In this window section, alarm indications are listed.
ATT
Automatic Time range Trigger
Channel
A channel (measuring point) is the smallest unit with data from a PMU. A specific channel is, for example, the
voltage or frequency measurement.
SIGUARD can process data from different channel types:
Phasor: a measurement giving both amplitude and angle information. This applies to voltages and currents.
Analog: a measurement giving only amplitude information. This applies to frequency, rate of frequency
change, active/reactive/apparent power.
Digital: a measurement with just 2 states: 0/1 or off/on. Used, for example, to detect switch positions or
measure protection-device outputs.
Chart view
This window section displays the detailed curves of individual measured values or calculated values over a
defined time range. With the aid of these diagrams, you can analyze the power-supply system.
COM
Communication subsystems: PDC server (C37.118), ENS, ICCP, IEC 60870-5-104
ENS
Email Notification Service
Event list
In this window section, events are listed.
Fast Fourier Transformation

FFT
The fast Fourier transformation (fast Fourier transform or FFT) is a mathematical operation described by the
French mathematician Fourier. With this operation, a periodic oscillation can be separated into individual
harmonic oscillations. Such operations can be performed by DSPs in real time.
FFT
Fast Fourier Transformation
High-Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol

Like PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol), HSR (High-Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol) is specified in
IEC 62439-3. Both protocols offer redundancy without switching time.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Glossary
The principal function can be found in the definition of PRP. With PRP, the same indication is sent via 2 sepa-
rated networks. In contrast to this, in the case of HSR the indication is sent twice in the 2 directions of the ring.
The recipient receives it correspondingly via 2 paths in the ring, takes the 1st message and discards the 2nd
(see PRP).
Whereas NO indications are forwarded in the end device in the case of PRP, a switch function is installed in the
HSR node. Thus, the HSR node forwards indication in the ring that are not directed at it.
In order to avoid circular messages in the ring, corresponding mechanisms are defined in the case of HSR.
SAN (Single Attached Node) end devices can only be connected with the aid of a RedBox in the case of HSR.
PRP systems and HSR systems can be coupled redundantly with 2 REDBOXES.
HSR
High-Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol
ICCP
Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol
Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol

The ICCP protocol supports the exchange of network data by way of a network (WAN or LAN) between a local
power utility network control center and another power utility, power pools, regional network control centers,
and generating units that do not belong to a power utility. The protocol was standardized as per IEC 61870-6
(TASE.2). In addition to the functions for pre-processing data, ICCP supports a user interface to display defect
statistics with high-performance test and diagnostic functions.
IP
Internet protocol
ISD
Island State Detection
Logical PMU
A subunit of a PMU. In a SIMEAS-R PMU, a Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) is a logical PMU. Some quality informa-
tion, for example, Data invalid, can be derived from a logical PMU.
OPC
Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) for Process Control
Parallel Redundancy Protocol

Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) is a redundancy protocol for Ethernet networks that is specified in IEC
62439-3. Unlike conventional redundancy procedures, such as RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol,
IEEE 802.1D-2004), PRP offers uninterruptible switching, which avoids any down time in the event of a fault,
and thus the highest availability.
PRP is based on the following approach: The redundancy procedure is generated in the end device itself. The
principle is simple: The redundant end device has 2 Ethernet interfaces with the same address (DAN, Double
Attached Node). Now, the same indication is sent twice, in the case of PRP (parallel) to 2 separate networks,
and uniquely marks both with a sequence number. The recipient takes the information that it receives first,
stores its ID based on the source address and the sequence number in a duplicate filter and thus recognizes
the 2nd, redundant information. This redundant information is then discarded. If the 1st indication is missing,
the 2nd indication with the same content comes via the other network. This redundancy avoids a switching
procedure in the network and is thus interruption-free. The end device forwards no messages to the other
network. Since the process is realized in the Ethernet layer (same MAC address), it is transparent and usable
for all Ethernet payload protocols (IEC 61850, DNP, other TCP/IP based protocols). In addition, it is possible to
use one of the 2 networks for the transmission of non-redundant messages.
There are 2 versions of PRP: PRP-0 and its successor PRP-1. Siemens implements PRP-1.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Glossary
PDC
Phasor Data Concentrator
PDP
Phasor Data Processor – a product in the Siemens product family SIGUARD
Permanent archive
Archive with saved time ranges. Special events can be saved as time ranges so that you can access them later.
This can be done manually or by specifying trigger conditions for the ATT function.
PMU device
A PMU device is a device itself with a LAN connection and therefore also an IP address and a port number. A
PMU device consists of one or more logical PMUs.
Power Swing Analysis

In this window section, the PSR jobs for the stations in the power system are listed with the corresponding
phase angle and PSR modes.
PRP
Parallel Redundancy Protocol
PSR
Power Swing Recognition
PSS
Power System Status
Ring archive
This archive is automatically overwritten after expiration of a specified period.
SAS
Serial Attached Storage
SIGUARD PDP (Phasor Data Processing)

Software for monitoring the status of power distribution in extensive power-supply systems.
SIGUARD PDP COM (Communication)

This component transfers the data and information via the following connection options:
IEEE C37.118 connection to another PDP system, for example, a second SIGUARD PDP
ENS for sending detected alarms
ICCP connection to a SCADA/EMS/DMS system, for example, Power 5, Power 7
IEC 60870-5-104 connection to a SCADA/EMS/DMS system
OPC DA for other control systems, for example, SICAM PAS

This component is the SIGUARD PDP parameterizing tool.

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Glossary
SIGUARD PDP ISD (Island State Detection)

This component evaluates frequency deviations and thereby detects the formation of an island within the
network.
SIGUARD PDP PSR (Power Swing Recognition)

This component detects active power swings in the power system. The parameters of the active power and
the voltage-angle difference that is proportional to the active power are observed and evaluated for several
swings (modes). All detected swings are classified and displayed in a map and in diagrams and event/alarm
lists.
SIGUARD PDP UI (User Interface)

This component is the SIGUARD PDP user interface. You can use it to display and analyze the information.
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UI
User Interface – component of SIGUARD PDP
VSC
Voltage-Stability Curve

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Index
A Calculated Measurements
Configure 225
ADR Definition 228
Application Editor 275 Parameters 227
Automatic Disturbance Recognition 81, 81, 89 Calculated value
Automatic Fault Recognition 89 create 264
Alarm list Calculating values 264
Parameters 145 Chart View 129
Alarm List 145 Setting Options 130
Application 153, 255 Communication 257
Automatic Defect Recognition 89 multicast 178, 179
Automatic Fault Recognition 89 Multicast 191
Custom 105 unidirectional 178, 179
Island Detection 38, 40 Unidirectional 191
Power Swing Recognition 69 Communication Editor 278
Power-swing Recognition 59 C37.118 278
Voltage-stability curve 93, 94, 95 ENS 280
Application Editor ICCP 281
ADR 275 IEC 60870-5-104 283
ISD 273 OPC 285
PSR 274 Communication redundancy 20, 23
VSC 277 Configuration
ATT Evaluation of measured values 33
Automatic Time range Trigger 100 Parameters for PSS 33
Automatic Time range Trigger of permanent Configuring a PMU 225
archives 100 Configuring PMU 179, 259
Permanent archive 100, 101 Configuring Sites 43
Trigger Editor 286 Coordinates 249
Automatic Disturbance Recognition 81 Curves
ADR 81, 81 Display/Hide 129
Automatic Disturbance Recognition 81, 81 Displaying 156, 160
Automatic Time range Trigger
ATT 100
Automatic Time range Trigger of permanent
D
archives 100
Automatic Time range Trigger of permanent archives
Data volume 17
ATT 100
Date and time
Automatic Time range Trigger 100
Selecting 156
Automatic Time Trigger
Detection of short circuits
Trigger Editor 286
SCD 81
Short-Circuit Detection 81
C
E
C37.118
Communication Editor 278
Editing Messages 147
Calculate PSS curve 26

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Index
Email Notification Service IEC 60870-5-104

ENS 199 Functions 210
ENS Indications 213
Communication Editor 280 IEC 60870-5-104 209
Email Notification Service 199 Communication Editor 283
Parameters 200 Control center 210
Error messages LRTU 211
after validation 224 Network control-center connection 210
Topical 223 Parameters 209
Event list Input Quantities for Calculated Values 234
Parameters 146 Inputs, Rules 222
Event List 145 Interfaces 18
ISD
Application Editor 273
Configuring Sites 43
F Island Detection 36
Island State Detection 36, 40
Favorite Parameters 42
Calling up 116 Island detection
Deleting 116 Display 124
Overwriting 116 Island Detection
Saving 116 ISD 36
Formula Island State Detection 36
Using 166 Island State Detection
Formulas ISD 36
for Calculated Values 228 Island Detection 36
Function monitoring 18
L
G
Legend
GDL 86 Displaying 156
Generation/Demand Loss 86 Limit Editor 142, 235
Recognition of Producer and Consumer Failures 86 Opening 165
Generation/Demand Loss 86 Setting options 143
GDL 86 Start 142
Recognition of Producer and Consumer Failures 86 Limiting values
Graphical elements Changing 165
Functions 241 define 267
Types 253 Editing 142, 165
Graphical Elements
Characteristics 244
Configuring Value 250
Coordinates 249 M
Priorities 252
Graphical processing Manufacturing Message Specification
Functions 241 MMS 204
Graphical representation of networks 239 Map section
Graphics Editor 268 Enlarging 159
Measurements, applications and formulas 134
Measuring Channel
Editing 196
I Parameters 197
Measuring points
ICCP definition 262
Communication Editor 281 Parameters 236
Communication Settings 204 Measuring Points
Measurements 206 Editing 184

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Index
Parameters 185 Calculation 26

Menu items 119 Setting options 30
MMS Program interface
Manufacturing Message Specification 204 Arranging 114
Multicast 178, 179, 191 Program Interface 112
Multisite Manager Project
Parameters 293 activate 224, 264
creating 259
opening 259
save 222
O saving 263
validate 222
Objects Protocol Data Unit
Selecting 158 PDU 204
Offline mode PSR
Switching on 154 Application Editor 274
Online display Parameters 71
Activate 29 Power Swing Recognition 69
Deactivate 29 PSR Job
OPC Parameters 73
Communication Editor 285 PSR Modes
Parameters 215 Global Modes 72
Parameters 72
P
R
PDC
Parameters 180 Recognition of Producer and Consumer Failures
PDC Server GDL 86
Parameters 193 Generation/Demand Loss 86
PDP Redundancy
Phasor Data Concentrator 180 Communication redundancy 20, 23
PDU Server redundancy 23
Protocol Data Unit 204 Server Redundancy 21
Performance features Reporting 149
SIGUARD PDP 17
Permanent archive
ATT 100
Trigger Editor 286 S
Phase-angle difference
Display 126 Sample event 154
Displaying 157 SCD 81
Phasor Data Concentrator Detection of short circuits 81
PDP 180 Short-Circuit Detection 81
Playback Schematic display 122
Start 155 Hiding 164
Stopping 156 Server redundancy 23
PMU (logical) Server Redundancy 21
creating 261 Setting options 30
PMU (Logical) Limit Editor 143
Parameters 184, 195 SLD 122
PMU (physical) Setting Options
creating 260 Chart View 130
PMU (Physical) Short-Circuit Detection 81
Parameters 180 Detection of short circuits 81
Power swing recognition SCD 81
Display 125 SIGUARD PDP 13
Power System Status 29 Archives 12

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020
Index
COM 13 Multicast 191

ISD 12 unidirectional 178, 179
Performance features 17 Unidirectional 191
PSR 13 unidirectional multicast 178, 179
Server 12 Unidirectional Multicast 191
Software components 12 Unidirectional 179, 191
SIGUARD PDP Engineer 13, 16 Unidirectional multicast 178
Application 218 Unidirectional Multicast 179, 191
Installation 219 User interface 114
Menu 220 Calling up 116
Program window 219 Changing title 115
Toolbar 221 Deleting 116
SIGUARD PDP UI 14, 17 Overwriting 116
Sample event 154 Saving 116
SIGUARD PDP User Interface User Interface 112
Status display 121
Simulation of the PSS Curve 31
Single-line diagram 122
SLD 122 V
SLD
Setting options 122 Validation 222
Single-line diagram 122 performing 263
Software components 12 Voltage magnitude
System configuration Display 127
With communication redundancy 20 VSC
With communications and server redundancy 23 Application Editor 277
With Server Redundancy 21 Parameters 96
Without communication redundancy 19 Voltage-stability curve 95
T W
TCP 178, 179, 191 Working with SIGUARD PDP Engineer 259
Time range
Saving 167
Saving permanently 168
Select 154
Selecting 154
Time Range
Deleting 174
Exporting in COMTRADE Format 170
Exporting in CSV Format 170
Loading 168
Saving in COMTRADE Format 170
Saving in CSV Format 170
Time synchronization 17
Toolbar 120
Tooltips
Displaying 156
Trigger Editor
ATT 286
U
UDP 178, 179, 191
multicast 178, 179

E50417-H1076-C419-B7, Edition 09.2020

Manual Siguard - en V6.20

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Siguard - en V6.20

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Open Source Software

SIGUARD PDP SIGUARD PDP System Overview 1

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual 3

Purpose of the Manual

Customer Support Center

SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual 5

6 SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual

Open Source Software..................................................................................................................................3

1 SIGUARD PDP System Overview................................................................................................................. 11

2 Power System Status Curve (PSS)...............................................................................................................25

SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual 7

3.5 Automatic Event-Controlled Creation of Permanent Archives (ATT).................................. 100

4 SIGUARD PDP User Interface.....................................................................................................................111

8 SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual

4.11.3 Displaying Curves...................................................................................................... 156

6 SIGUARD PDP Engineer............................................................................................................................. 217

SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual 9

6.3 Communication.............................................................................................................. 257

7 Multisite Manager.................................................................................................................................... 287

10 SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual

SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual 11

• SIGUARD PDP Server with SIGUARD PDP Archive

• SIGUARD PDP ISD (Island Detection)

12 SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual

• SIGUARD PDP PSR (Power Swing Recognition)

• SIGUARD PDP VSC (Voltage-Stability Curve)

• SIGUARD PDP COM (Communication)

• SIGUARD PDP ADR (Automatic Disturbance Recognition)

• SIGUARD PDP UI (User Interface)

• SIGUARD PDP Engineer

SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual 13

Figure 1-1 Software Components of SIGUARD PDP

SIGUARD PDP UI (User Interface)

• Menu and Toolbar

• PSS Curve (Power System Status)

• SIGUARD PDP UI - Map (Single-line diagram)

14 SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual

• Measurements, applications and formulas

• Event list, Alarm list

• Power Swing Analysis

Figure 1-2 SIGUARD PDP UI (User Interface), Main Window

SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual 15

Figure 1-3 SIGUARD PDP, Limit Editor

SIGUARD PDP Engineer

Figure 1-4 SIGUARD PDP, SIGUARD PDP Engineer

16 SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual

1.2 Performance Features

• 64 channels (for example: 8 PMUs with 8 channels each)

• A repetition rate of 10 values per second (reporting rate)

• A storage duration of 7 days

SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual 17

• The communication between the SIGUARD PDP software components

• The communication with the devices

• The function of important software components

18 SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual

1.3 System Configurations

1.3.1 Redundancy Versions

SIGUARD PDP supports various redundancy versions:

• Complete system (server and UI on one computer) without communication redundancy

• Complete system (server and UI on one computer) with communication redundancy

1.3.2 System Configuration without Communication Redundancy

SIGUARD PDP, Phasor Data Processing, Manual 19